Manual de Serviço

M0AC/M257
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2016 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
M0AC SP C435DN SP C435DN SP C435DN
M257 SP C440DN SP C440DN SP C440DN
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 09/2015 Original Printing
Rev. 1 02/2016 Addition Information for M0AC
M0AC/M257
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 1-1
1.2 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS ................ 1-2
1.2.1 DIFFERENT POINTS FROM PREVIOUS PRODUCTS ..................................... 1-2
1.3 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................................. 1-3
1.3.2 PAPER PATH....................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................................. 1-5
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ............................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS........................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 PRINTER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 2-4
Unpacking ................................................................................................................ 2-4
Installing the toner ................................................................................................... 2-7
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 2-8
Turning Power On ................................................................................................. 2-10
Selecting the Panel Display Language ................................................................. 2-11
Printing the Test Page ........................................................................................... 2-11
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract ............................................................ 2-11
2.3.2 METER CLICK CHARGE .................................................................................. 2-12
2.3.3 MOVING THE MACHINE .................................................................................. 2-14
2.3.4 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE .................................................................... 2-14
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT (M384) ......................................................................................... 2-15
2.5 CASTER TABLE (M393) .............................................................................................. 2-17
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-17
SM i M0AC/M257
2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 2-18
For Installing the Caster Table (M393) Only ........................................................ 2-18
For Installing with the Paper Feed Unit (M384) ................................................... 2-21
2.6 TRAY HEATER .......................................................................................................... 2-25
2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................................... 2-25
2.6.2 TRAY HEATER (MAINFRAME)....................................................................... 2-26
2.6.3 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL UNIT) ................................................................. 2-29
Component Check .............................................................................................. 2-29
For Installing the Tray Heater in M384 ................................................................ 2-30
For Installing the Securing Bracket ..................................................................... 2-35
2.7 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ......................................................................................... 2-37
2.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 2-37
I/F Card Slots ...................................................................................................... 2-37
SD Card Slots ..................................................................................................... 2-38
2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR USB DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M12
2-38
Component Check .............................................................................................. 2-38
Interface Board Surface ...................................................................................... 2-39
Installation Procedure ......................................................................................... 2-39
What Do the LED Indications Mean? .................................................................. 2-43
IP Address Setting .............................................................................................. 2-44
2.7.3 SD CARD APPLI MOVE ................................................................................. 2-45
Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-45
Outline of SD Card Appli Move ........................................................................... 2-45
Move Exec .......................................................................................................... 2-46
Undo Exec .......................................................................................................... 2-47
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 3-1

3.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH .................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 PUSH SWITCH ................................................................................................. 3-1
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch) ................................................... 3-1
Shutdown Method ................................................................................................. 3-2
Forced Shutdown .................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 BEFORE YOU START................................................................................................. 3-3
3.3 SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 TOOLS .............................................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 EXTERIOR COVERS .................................................................................................. 3-5
3.4.1 LEFT COVER ................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 RIGHT COVER ................................................................................................. 3-6
3.4.3 REAR COVER .................................................................................................. 3-7
M0AC/M257 ii SM
When Reinstalling the Rear Cover .......................................................................... 3-7
3.4.4 TOP COVER........................................................................................................ 3-8
When Reinstalling the Top Cover ............................................................................ 3-9
3.4.5 OPERATION PANEL ........................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.6 INNER LEFT UPPER COVER .......................................................................... 3-10
3.4.7 INNER LEFT FRONT COVER .......................................................................... 3-10
3.4.8 INNER LEFT REAR COVER............................................................................. 3-11
3.4.9 INNER LEFT LOWER COVER ......................................................................... 3-12
3.4.10 INNER RIGHT FRONT COVER ........................................................................ 3-12
3.4.11 INNER RIGHT REAR COVER .......................................................................... 3-14
3.5 LASER OPTICS ........................................................................................................... 3-15
3.5.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS ........................................................................ 3-15
3.5.2 LASER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3-15
Before removing the old laser unit ........................................................................ 3-15
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit ....................... 3-16
Removing the laser unit......................................................................................... 3-16
After installing a new laser unit.............................................................................. 3-17
3.5.3 LASER UNIT FAN ............................................................................................. 3-19
When installing the laser unit fan .......................................................................... 3-19
3.5.4 LDU SHUTTER MOTOR ................................................................................... 3-20
3.6 IMAGE CREATION ...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.6.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT) ......................... 3-21
When installing a new PCDU ................................................................................ 3-22
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLE ................................................................................. 3-24
3.6.3 TONER SUPPLY TUBE .................................................................................... 3-25
3.6.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR................................................................................. 3-30
3.6.5 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR ....................................................................... 3-32
3.6.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL SENSOR ....................................................... 3-33
3.6.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR ......................................................... 3-34
3.6.8 RFID CPU BOARD............................................................................................ 3-35
3.6.9 RFID BOARD .................................................................................................... 3-36
3.6.10 DEVELOPMENT FAN ....................................................................................... 3-36
When installing the development fan .................................................................... 3-37
3.7 IMAGE TRANSFER ..................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.1 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT .............................................................. 3-38
3.7.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT ................................................................................. 3-40
When Installing the Image Transfer Belt ............................................................... 3-44
3.7.3 ITB CONTACT MOTOR .................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.4 ITB CONTACT SENSOR................................................................................... 3-46
SM iii M0AC/M257
3.7.5 ID SENSOR BOARD ......................................................................................... 3-48
After installing a new ID sensor board .................................................................. 3-49
3.8 PAPER TRANSFER ..................................................................................................... 3-50
3.8.1 PTR (PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER) UNIT ...................................................... 3-50
When Installing the PTR Unit ................................................................................ 3-50
3.8.2 PTR CONTACT MOTOR ................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.3 PTR CONTACT SENSOR ................................................................................. 3-52
3.8.4 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR............................................................. 3-53
3.9 DRIVE UNIT ................................................................................................................. 3-54
3.9.1 GEAR UNIT ....................................................................................................... 3-55
When installing the gear unit ................................................................................. 3-59
3.9.2 TONER SUPPLY FAN ....................................................................................... 3-60
When installing the toner supply fan ..................................................................... 3-60
Toner Supply Fan Base ......................................................................................... 3-60
3.9.3 DRUM MOTOR: CMY ....................................................................................... 3-61
3.9.4 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: CMY ....................................................................... 3-62
3.9.5 ITB UNIT/ DRUM-K/ DEVELOPMENT-K MOTOR............................................ 3-63
3.9.6 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH: K ........................................................................... 3-63
3.9.7 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR ........................................................................ 3-64
3.9.8 FRONT DOOR SENSOR .................................................................................. 3-64
3.9.9 MOTORS WITH BRACKET .............................................................................. 3-65
3.9.10 REGISTRATION MOTOR ................................................................................. 3-66
3.9.11 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................................... 3-66
3.9.12 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................................... 3-67
3.9.13 DRUM PHASE SENSOR: CMY ........................................................................ 3-67
3.9.14 DRUM PHASE SENSOR: K .............................................................................. 3-68
3.9.15 DRIVE UNIT FAN .............................................................................................. 3-69
When installing the drive unit fan .......................................................................... 3-69
3.10 FUSING ................................................................................................................. 3-70
3.10.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................................... 3-70
When installing the fusing unit .............................................................................. 3-70
3.10.2 CLEANING UNIT............................................................................................... 3-71
3.10.3 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP ............................................................. 3-72
3.10.4 PRESSURE ROLLER ....................................................................................... 3-74
When Reinstalling the Pressure Roller ................................................................. 3-75
3.10.5 HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMP.................................................................. 3-76
3.10.6 FUSING BELT ................................................................................................... 3-80
3.10.7 FUSING, HEATING AND TENSION ROLLER .................................................. 3-82
When Reinstalling the Fusing Roller ..................................................................... 3-82
M0AC/M257 iv SM
3.10.8 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTAT .................................................................. 3-83
3.10.9 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR .................................................................. 3-84
3.10.10 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR ........................................................ 3-85
3.10.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT ....................................................... 3-86
3.10.12 THERMOPILE ............................................................................................. 3-87
3.11 PAPER FEED ............................................................................................................... 3-88
3.11.1 SEPARATION ROLLER .................................................................................... 3-88
3.11.2 PICK-UP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS .......................................................... 3-89
3.11.3 PAPER FEED UNIT........................................................................................... 3-90
3.11.4 REGISTRATION SENSOR ............................................................................... 3-91
3.11.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR.................................................................. 3-92
3.11.6 PAPER HEIGHT SENSOR 1 ............................................................................. 3-93
3.11.7 PAPER HEIGHT SENSOR 2 ............................................................................. 3-94
3.11.8 PAPER LIFT SENSOR ...................................................................................... 3-95
3.11.9 PAPER END SENSOR...................................................................................... 3-96
3.11.10 PAPER FEED SENSOR ............................................................................. 3-97
3.11.11 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .................................................................................... 3-98
3.11.12 TRAY 1 SET SENSOR................................................................................ 3-99
3.11.13 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD ............................................................... 3-100
3.11.14 CLEANING THE PAPER DUST CONTAINER ......................................... 3-101
3.12 PAPER EXIT ........................................................................................................ 3-102
3.12.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT .......................................................................................... 3-102
3.12.2 PAPER EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................... 3-104
3.12.3 INVERTER SENSOR ...................................................................................... 3-106
3.12.4 PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR....................................................................... 3-106
3.12.5 FUSING EXIT SENSOR .................................................................................. 3-107
3.12.6 INVERTER MOTOR ........................................................................................ 3-107
3.12.7 FUSING COOLING FAN ................................................................................. 3-108
When installing the fusing cooling fan ................................................................. 3-108
3.12.8 UPPER COVER SENSOR .............................................................................. 3-109
3.13 DUPLEX UNIT ..................................................................................................... 3-110
3.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT ................................................................................................. 3-110
3.13.2 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT ...................................................................................... 3-111
3.13.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR ..................................................................... 3-113
3.13.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR ................................................................................. 3-115
3.13.5 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR...................................................................... 3-116
3.13.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR............................................................................ 3-117
3.13.7 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR ................................................................... 3-121
3.13.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER, FRICTION PAD .................................................... 3-122
SM v M0AC/M257
3.13.9 HVPS: D .......................................................................................................... 3-124
3.13.10 FUSING FAN............................................................................................. 3-125
When installing the fusing fan ............................................................................. 3-125
3.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................................... 3-126
3.14.1 BOARDS ......................................................................................................... 3-126
3.14.2 HDD (OPTION)................................................................................................ 3-128
Disposal of HDD Units......................................................................................... 3-129
Reinstallation ....................................................................................................... 3-130
3.14.3 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................................. 3-130
When installing the new controller board ............................................................ 3-131
3.14.4 BRIDGE BOARD ............................................................................................. 3-132
3.14.5 PSU ................................................................................................................. 3-132
3.14.6 CONTROLLER BOX ....................................................................................... 3-134
3.14.7 BCU ................................................................................................................. 3-136
When installing the new BCU .............................................................................. 3-137
Removing the BCU with bracket ......................................................................... 3-138
3.14.8 HVPS: T1T2 BOARD....................................................................................... 3-139
3.14.9 HVPS: CB BOARD .......................................................................................... 3-140
3.14.10 DC SWITCH BOARD................................................................................ 3-141
3.14.11 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE................................................. 3-142
NVRAM on the BCU ............................................................................................ 3-142
NVRAM on the Controller .................................................................................... 3-143
3.15 ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................................. 3-144
3.15.1 GAMMA ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................. 3-144
Summary ............................................................................................................. 3-144
Adjustment Procedure ......................................................................................... 3-146
4. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE ..................................... 4-1

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION ........................................................................... 4-1
Accessing the Required Program ........................................................................... 4-1
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program ................................................. 4-1
Exiting Service Mode............................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 REMARKS ........................................................................................................... 4-2
Display on the Control Panel Screen ...................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING........................................................................... 4-4
4.2 SERVICE SP MODE TABLES ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) .............................................................................. 4-5
4.3 ENGINE SP MODE TABLES: SP1000 ........................................................................ 4-18
4.3.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) .............................................................................................. 4-18
M0AC/M257 vi SM
4.4 ENGINE SP MODE TABLES - SP2000 ....................................................................... 4-43
4.4.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) ............................................................................................. 4-43
4.5 ENGINE SP MODE TABLES - SP3000 ..................................................................... 4-141
4.5.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) .................................................................................... 4-141
4.7.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ........................................................................................... 4-164
4.9.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) .................................................................................... 4-218
4.10 ENGINE SP MODE TABLES - SP8000 .............................................................. 4-248
4.10.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 .................................................................................... 4-248
4.11 INPUT CHECK/ OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................ 4-277
4.11.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE .................................................................................... 4-277
Printer .................................................................................................................. 4-277
Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1) .................................................................... 4-281
Table 2: Paper Height Sensor ............................................................................. 4-281
4.11.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ................................................................................ 4-282
Printer .................................................................................................................. 4-282
4.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ................................................................................ 4-289
4.12.1 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............................................................................ 4-289
4.13 FIRMWARE UPDATE.......................................................................................... 4-291
4.13.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................................... 4-291
4.13.2 SD CARD FIRMWARE UPDATING ................................................................ 4-292
Before You Begin ................................................................................................. 4-292
File Arrangement ................................................................................................. 4-292
Update Procedure ............................................................................................... 4-293
Error Handling ..................................................................................................... 4-294
Power Failure ...................................................................................................... 4-294
4.13.3 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ................................................. 4-295
Error Message Table ........................................................................................... 4-295
4.14 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ............................................................... 4-297
4.14.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA ........................................................................... 4-297
4.14.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA..................................................................... 4-298
4.15 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ......................................................... 4-299
4.15.1 INFORMATION LIST ....................................................................................... 4-299
4.15.2 DOWNLOAD ................................................................................................... 4-299
4.15.3 UPLOAD .......................................................................................................... 4-300
4.16 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS ...................................................................... 4-301
SM vii M0AC/M257
4.16.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 4-301
Types of debug logs that can be saved .............................................................. 4-301
Operation Log Security........................................................................................ 4-303
4.16.2 STORING THE DEBUG LOGS WITH SD CARD ........................................... 4-303
4.16.3 RETRIEVING DEBUG LOGS ......................................................................... 4-303
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log ............................................................ 4-304
4.17 SP TEXT MODE (SAVING SMC LIST TO SD CARD) ........................................ 4-305
4.17.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 4-305
SP Text Mode ...................................................................................................... 4-305
4.17.2 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................. 4-305
4.17.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS.................................................... 4-306
4.17.4 ERROR MESSAGES ...................................................................................... 4-307
4.18 DIP SWITCHES................................................................................................... 4-308
4.18.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................................. 4-308
5. TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SC TABLES .................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 5-1
Summary ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2 SC1XX: SCANNING............................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.3 SC 2XX: EXPOSURE.......................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1 .................................................................. 5-10
5.1.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING - 2................................................................... 5-15
5.1.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING ............................................................... 5-21
5.1.7 SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION ............................................................... 5-35
5.1.8 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM ............................................................................ 5-40
5.1.9 SC9XX: MISCELLANEOUS .............................................................................. 5-49
5.2 PROCESS CONTROL RESULTS ............................................................................... 5-52
5.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .......................................................... 5-52
5.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ............................................... 5-53
Vsg Adjustment Result .......................................................................................... 5-55
5.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT ........................................................ 5-56
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE .................................................................................... 5-57
5.3.1 BLANK PRINT ................................................................................................... 5-57
5.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT ........................................................................................... 5-57
5.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR .................................................................................... 5-58
5.3.4 LIGHT PRINT .................................................................................................... 5-58
5.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS ................................................... 5-59
5.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS ................................................................ 5-60
5.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS ....................................................... 5-61
M0AC/M257 viii SM
5.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES ......................................................................... 5-61
5.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND ..................................................................................... 5-61
5.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS .......................................................................... 5-62
5.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS.................................................... 5-62
5.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS............................................................. 5-62
5.3.13 GHOSTING ....................................................................................................... 5-62
5.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS ................................................... 5-63
5.3.15 IMAGE SKEW ................................................................................................... 5-63
5.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN ..................................................................................... 5-64
5.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE .................................................................... 5-64
5.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE ........................................... 5-65
5.4 JAM DETECTION ........................................................................................................ 5-66
5.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ...................................................................................... 5-66
5.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ............................................................... 5-66
Paper Size Code ................................................................................................... 5-68
5.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS..................................................................... 5-69
5.5.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................................... 5-69
Optional Paper Feed Unit ...................................................................................... 5-74
5.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 5-75
Power Supply Unit ................................................................................................. 5-75
5.5.3 LEDS ................................................................................................................. 5-75
SM ix M0AC/M257
READ THIS FIRST
Important Safety Notices

Responsibilities of the Customer Engineer
Customer Engineer
Maintenance shall be done only by trained customer engineers who have completed service
training for the machine and all optional devices designed for use with the machine.
Reference Material for Maintenance

 Maintenance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for
maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials (service manuals, technical
bulletins, operating instructions, and safety guidelines for customer engineers).
 In regard to other safety issues not described in this document, all customer engineers shall
strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the "CE Safety Guide".
 Use only consumable supplies and replacement parts designed for use of the machine.
Before Installation, Maintenance

Shipping and Moving the Machine
 Work carefully when lifting or moving the machine. If the machine is heavy, two or more
customer engineers may be required to prevent injuries (muscle strains, spinal injuries,
etc.) or damage to the machine if it is dropped or tipped over.
 Personnel moving or working around the machine should always wear proper clothing
and footwear. Never wear loose fitting clothing or accessories (neckties, loose sweaters,
bracelets, etc.) or casual footwear (slippers, sandals, etc.) when lifting or moving the
machine.
 Always unplug the power cord from the power source before you move the product.
Before you move the product, arrange the power cord so it will not fall under the product.
Power
 Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure. After
switching off the machine, power is still supplied to the main machine and other devices.
To prevent electrical shock, switch the machine off, wait for a few seconds, then unplug
the machine from the power source.
 Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off, work carefully to
avoid injury. After removing covers or opening the machine to do checks or adjustments,
never touch electrical components or moving parts (gears, timing belts, etc.).
 After turning the machine on with any cover removed, keep your hands away from
electrical components and moving parts. Never touch the cover of the fusing unit, gears,
timing belts, etc.
Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments
 After installation, maintenance, or adjustment, always check the operation of the machine
to make sure that it is operating normally. This ensures that all shipping materials,
protective materials, wires and tags, metal brackets, etc., removed for installation, have
been removed and that no tools remain inside the machine. This also ensures that all
release interlock switches have been restored to normal operation.
 Never use your fingers to check moving parts causing spurious noise. Never use your
fingers to lubricate moving parts while the machine is operating.
Special Tools
 Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

 For special adjustments, use only the special tools and lubricants described in the service
manual. Using tools incorrectly, or using tools that could damage parts, could damage the
machine or cause injuries.
During Maintenance
General
 Before you begin a maintenance procedure:

1) Switch the machine off,
2) Disconnect the power plug from the power source,
3) Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes.
 Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces.
Safety Devices
 Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement. Always replace safety
devices immediately.
 Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device. Modification or
removal of a safety device (fuse, switch, etc.) could lead to a fire and personal injury.
Always test the operation of the machine to ensure that it is operating normally and safely
after removal and replacement of any safety device.
 For replacements use only the correct fuses or circuit breakers rated for use with the
machine. Using replacement devices not designed for use with the machine could lead to
a fire and personal injuries.
Organic Cleaners
 During preventive maintenance, never use any organic cleaners (alcohol, etc.) other than
those described in the service manual.
 Make sure the room is well ventilated before using any organic cleaner. Use organic
solvents in small amounts to avoid breathing the fumes and becoming nauseous.
 Switch the machine off, unplug it, and allow it to cool before doing preventive
maintenance. To avoid fire or explosion, never use an organic cleaner near any part that
generates heat.
 Wash your hands thoroughly after cleaning parts with an organic cleaner to
contamination of food, drinks, etc. which could cause illness.
 Clean the floor completely after accidental spillage of silicone oil or other materials to
prevent slippery surfaces that could cause accidents leading to hand or leg injuries. Use
"My Ace" Silicone Oil Remover (or dry rags) to soak up spills. For more details, please
refer to Technical Bulletin "Silicone Oil Removal" (A024-50).
Lithium Batteries
 Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery prescribed for
use on that board. Replacing a lithium battery with any type other than the one prescribed
for use on the board could lead to an explosion or damage to the PCB.
 Never discard used batteries by mixing them with other trash. Remove them from the
work site and dispose of them in accordance with local laws and regulations regarding
the disposal of such items.
Power Plug and Power Cord
 Before serving the machine (especially when responding to a service call), always make
sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source. A partially
inserted plug could lead to heat generation (due to a power surge caused by high
resistance) and cause a fire or other problems.
 Always check the power plug and make sure that it is free of dust and lint. Clean it if
necessary. A dirty plug can generate heat which could cause a fire.
 Inspect the length of the power cord for cuts or other damage. Replace the power cord if
necessary. A frayed or otherwise damaged power cord can cause a short circuit which
could lead to a fire or personal injury from electrical shock.
 Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply. Make sure
the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg. Coiling the
power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire.
 Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power cord
can be removed quickly in case of an emergency.
 Make sure that the power cord is grounded (earthed) at the power source with the ground
wire on the plug.
 Connect the power cord directly into the power source. Never use an extension cord.
 When you disconnect the power plug from the power source, always pull on the plug, not
the cable.
After Installation, Servicing
Disposal of Used Items
 Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.

 Toner or toner cartridges thrown into a fire can ignite or explode and cause serious injury.
At the work site always carefully wrap used toner and toner cartridges with plastic bags to
avoid spillage before disposal or removal.
 Always dispose of used items (developer, toner, toner cartridges, OPC drums, etc.) in
accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
 To protect the environment, never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from
consumables at a household waste collection point. Dispose of these items at one of our
dealers or at an authorized collection site.
 Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with
company policy regarding the recycling or disposal of such items.
Points to Confirm with Operators

At the end of installation or a service call, instruct the user about use of the machine. Emphasize
the following points.
 Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by
following the procedures described in the operating instructions.
 Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove.
 Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables.
 Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the machine.
 Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in the
operating instructions.
 Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not
the cord) if any of the following events occur: 1) something has spilled into the product, 2)
service or repair of the product is necessary, 3) the product cover has been damaged.
 Caution operators about removing paper fasteners around the machine. They should never
allow paper clips, staples, or any other small metallic objects to fall into the machine.
Special Safety Instructions for Toner
Accidental Physical Exposure
 Work carefully when removing paper jams or replacing toner bottles or cartridges to avoid
spilling toner on clothing or the hands.
 If toner is inhaled, immediately gargle with large amounts of cold water and move to a
well ventilated location. If there are signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical
attention.
 If toner gets on the skin, wash immediately with soap and cold running water.
 If toner gets into the eyes, flush the eyes with cold running water or eye wash. If there are
signs of irritation or other problems, seek medical attention.
 If toner is swallowed, drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner. If
there are signs of any problem, seek medical attention.
 If toner spills on clothing, wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water.
Never use hot water! Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric.
Handling and Storing Toner
 Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.

 Never store toner, developer, toner cartridges, or toner bottles (including empty toner
bottles or cartridges) in a location where they will be exposed to high temperature or an
open flame.
 Always store toner and developer supplies such as toner and developer packages,
cartridges, and bottles (including used toner and empty bottles and cartridges) out of the
reach of children.
 Always store fresh toner supplies or empty bottles or cartridges in a cool, dry location that
is not exposed to direct sunlight.
Toner Disposal
 Never attempt to incinerate toner, used toner, or empty toner containers (bottles or
cartridges). Burning toner can explode and scatter, causing serious burns.
 Always wrap used toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to avoid
spillage. Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
 Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized
collection site. Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bottles in accordance
with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Safety Instructions for this Machine
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the machine and peripherals, make sure that the
machine and peripheral power cords are unplugged.
2. The plug should be near the machine and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the machine and the paper tray unit are supplied with
electrical voltage even if the main power switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
5. If the [Start] key is pressed before the machine completes the warm-up period (the [Start] key
starts blinking red and green ), keep hands away from the mechanical and the electrical
components as the machine starts making copies as soon as the warm-up period is
completed.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
7. To prevent a fire or explosion, keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and
aerosols.
Health Safety Conditions

1. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified types at the proper intervals.
2. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it
may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first
aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

1. The machine and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service
representative who has completed the training course on those models.
2. The NVRAM on the system control board has a lithium battery which can explode if replaced
incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an identical one. The manufacturer recommends
replacing the entire NVRAM. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be
handled in accordance with local regulations.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed
to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local
regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than
100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to
chemical reactions and heat build-up.
 The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

 Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical
units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the
requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer
Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore
directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when
replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
 WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser
Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
 CAUTION MARKING:
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
Pag e Date Ad d ed / Upd ated / New
None
Machine Configuration
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
1.1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Item Machine Code Remarks
SP C440DN M0AC/M257
Up to three tray units can be

Paper Feed Unit PB1020 M384 installed.
Common with M065/ M066
Caster Table Type C M393 Common with M065/ M066
Hard Disk Drive Option

M479-00
Type P7
IEEE802.11 Interface unit

M417
Type O
IEEE1284 Interface Board Common with M065/ M066

B679-17
Type A
USB Device Server Option

D3A7
Type M12
Camera Direct Print Card

M479-04
Type P7
VM CARD Type P7 M479-08
IPDS Unit Type P7 M479-01, -02, -03
Direct Print Option Type P7 M479-05, -06, -07
SD CARD SET FOR FONT

D641-54
TYPE D FOR MFP
SM 1-1 M0AC/M257
Guidance for Those Familiar with Predecessor Products
1.2 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE FAMILIAR WITH
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
The M0AC/M257 is similar to the M065 and M066 models.

If you have experience with those products, the following information will be of help when you
read this manual.
1.2.1 DIFFERENT POINTS FROM PREVIOUS PRODUCTS
New Predecessor Models
M0AC/M257 M065 M066
LT: 42 ppm, LT: 37 ppm, LT: 42 ppm,

PPM
A4: 40 ppm A4: 35 ppm A4: 40 ppm
Controller Type GW+ GW
Power Switch DC Switch AC Switch
Light Detection
Available Not available
Sensor
HDD Option Option Standard
Additional network
Option Not available
interface port
ELP-NX Option Option Standard
Data Overwrite
Security Unit and On board SD card SD card
HDD Encryption Unit
Log-storing function Available Not available
M0AC/M257 1-2 SM
Overview
1.3 OVERVIEW
Information
Product
1.3.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Toner Bottle [Y] 10. By-pass Tray

2. Toner Bottle [M] 11. PCDU (Photo Conductor
3. Toner Bottle [C] Development Unit)
4. Toner Bottle [K] 12. Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1)
5. ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit 13. PSU (Power Supply Unit)
6. Fusing Unit 14. Polygon Mirror Motor
7. Duplex Unit 15. LDU
8. ID Sensor 16. ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Cleaning
9. PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) Unit
SM 1-3 M0AC/M257
Overview
1.3.2 PAPER PATH
[A]: Duplex Unit

[B]: By-pass Tray
[C]: Optional Paper Feed Trays (Trays 2, 3, and 4)
[D]: Standard Paper Feed Tray (Tray 1)
[E]: Standard Paper Exit Tray
M0AC/M257 1-4 SM
Overview
1.3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
Information
Product
1. ITB Unit/ Drum-K/ Development-K Motor:
This controls the OPC for black, development unit for black, and ITB unit.
2. Drum Motor: CMY:
This controls the OPCs for cyan, magenta, and yellow.
3. Development Motor: CMY:
This controls the color development units (cyan/ magenta/ yellow).
4. Development Clutch: K:
This controls the drive power to the development unit for black.
5. Paper Feed Motor:
This controls the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1).
6. Vertical Transport Motor:
This controls the vertical transport roller.
7. Registration Motor:
This controls the registration rollers.
8. Duplex/By-pass Motor:
This controls the duplex entrance, relay, exit, and by-pass feed rollers.
9. Fusing/ Paper Exit Motor:
This controls the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.
10. Inverter Motor:
This controls the inverter roller.
SM 1-5 M0AC/M257
INSTALLATION
None
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Installation
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)
2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Do not let the machine get exposed to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5
mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
SM 2-1 M0AC/M257
Installation Requirements
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS
 This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High
ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a
well-ventilated room.
A: Over 500 mm (19.7")

B: Over 20 mm (0.8")
C: Over 100 mm (4.0")
D: Over 700 mm (27.6")
Above the machine: Over 350 mm (13.8")
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance.
2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
 Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

 Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
 Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
120 V to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 8 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: NA: ±8.66 %/ EU: ±10 %
3. Do not put things on the power cord.
M0AC/M257 2-2 SM
Optional Unit Combinations
2.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS
2.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS

U: User installation, C: CE installation
Installation
No. Options Remarks
1 Paper Feed Unit PB1020 (M384) U/C Up to x 3

User: For installing on
the table
CE: For installing on
the floor
2 Caster Table Type C (M393) C Install the caster table

if the machine is on the
floor.
2.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

U: User installation, C: CE installation
No. Options Remarks
1 Hard Disk Drive Option Type P7 (M479) U -
2 IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A (B679-17) U
3 IEEE802.11 Interface unit Type O (M417) U I/F slot
4 USB Device Server Option Type M12 C
5 Camera Direct Print Card Type P7 U
6 VM CARD Type P7 U
7 IPDS Unit Type P7 U

SD slot 1
8 XPS Direct Print Option Type P7 U
9 SD CARD SET FOR FONT TYPE D FOR U

MFP(D641-54)
SM 2-3 M0AC/M257
Printer Installation
2.3 PRINTER INSTALLATION
2.3.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
 Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the
future if you transport the machine to another location.
Unpacking
 When lifting the machine, use the inside grips on both sides of the machine.
 If not, the machine could be dropped. This may cause an injury and may damage the
machine.
 Place no objects on the left cover or on the inner cover.
1. Remove the plastic bag.
2. Lift the machine with four people by using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
 Do not hold the machine at the front and rear bottom corners when lifting.
 Grips must be used only for moving the machine without caster table and paper feed
unit. If these items are also installed when you move the machine, do not use the
grips.
 Do not remove the tapes before placing the machine.

 Lower the machine slowly and carefully, so as not to pinch your hands.
3. Remove the tape from the printer.
M0AC/M257 2-4 SM
4. Open the left cover [A].
Installation
5. Turn the green lever counterclockwise ( ), and then slowly open the inner cover ( ).
6. Remove the securing pin, as shown, from the transfer unit. Pinch it ( ), and then pull it
out ( - ).
7. Turn the green lever of the transfer unit counterclockwise to unlock the unit ( ).
Remove the protective sheet, as shown. Pinch the orange tape ( ), and then pull it out
( ).
SM 2-5 M0AC/M257
8. Turn the green lever clockwise to lock the unit.
9. Close the inner cover.

10. Lock the inner cover by pushing on both ends ( ), and then turning the green lever
clockwise ( ).
11. Close the left cover.
 Using both hands, push the left cover firmly, until it clicks into place.
M0AC/M257 2-6 SM
Installation
12. Put labels "1" on the front of the paper tray.
Installing the toner

1. Open the upper cover.
2. Shake the toner bottles up and down seven or eight times.
3. Install the yellow toner bottle first. Holding the toner bottle horizontally with the label
facing up, align the label with the position of the triangular mark.
SM 2-7 M0AC/M257
 Be sure to set the toner bottles so that they are straight and flat.
 Carefully align the label on each toner bottle with the triangular mark on the receiving
side.
4. Push in the toner bottle until you hear a clicking sound.
 Do not repeatedly insert and remove toner bottles. This causes toner leakage.
5. Close the upper cover.
Loading Paper
1. Pull out the paper tray until it stops.
2. Lift it slightly, and then pull it out.
M0AC/M257 2-8 SM
3. Pinch the green clips on the side guide and the end guide, and then adjust the guides
to the paper size being loaded.
Installation
4. Load the new paper stack print side up, making sure the paper is flush against the
paper guides.
5. Adjust the paper guides to close any gaps.
 Do not move paper loaded in the tray more than a few millimeters. Excessive
movement of loaded paper can cause edges of sheets to snag on the openings of
the tray's lifting plate, resulting in sheets being folded or becoming jammed.
 When adjusting the paper width, use the right side guide only, with the green clip. Do
not hold the left side guide at this time, or skew will occur.
6. Lift the front of the paper tray, and slowly slide the paper tray back until it stops. Make
SM 2-9 M0AC/M257
sure that the paper tray is fully inserted to prevent paper jams.
Turning Power On
 Turn off the power switch whenever you plug in and unplug the power cord.
1. Plug in the machine.
2. Turn on the power switch.
 Do not turn off the power switch until initialization is completed ("Ready" appears on
the display when initialization is completed). Otherwise, the machine may
malfunction.
M0AC/M257 2-10 SM
Selecting the Panel Display Language
 You can select one of these languages (the default is English): English, German, French,
Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish
or Hungarian.
 You do not have to do this procedure if you use English. Do this procedure if you want to
Installation
use a different language.
1. Turn on the power switch of the printer.
 "Ready" shows on the panel display after the machine warms up.
2. Press the "Menu" key.
3. Press the " " or " " key to select "Language."
4. Press the "OK" key.
5. Press the " " or " " key to select the language you want.
7. Press the "Menu" key to return to the initial screen.
Printing the Test Page

You can check if the printer works correctly by printing a test page such as the configuration page.
However, you cannot check the connection between the printer and the computer by printing the
test page.
1. Turn on the power switch of the printer.
 "Ready" shows on the panel display after the machine warms up.
3. Press the " " or " " key to select "List/Test Print".
5. Press the " " or " " key to select "Config. Page".
7. The test printing starts shortly after.
8. Press the "Menu" key to return to the initial screen.
9. Turn off the power switch of the printer.
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings depending on the each customer's service contract. For details,
refer to "Meter Click Charge" following this section.
SM 2-11 M0AC/M257
2.3.2 METER CLICK CHARGE

Basically, there are two ways to set up this function.
Meter click charge enabled (SP 5-930-001 set to "1 (enabled)"): The counter can be displayed
and printed by the customer. The technician can then call the customer and ask them to read the
counter.
Meter click charge disabled (SP 5-930-001 set to "0 (disabled)"; this is the default setting):
The counter cannot be displayed or printed by the customer. To check the counter, the technician
must print the SMC report (SP 5-990).
 You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with
the contract (See “SP5-045-001”.).
 If the setting of SP5-930-001 is set to "1 (enabled)", the settings of SP5-930-010, -014
and -016 must be adjusted.
M0AC/M257 2-12 SM
Item SP No. Function Default
Meter Click SP5-930-001 Enables or disables Meter Click "0": OFF

Charge Charge.
When enabled:
 The counter menu shows
Installation
immediately after you push the
"Menu" key. The "Counter
Method" (SP5-045) sets the
type of the counter.
 You can print the counter from
the counter menu.
When disabled:
 The counter menu does not
show.
Meter Click SP5-930-010 Enables or disables the PM alert for "1": No alert
Charge: the PCDUs.
PCDU If this SP is enabled, an alert
message is displayed when the
PCDUs need to be replaced.
Charge: the image transfer belt unit.
Image If this SP is enabled, an alert
Transfer Belt message is displayed when the
Unit image transfer belt unit needs to be
replaced.
Charge: the fusing unit.
Fusing Unit If this SP is enabled, an alert
message is displayed when the
fusing unit needs to be replaced.
Counter SP5-045-001 Specifies if the counting method "1": Prints

method used in meter charge mode is
based on developments or prints.
SM 2-13 M0AC/M257
Item SP No. Function Default
Service Tel: SP5-812-001 -001: shows or sets the telephone -

Telephone and -002 number of the service
/Facsimile representative.
-002: shows or sets the fax number
of the service station. The number
is printed on the counter list when
the "Meter Click Charge" is
enabled. User can send a fax
message with the counter list.
2.3.3 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See
the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer
distance.
 Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit.
2.3.4 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

1. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates
with a sheet of paper and tape.
2. Do one of the following:
 Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
 Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
 After you move the machine, make sure you do the "Auto Color Registration" as follows.
This optimizes color registration.
 1) Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
 2) Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
 To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message
is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.
M0AC/M257 2-14 SM
Paper Feed Unit (M384)
2.4 PAPER FEED UNIT (M384)
For details, refer to the "Hardware Guide" for this machine.
 Install the caster table and securing bracket if the machine is installed on the floor (page
Installation
2-17 "Caster Table (M393)").
1. Remove the tape from the paper feed unit.
2. Lift the machine with four people by using the inset grips on both sides of the machine.
3. Align the machine with the two upright pins on the paper feed unit and then lower the
machine slowly.
SM 2-15 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed Unit (M384)
 When installing two or three units, first connect the units to each other (using the
same procedure as described above), and then connect them as a single unit to the
machine.
M0AC/M257 2-16 SM
Caster Table (M393)
2.5 CASTER TABLE (M393)
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
Installation
No. Description Q'ty
1 Screws (M3 x 8) 3
2 Spring washer screws 13
3 Washers 3
4 Spring washers 3
5 Securing pins 2
6 Securing brackets (left) 3
7 Securing holders 3
8 Securing brackets (right rear) 3
9 Table joint bracket (left) 1
10 Table joint brackets (right front) 1
11 Table joint bracket (right rear) 1
 Some of these accessories may not be used. It differs depending on how many optional
trays are installed in the machine.
SM 2-17 M0AC/M257
Caster Table (M393)
2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
 Handles must be used only for moving the machine without caster table and paper feed
unit. If either or both of these items are installed when you move the machine, do not use
the handles.
For Installing the Caster Table (M393) Only

1. Open the left cover.
2. Inner left lower cover ( x 3)
3. Push the holder [A] down.
M0AC/M257 2-18 SM
Caster Table (M393)
4. Remove the holder [A].
Installation
5. Reinstall the inner left lower cover ( x 3).
7. Install the two pins [A] in the screw holes.
8. Lift the machine and install it on the caster table.
 Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
9. Open the duplex unit.
SM 2-19 M0AC/M257
Caster Table (M393)
10. Right cover [A] ( x 1)
11. Install the two table joint brackets [A] at the right side ( x 5).
12. Reinstall the right cover ( x 1).

13. Install the table joint bracket [A] at the left side ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 2-20 SM
Caster Table (M393)
Installation
14. Close the front door.
15. Adjust the plate [A] until it is level by rotating each screw.
For Installing with the Paper Feed Unit (M384)

1. Remove all tapes from the paper feed unit.
2. Lift the paper feed unit, and then install it on the caster table.
3. Lift the machine and install it on the paper feed unit.
 Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
4. Open the front door.
5. Right cover (page 2-18)
6. Remove the right cover [A] of the paper feed unit ( x 2).
SM 2-21 M0AC/M257
Caster Table (M393)
7. Install the securing bracket [A] ( x 2).

 If two or three optional paper feed units are to be installed, install the securing bracket [A]
at the right side of the optional paper feed units in a similar location to that shown below
to secure them ( x 2).
8. Install the joint table brackets [B] ( x 5).
9. Install the securing holder [C].
10. Reinstall the right cover and the right cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 2-22 SM
Caster Table (M393)
11. Remove the left cover [A] of the paper feed unit ( x 2).
Installation
12. Remove the screw shown above.
13. Install the table joint bracket [A] ( x 2).
SM 2-23 M0AC/M257
Caster Table (M393)
14. Install the securing bracket [B] ( x 1 (M3x8) [C], spring washer x 1 [D], washer x 1 [E]).
 If two or three optional paper feed units are to be installed, install the securing bracket [B]
at the left side of the optional paper feed units in a similar location to that shown above to
secure them ( x 1 (M3x8) [C], spring washer x 1 [D], washer x 1 [E]).
15. Reinstall the right cover of the paper feed unit ( x 2).
16. Close the front door.
17. Adjust the plate until it is level by rotating each screw (page 2-18).
M0AC/M257 2-24 SM
Tray Heater
2.6 TRAY HEATER
2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK

Installation
1 Heater cover 1
2 Tray heater 1
3 Heater bracket 1
4 On-standby decal 1
5 Harness bracket 1
6 Harness 1
7 Clamp 2
8 Screw (M3 x 6) 7
SM 2-25 M0AC/M257
Tray Heater
2.6.2 TRAY HEATER (MAINFRAME)
 Before installing, make sure that the power source rating of the tray heater is same as the
machine.
1. Assemble the tray heater ( x 3).
 Before installing the tray heater, check if the destination is correct.

 [A]; 120V 9W: NA, 230V 9W: EU/AA
2. Rear cover (page 3-7)
4. Controller box (page 3-134)
5. Inner left lower cover (page 3-12)
6. HVPS: CB bracket (page 3-140 "HVPS: CB Board")
7. Install the heater [A] on the bracket ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 2-26 SM
Tray Heater
8. Remove the two clamps [A].
Installation
9. Attach the two clamps [A] (removed in step 8) to the bracket [B].
10. Route the harnesses as shown below ( x 2).
SM 2-27 M0AC/M257
Tray Heater
11. Install the bracket [A] ( x 2).
12. Reinstall the HVPS: CB bracket.

13. Pass the heater harness [A] through the hole [B] in the controller box (shown in the red
circle).
14. Reinstall the controller box.

15. Attach the two clamps [A] to the controller box.
16. Connect the relay harness [A] to CN906 [B] ( x 2).

17. Connect the relay harness [A] to the heater harness [C] ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 2-28 SM
Tray Heater
Installation
18. Reassemble the machine.
2.6.3 TRAY HEATER (OPTIONAL UNIT)
1. Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
2. Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
3. Check that no harnesses are damaged or pinched after installation.
Component Check
1 Tray heater 1
2 Securing bracket (right rear) 1
3 Securing holder 1
4 Securing bracket (left) 1
5 On-standby decal 1
6 Edge clamp 1
7 Clamp 6
8 Screw (M4 x 8) 3
9 Screw (M3 x 8) 2
10 Spring washer ( 4) 3
11 Spring washer ( 3) 2
SM 2-29 M0AC/M257
Tray Heater
12 Washer ( 4) 3
13 Washer ( 3) 2
14 Harness 1
For Installing the Tray Heater in M384

1. Pull out the tray [A] from the optional paper tray.
2. Put the tray heater [B] into the optional paper feed unit.
M0AC/M257 2-30 SM
Tray Heater
Installation
3. Pass the heater harness [A] through the square hole [B].
4. Position the tray heater [A] (3 hooks)
5. Install the tray heater [A] in the machine ( x 1 (M4x8) [B], spring washer x 1 ( 4) [C],
washer x 1 ( 4) [D]).
SM 2-31 M0AC/M257
Tray Heater
6. Install the edge clamp [A] and the six clamps.
7. Connect the relay harness [A] to the heater harness [B] ( x 4).
8. Route the relay harness [A] as shown above ( x 3).
 Make sure that the connector [B] is placed securely as shown above.
M0AC/M257 2-32 SM
Tray Heater
Installation
9. If you do not install another optional paper feed unit, replace the screw [A] with the
screw [B] ( x 1 (M3x8) [C], spring washer x 1 ( 3) [D], washer x 1 ( 3) [E]).
Do steps 10 and 11 if you install another optional paper feed unit below M384. If not, go
to step 12.
10. Bracket [A] ( x 1)
SM 2-33 M0AC/M257
Tray Heater
11. Install the relay harness [A] as shown above.
 Repeat steps from 1 to 11 if two or three optional paper feed units are to be installed.
12. Rear cover [A] ( x 1)
14. Connect the relay harness to the relay harness of the mainframe.
M0AC/M257 2-34 SM
Tray Heater
For Installing the Securing Bracket
 The securing bracket must be installed when the tray heater is installed in the machine
with the paper feed unit (M384).
1. Remove the holder (page 2-17 "Caster Table (M393)").
Installation
2. Reinstall the inner left lower cover ( x 3).
4. Remove the left cover of the paper feed unit (page 2-17 "Caster Table (M393)").
5. Remove the screw.
6. Install the securing bracket [A] ( x 1 (M3x8) [B], spring washer x 1 ( 3) [C], washer x 1
( 3) [D]).
7. Remove the right cover of the paper feed unit (page 2-17 "Caster Table (M393)").
8. Install the securing bracket [A] ( x 2 (M4x8) [B], spring washer x 2 ( 4) [C], washer x 2
( 4) [D]).
9. Install the securing holder [E].
SM 2-35 M0AC/M257
Tray Heater
M0AC/M257 2-36 SM
Controller Options
2.7 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
The following options are available for this machine; refer to the "Hardware Guide" about the
installation procedure for each option except “USB Device Server Option Type M12”. Only “USB
Device Server Option Type M12” should be installed by a customer engineer.
Installation
 Hard Disk Drive
 IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A
 IEEE802.11 Interface unit Type O
 USB Device Server Option Type M12
 Camera Direct Print Card Type P7
 IPDS Unit Type P7
 XPS Direct Print Option Type P7
 SD CARD SET FOR FONT TYPE D FOR MFP
 VM CARD Type P7
2.7.1 OVERVIEW
This machine has I/F card slot for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it.
I/F Card Slots

 Slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed): IEEE1284,
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n, USB Device Server Option Type M12
SM 2-37 M0AC/M257
Controller Options
SD Card Slots
 Slot 1 [1] is used for “Camera Direct Print Card Type P7”, “IPDS Unit Type P7”, “XPS Direct
Print Option Type P7”, “SD CARD SET FOR FONT TYPE D FOR MFP” or “VM CARD Type
P7”.
 Slot 2 [2] is used for installing one of the optional applications for service only (for example,
updating the firmware).
2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR USB DEVICE SERVER

OPTION TYPE M12
Component Check
No Items Q’ty Remark
1 Interface Board 1
2 USB Cable 1
3 Ferrite Core 4
- Band 2 NA only
 An Ethernet cable is not packed with this option.
M0AC/M257 2-38 SM
Controller Options
Interface Board Surface
Installation
No. Item Description
1 Switch Used to reset to the factory settings.
2 Ethernet port Used to connect the Ethernet cable.
Used to connect this option to the main machine.

3 USB port
Do not use this port with other options.
Installation Procedure
 Turn off the main power and disconnect the power supply cord.
 When you install this option on the main machine for the first time, the interface board
must be connected directly to your PC to set up the IP address and other network
settings.
1. Turn off the main power of the machine, and unplug the power cord from the wall
socket.
2. Remove the interface slot cover [A] ( x 2).
3. Install the interface board in the interface slot [B] ( x 2).
SM 2-39 M0AC/M257
Controller Options
4. Insert the USB cable into the USB port on this option.
5. Insert the other side of the USB cable into the USB port B on the main machine.
 The machine shape and/or USB port location differs depending on the machine.
6. Attach the ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx.
1.2 inch) [A] from the each end of the cable.
M0AC/M257 2-40 SM
Controller Options
Rev. 04/11/2019
Installation
7. Only for installing this option in North America, bind the both cores with two bands [A]
as shown below.
 The two binds are not included in options

produced before March, 2015. To bind the cores,
use the binds (P/N: 11050047) registered as
service parts or similar ones.
8. Insert the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on this option.
SM 2-41 M0AC/M257
Controller Options
Rev. 04/11/2019
9. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.
10. Plug the power cord into the wall socket and turn on the main power of the machine.
 Do not unplug the USB cable while the machine is recognizing this option. It may
take between 30 seconds to 1 minute to finish recognizing it (the LEDs on the
Ethernet port of this option light up after recognizing this option; see below). If
unplugged, connect the cable again.
11. Select (a) – (d) and check to see that the option is detected correctly.
11-(a). Access the option’s IP address from a PC browser.
11-(b). Ping the option’s IP address from a command prompt on a Windows PC connected to
the same network as the M257
 If the IP address cannot be found (DHCP server), use the MAC address. This is the
number printed on the seal affixed to the printed circuit board for the USB server.
11-(c). Use “RX” + the option’s MAC address and access a PC browser.
EX. http://RX0080926A3264
M0AC/M257 2-42 SM
Controller Options
Rev. 04/11/2019
11-(d). Ping the “RX” + “MAC address” from a command prompt on a windows PC connected to
the same network as the M257
Installation
 The installation status of this option cannot be checked in the “Configuration Page”.
What Do the LED Indications Mean?

When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators
light up under the following conditions.
No. Light Color Lights Up When:
1 Green and 1000BASE-T operates

Yellow
2 Green 10BASE-T operates
3 Yellow 100BASE-TX operates
[Notes for Energy Save Mode Setting]

If the machine which has this option enters into the energy save mode, you cannot print because
there will be a communication error. Follow the instructions below to disable the machine’s
entering into the energy save mode.
SM 2-43 M0AC/M257
Controller Options
1. Press [Menu] on the operation panel.

2. Select [System], and then press [OK].
3. Select [Engy Sv Md to Dsbl Prt Srv], and then press [OK].
4. Select [Disable Mode], and then press [OK].
5. Press [Escape] to go back to the main menu.
IP Address Setting
This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. Note that you can set an
IP address which is not only on the same network segment but also on a different network
segment to share a single printer with devices in multiple networks.
 You cannot change the IP address for this option from the operation panel of the main
machine. The setting must be done from a web browser on your PC.
 The network setting of this option is initially assigned as follows:
IP address: 192.168.100.100 / Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
 The network setting of your PC must be in the same network segment to change the
network setting of this option.
1. Make a note of the current network settings of your computer.
2. Change the IP address on your PC to [192.168.100.xxx (*0 - 255)].
3. Change the subnet mask on your PC to [255.255.255.0].
4. Open a web browser.
5. Type [http://192.168.100.100/] in the address bar.
6. Press the “Enter” key.
 The setting screen for this option appears.

7. Click [Network Setting].
8. Type [root] in the user name textbox and click [OK].

9. Input [IP Address], [Subnet Mask] and [Default Gateway].
M0AC/M257 2-44 SM
Controller Options
Installation
10. Set other items if needed.
11. Press [Set].
12. Close the web browser.
13. Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the computer.
14. Connect the Ethernet cable to a network device (e.g. switching hub).
15. Set the IP address of this option in the printer driver which you use.
2.7.3 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you copy application programs from
one SD card to another SD card.
You cannot run application programs from Slot 2. However you can move application programs
from Slot 2 to Slot 1 with the following procedure.
Consider the following limitations when you try to merge SD cards.
 The destination SD card should have the largest memory size of all the application SD cards.
Outline of SD Card Appli Move

1. Choose an SD card with enough space.
 Do not use an SD card if it has been used on a computer or other device such as a
copier, printer, or camera. Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card
is used.
2. Enter SP5873 "SD Card Appli Move". Then move the application from the SD card in
slot 2 to the card in slot 1.
3. Exit the SP mode.
4. Use caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
SM 2-45 M0AC/M257
Controller Options
 The necessary data for authentication is transferred with the application program
from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card
after you copy the application program from one card to another card.
5. Pull out the paper feed tray.
6. Keep the SD card in the location [A] after you have copied the application program
from one card to another card.
This is done for the following reasons:

 1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
 2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from the original SD
card to another SD card.
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If the
write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD card slot 1. The application program is copied to
this SD card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD card slot 2. The
application program is copied from this SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
M0AC/M257 2-46 SM
Controller Options
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
The menu "Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you copy back application programs from an SD card
to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied
some programs by using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
Installation
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of an application SD card on the machine. If the
write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a
firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD card slot 2. The application program is copied back
into this card.
3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) in SD card slot 1. The
application program is copied back from this SD card.
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the
machine.
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
SM 2-47 M0AC/M257
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
132 01/08/2016 Updated Caution statement for PSU
Notes on the Main Power Switch
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
3.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH
3.1.1 PUSH SWITCH

The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button)
from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications
and Adjustment
different from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Replacement
Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)
Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF.
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is
connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit
and other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller
board and the operation unit in this state, not only these boards, it will damage other electrical
components.
In 100V models, only one of the AC lines for the fusing unit is shut off when you turn off the
main power; the other line carries current even when you turn off the main power switch.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the
main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there is
still residual charge.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while
there is still residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a
blown fuse or memory failure.
 How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the
charge remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start
automatically.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the
AC power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you
finish work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press
the main power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to
move. When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get
caught.
SM 3-1 M0AC/M257
Notes on the Main Power Switch
 Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power
cord or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the
resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does
not start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing
of releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the residual charge
was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine
manually by pressing the main power switch.
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch on the left side of the machine.
2. Take out the power cord
3. Wait 3 minutes (this is the time required if you will remove the rear cover and access the
interior of the machine, to take out the controller board for example).
 If some LEDs on any of the boards are blinking or lit, current is still flowing. After the
shutdown process, the main power is turned off automatically.
When the shutdown is complete
Main power LED: Off
Operation panel LED: Off
 How to start from shutdown

 To start the machine, press the main power switch. However, if you press the main power
switch between the beginning and the end of a shutdown, the machine will not start.
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown
function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
 Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the
machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
M0AC/M257 3-2 SM
Before You Start
3.2 BEFORE YOU START
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before you do the procedures in
this section.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-3 M0AC/M257
Special Tools
3.3 SPECIAL TOOLS
3.3.1 TOOLS
Item Part Number Description Q'ty
1 B6455010 SD Card 128MB for Firmware Update 1
2 B6455020 SD Card 1GB for Firmware Update 1
3 B6455030 SD Card 2GB for Firmware Update 1
4 B6455040 SD Card 8GB for Log Storing 1
5 B6456705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1
6 B6456820 USB Reader/Writer 1
7 VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
8 C4019503 20X Magnification Scope 1
9 A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
10 52039502 Silicon Grease G-501 1
11 D0159500 G104 YELLOW TONER 1
M0AC/M257 3-4 SM
Exterior Covers
3.4 EXTERIOR COVERS
3.4.1 LEFT COVER

2. Remove the waste toner bottle.
3. Release the belt [A].
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Remove the two brackets [A] ( x 2).
5. Left cover [B]
SM 3-5 M0AC/M257
Exterior Covers
3.4.2 RIGHT COVER

1. Open the duplex unit [A].
2. Right cover [A] ( x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-6 SM
Exterior Covers
3.4.3 REAR COVER

1. Rear cover [A] ( x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
When Reinstalling the Rear Cover
 Make sure that these hinge covers [A] can be moved smoothly (up and down) after
installing the rear cover. If these hinge covers do not move smoothly, try installing the rear
cover again.
SM 3-7 M0AC/M257
Exterior Covers
3.4.4 TOP COVER

3. Open the upper cover [A].
4. Top cover [A] ( x 3)
M0AC/M257 3-8 SM
Exterior Covers
When Reinstalling the Top Cover
 Make sure that the hook [A] is installed in the hole [B] when reinstalling the top cover.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.4.5 OPERATION PANEL
1. Open the duplex unit (page 3-6 "Right Cover").
2. Remove the four screws.
3. Operation panel [A] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 3-9 M0AC/M257
Exterior Covers
3.4.6 INNER LEFT UPPER COVER

2. Top cover (page 3-8)
4. Inner left upper cover [A] ( x 2)
3.4.7 INNER LEFT FRONT COVER

1. Left cover (page 3-5)
2. Inner left upper cover (page 3-10)
4. Turn the lock lever [A] counterclockwise, and then open the drum securing plate [B].
M0AC/M257 3-10 SM
Exterior Covers
5. Inner left front cover [A] ( x 3)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.4.8 INNER LEFT REAR COVER
3. Inner left rear cover [A] ( x 2)
SM 3-11 M0AC/M257
Exterior Covers
3.4.9 INNER LEFT LOWER COVER

2. Waste toner bottle (page 3-24)
3. Inner left lower cover [A] ( x 3)
3.4.10 INNER RIGHT FRONT COVER

3. Connector cover [A] (hook)
4. Disconnect the six harnesses [A] ( x 1).
5. Release the inner right front cover [A] ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 3-12 SM
Exterior Covers
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Inner right front cover [A] ( x 6)
SM 3-13 M0AC/M257
Exterior Covers
3.4.11 INNER RIGHT REAR COVER

3. Inner right rear cover [A] ( x 3)
M0AC/M257 3-14 SM
Laser Optics
3.5 LASER OPTICS
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
3.5.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Caution decals are attached as shown below
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Make sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This
machine uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 657 - 663 nm and an output of
15 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.
3.5.2 LASER UNIT
 Before installing a new laser unit, remove the polygon motor holder bracket and the tag
from the new unit.
Before removing the old laser unit

Do the following settings before removing the laser unit. These are adjustments for skew
adjustment motors in the laser unit, main scan start position, and laser diode power.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Execute SP2-220-001 to clear the mirror positioning motor setting for Cyan.
4. Execute SP2-220-002 to clear the mirror positioning motor setting for Magenta.
5. Execute SP2-220-003 to clear the mirror positioning motor setting for Yellow.
6. Execute SP2-180-004 for clearing main scan start position adjustment setting.
SM 3-15 M0AC/M257
Laser Optics
7. Execute SP2-153-001 for clearing LD power.

9. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit

If you did not do the procedure in "Before removing the old laser unit" before removing the laser
unit, you must do the following.
1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the machine.
3. Disconnect the harness [A] of the skew correction motor.
4. Do steps 1 to 9 of "Before removing the old laser unit".

5. Connect the harness [A] and reinstall the controller box.
6. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
Removing the laser unit

4. Development fan duct (page 3-36 "Development Fan")
M0AC/M257 3-16 SM
Laser Optics
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Pull out the laser unit [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
After installing a new laser unit

Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser unit.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
2. Check that the settings of SP2-119-001, -002 and -003 are "0". If these settings are not
"0", execute "Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser unit"
described above.
SM 3-17 M0AC/M257
Laser Optics
 If this step is not correctly done, an image problem may occur on printouts.
3. Input the SP settings on the sheet provided with a new laser unit.
 SP2-101-001: Color Registration Adjustment for Black
 SP2-102-013, 015, 017, 019: Magnification Adjustment Main Beam Pitch Dot for each
color
 SP2-102-014, 016, 018, 020: Magnification Adjustment Main Beam Pitch Subdot for each
color
 SP2-102-001: Main Magnification for Black and Standard line speed
 SP2-102-002: Main Magnification for Black and Medium line speed
 SP2-102-003: Main Magnification for Black and Low line speed
 SP2-104-001 to -008: LD Initial Power Adjustment for each color
 The printed values [A] are different for each laser unit.
 If the SP settings shown above are not input correctly, it may cause color registration
errors.
4. Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
5. Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 ± 1 mm. If not, change the standard
value for the main scan magnification adjustment.
6. Select "0" with SP2-109-003 after printing the "1-dot trimming pattern.
7. Do the line position adjustment.
 First do SP2-111-003.
 Then do SP2-111-001.
 To check if SP 2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A
message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-010 to
-012.
M0AC/M257 3-18 SM
Laser Optics
3.5.3 LASER UNIT FAN
 If the optional tray heater is installed in the machine, the HVPS: CB bracket may be still
hot. Wait until the HVPS: CB bracket cools before doing this procedure.
4. HVPS: CB bracket (page 3-140 "HVPS: CB Board")
5. Laser unit fan [A] ( x 1, hooks)
and Adjustment
Replacement
When installing the laser unit fan
Make sure that the laser unit fan is installed with its decal facing upward.
SM 3-19 M0AC/M257
Laser Optics
3.5.4 LDU SHUTTER MOTOR

1. Duplex unit (page 3-110)
2. Paper feed unit (page 3-90)
3. Release the LDU shutter motor [A] ( x 3).
4. LDU shutter motor [A] ( x 2, x 1).
M0AC/M257 3-20 SM
Image Creation
3.6 IMAGE CREATION
3.6.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT)
 Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Turn the ITB lock lever [A] counterclockwise (this step is only needed if you remove
the PCDU: K).
4. PCDU [A]
SM 3-21 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
When installing a new PCDU

1. Remove the cover [A] and pull out the tape from the new development unit before
installing a new PCDU in the machine.
2. After inserting a PCDU, always push the PCDU lever in until you hear it click and lock.
3. Check the five-sided window of each PCDU.

 If the area inside the window is all white [A], the unit is installed correctly.
 If you see any red color [B] inside the window, the unit is installed incorrectly.
M0AC/M257 3-22 SM
Image Creation
4. On each unit, check the slot and bracket alignment.

 If you see the white lock tab inside its slot [A], the unit is installed correctly.
 If you do not see the white tab inside the slot [B], the unit is installed incorrectly.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Turn the ITB lock lever clockwise to lock it.
6. Use both hands to close the drum securing plate [A].
SM 3-23 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
7. Turn the lock lever clockwise to lock it.
3.6.2 WASTE TONER BOTTLE

If you replace the waste toner bottle after the machine detects that it is full or near-full, the
machine automatically resets the PM counter for the waste toner bottle after replacement.
But, if you replace a bottle that is not full or near-full, then you must reset the PM counter for this
unit. To do this, set SP3-902-020 to 1 before you start to work on the machine.
1. Open the left cover [A].
2. Attach the seals (provided with the new waste toner bottle) [A] to the five sponge pads.
This closes the waste toner bottle.
3. Release the lock [B].
4. Remove the waste toner bottle [C].
M0AC/M257 3-24 SM
Image Creation
5. Put the waste toner bottle [C] into the supplied plastic bag to prevent toner from
leaking out of the bottle, and then seal the bag.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.6.3 TONER SUPPLY TUBE
1. Remove the toner bottles.
3. Clean each toner hopper entrance [A] with a vacuum cleaner.
4. PCDUs (page 3-21)

9. Inner right rear cover (page 3-14)
10. Drive unit fan base (page 3-69 "Drive Unit Fan")
11. Inner upper right cover [A] ( x 2)
SM 3-25 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
12. Inner upper cover [A] ( x 1)
13. Remove the two screws.
14. Release each clamp and disconnect each connector.
M0AC/M257 3-26 SM
Image Creation
and Adjustment
Replacement
15. Release the toner supply motor brackets [A] ( x 3 each).
 Place the toner supply motor brackets on a sheet of paper [A] because grease may
fall from the toner supply motors.
16. Release each toner supply tube [A] by pulling out its gear assembly a short distance.
SM 3-27 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
 Work carefully when releasing the toner supply tube [A] to avoid spilling toner on
clothing or the hands.
17. Release the upper cover sensor [A] (hooks).
18. Release the toner plate [A] ( x 7).
19. Remove each clip [A].
M0AC/M257 3-28 SM
Image Creation
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Make sure that the clip [A] does not fall inside the machine during maintenance.
20. Turn the toner tube [A] as shown above.
21. Pull out each toner supply tube [A].
 Clean each toner tube entrance with a vacuum cleaner.

 Work carefully when removing the toner supply tube [A] to avoid spilling toner on
SM 3-29 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
 Do not push the tip [A] of the toner tube because this will spill toner.
3.6.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR

4. Motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)
5. Toner supply motor [A] ( x 2)
 If the bushing (white) [B] is removed with toner supply motor, install it in the toner
hopper frame (as shown below).
M0AC/M257 3-30 SM
Image Creation
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Make sure that the bushing (white) [A] is installed in the toner hopper frame [B].
SM 3-31 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
3.6.5 TONER COLLECTION MOTOR

2. Inner left front cover (page 3-10)
3. Motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
4. Toner collection motor [A] ( x 2)
 Apply a small amount of "Silicone Grease G501" to the gear of the motor as shown
below.
M0AC/M257 3-32 SM
Image Creation
3.6.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL SENSOR

1. Inner left rear cover (page 3-11)
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Waste toner bottle full sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-33 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
3.6.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3. Waste toner bottle set sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-34 SM
Image Creation
3.6.8 RFID CPU BOARD

4. RFID CPU Board [A] ( x 2, x 2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-35 M0AC/M257
Image Creation
3.6.9 RFID BOARD

4. RFID board [A] ( x 1, hooks)
3.6.10 DEVELOPMENT FAN

4. Development fan duct [A] ( x 4, x 2, x 1)
5. Development fan duct cover [A] (6 hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-36 SM
Image Creation
and Adjustment
6. Development fans [A] ( x 2 each)
Replacement
When installing the development fan
Make sure that the development fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear of the machine.
SM 3-37 M0AC/M257
Image Transfer
3.7 IMAGE TRANSFER
3.7.1 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT

3. Turn the ITB lock lever [A] counterclockwise.
4. Open the front door [A].
 Opening the front door [A] automatically releases the lock [B] for the ITB unit.
M0AC/M257 3-38 SM
Image Transfer
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Open the upper cover [A].
6. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the ITB unit fully [B].
7. Grasp the handles [A], and then lift the ITB unit [B].
SM 3-39 M0AC/M257
Image Transfer
3.7.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT
 Do not touch or damage the surface of the image transfer belt during servicing.
1. ITB unit (page 3-38)
2. ITB unit cover [A] and the handles [B] (8 hooks).
3. Three stays [A] ( x 2 each)
4. The left stay [A] ( x 4)
M0AC/M257 3-40 SM
Image Transfer
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Rear holder bracket [A] ( x 2)
6. ITB cleaning unit [A]
7. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown below.
SM 3-41 M0AC/M257
Image Transfer
8. Remove a screw.
9. Front holder bracket [A]
10. Remove a screw, and then turn the encoder sensor [A] to the left.
 When replacing the image transfer belt, work carefully to avoid damaging the
encoder sensor [A].
M0AC/M257 3-42 SM
Image Transfer
and Adjustment
11. The right stay [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
12. Stand the ITB unit [A] as shown above.
13. Image transfer belt [B]
SM 3-43 M0AC/M257
Image Transfer
When Installing the Image Transfer Belt
 The image transfer belt does not have any directional characteristics. When installing the
image transfer belt, it is not required to install the image transfer belt in a specific
orientation.
1. Lubricate a part of the surface of the image transfer belt [A] with yellow toner, and then
turn the image transfer belt to the position [B] as shown above.
 Be sure to use yellow toner for the Z-P2; do not use lubricant powder, developer, or
waste toner.
 You can also use the provided service part: D0159500 (G104 Yellow Toner)
2. Install the ITB cleaning unit [A], and then collect the yellow toner by turning the image
transfer belt [B].
M0AC/M257 3-44 SM
Image Transfer
3.7.3 ITB CONTACT MOTOR

2. ITB contact motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. ITB contact motor [A] ( x 2)
below.
SM 3-45 M0AC/M257
Image Transfer
3.7.4 ITB CONTACT SENSOR

1. PCDU: K (page 3-21)
3. Toner supply fan (page 3-60)
4. Toner supply bracket: K [A] ( x 3, x 1)
5. Release the toner tube: K [A] by pulling out its gear assembly a short distance.
 Work carefully when releasing the toner supply tube [A] to avoid spilling toner on
6. Sensor holder [A] ( x 1, x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-46 SM
Image Transfer
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. ITB contact sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-47 M0AC/M257
Image Transfer
3.7.5 ID SENSOR BOARD

1. Fusing unit (page 3-70)
2. Paper exit unit (page 3-102)
4. ID sensor board bracket [A] ( x 1)
5. ID sensor board cover [A] ( x 1)
6. ID sensor board [A] ( x 3)
M0AC/M257 3-48 SM
Image Transfer
and Adjustment
Replacement
After installing a new ID sensor board
Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor board.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine.
3. Input all correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the
barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor board.
 For example, input "0.99" with SP3-362-013.
SM 3-49 M0AC/M257
Paper Transfer
3.8 PAPER TRANSFER
3.8.1 PTR (PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER) UNIT

2. Remove the PTR unit [A], releasing the two locks [B].
When Installing the PTR Unit

To install the PTR unit, pinch the two green locks [A] while you push the unit back into position.
Do not insert objects between the metal plate [B] and its black plastic base. Otherwise, the plate
could be bent, and this can cause poor image quality.
M0AC/M257 3-50 SM
Paper Transfer
3.8.2 PTR CONTACT MOTOR

1. Toner collection motor (page 3-32)
2. Interlock switch bracket [A] ( x 2, x 4)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4. PTR contact motor [A] ( x 2)
SM 3-51 M0AC/M257
Paper Transfer
above.
3.8.3 PTR CONTACT SENSOR

3. Inner right front cover (page 3-12)
4. Motors with bracket (page 3-65)
5. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
6. PTR contact sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-52 SM
Paper Transfer
3.8.4 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR

2. Temperature/Humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-53 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
3.9 DRIVE UNIT
The drawing above shows the drive layout.
1. ITB unit /drum-K/ development-K motor 6. Vertical transport motor

2. Drum motor: CMY 7. Registration motor
3. Development motor: CMY 8. Duplex/ by-pass motor
4. Development clutch: K 9. Fusing/ paper exit motor
5. Paper feed motor 10.Inverter motor
M0AC/M257 3-54 SM
Drive Unit
3.9.1 GEAR UNIT

1. Remove the toner bottles.
3. Clean each toner hopper entrance [A] with a vacuum cleaner.
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. PCDUs (page 3-21)
6. Remove the four clips.

12. Release the upper harness guide [A] and the lower harness guide [B] ( x 4, x all,
x all)
SM 3-55 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
13. BCU with bracket (page 3-138)

15. Release each clamp and disconnect each connector.
M0AC/M257 3-56 SM
Drive Unit
16. Release the toner supply motor brackets [A] ( x 3 each).
and Adjustment
Replacement
 Place the toner supply motor brackets on a sheet [A] of paper because grease may
fall from the toner supply motors.
17. Toner supply tube: Y [A]
 Work carefully when removing the toner supply tube [A] to avoid spilling toner on
18. Release the toner supply tubes for M, C and K.
SM 3-57 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
 Work carefully when releasing the toner supply tubes to avoid spilling toner on
19. Gear unit [A] with the toner supply tubes for M, C and K ( x 6).
20. Remove the toner supply tubes for M, C and K [A] from the gear unit [B].
 Work carefully when removing the toner supply tubes [A] to avoid spilling toner on
M0AC/M257 3-58 SM
Drive Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
When installing the gear unit
Make sure that the positioning pin [A] is set correctly when installing the gear unit.
SM 3-59 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
3.9.2 TONER SUPPLY FAN

2. Toner supply fan [A] ( x 2, x1)
When installing the toner supply fan

Make sure that the toner supply fan is installed with its decal facing to the left of the machine.
Toner Supply Fan Base

2. Toner supply fan base [A] ( x 2, x1)
M0AC/M257 3-60 SM
Drive Unit
3.9.3 DRUM MOTOR: CMY

2. Toner supply fan base (page 3-60 "Toner Supply Fan")
3. Drum motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-61 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
3.9.4 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR: CMY

3. Development motor: CMY [A] ( x 3, x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-62 SM
Drive Unit
3.9.5 ITB UNIT/ DRUM-K/ DEVELOPMENT-K MOTOR

2. ITB unit/ Drum-K/ Development-K motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.9.6 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH: K
2. ITB unit/ Drum-K/ Development-K motor (page 3-63)
3. Development clutch: K cover [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4. Development clutch: K [B]
SM 3-63 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
3.9.7 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR

4. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
3.9.8 FRONT DOOR SENSOR

4. Front door sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-64 SM
Drive Unit
3.9.9 MOTORS WITH BRACKET

4. Release the upper harness guide [A] and the lower harness guide [B] ( x 4, x all,
x all).
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Motors with bracket [A] ( x 4)
SM 3-65 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
3.9.10 REGISTRATION MOTOR

5. Registration motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1)
3.9.11 PAPER FEED MOTOR

5. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-66 SM
Drive Unit
3.9.12 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

5. Vertical transport motor [A] ( x 2, timing belt x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.9.13 DRUM PHASE SENSOR: CMY
2. Push the hook, and then release the sensor holder [A].
3. Drum phase sensor: CMY [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-67 M0AC/M257
Drive Unit
3.9.14 DRUM PHASE SENSOR: K

2. Push the hook, and then release the sensor holder [A].
3. Drum phase sensor: K [A] ( x 1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-68 SM
Drive Unit
3.9.15 DRIVE UNIT FAN

4. Drive unit fan base [A] ( x 2, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Drive unit fan ( x 1, hooks)
When installing the drive unit fan

Make sure that the drive unit fan is installed with its decal facing to the left of the machine.
SM 3-69 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10 FUSING
3.10.1 FUSING UNIT
 Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
2. Release the lock levers [A].
3. Pull out the pressure levers [B] a short distance.
4. Hold the fusing unit handles [C], and then pull out the fusing unit.
When installing the fusing unit

Make sure that the both lock levers [A] are locked before closing the duplex unit. Otherwise, these
lock levers [A] can be broken.
M0AC/M257 3-70 SM
Fusing
3.10.2 CLEANING UNIT

2. Fusing front cover [A] ( x 2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Cleaning unit [A] ( x 4)
SM 3-71 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.3 PRESSURE ROLLER FUSING LAMP

1. Fusing front cover (page 3-71 "Cleaning Unit")
2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( x 4)
3. Fusing lower cover [A] ( x 3)
4. Cleaning unit (page 3-71)

5. Pressure levers [A] ( x 1 each, spring x 1 each)
6. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the right side ( x 1, x 5).
M0AC/M257 3-72 SM
Fusing
and Adjustment
7. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the left side ( x 1)
Replacement
8. Lamp holder [B] ( x 1)
9. Remove the fusing lamp holder [A] at the right side ( x 1)
10. Pressure roller fusing lamp [A]
SM 3-73 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.4 PRESSURE ROLLER

1. Pressure roller fusing lamp (page 3-72)
2. Right stay [A] ( x 3)
3. Thermostat holder [A] and thermistor bracket [B] ( x 4).
4. Remove the C-rings, bearings [A], and gear [B].

5. Pressure roller [C]
M0AC/M257 3-74 SM
Fusing
and Adjustment
Replacement
When Reinstalling the Pressure Roller
When replacing the pressure roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places.
 Apply "Barrierta S552R" (0.15g to 0.25g) to the left end [A] and right end [B] of the pressure
roller as shown above.
SM 3-75 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.5 HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMP

2. Fusing lower cover (page 3-72 "Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp")
3. Cleaning unit (page 3-71), Fusing upper cover (page 3-72 "Pressure Roller Fusing
Lamp")
4. Release the pins [A], and then remove the stripper plate [B].
5. Release the pins [A], and then remove the bracket [B] ( x 4).
6. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the left side ( x 1, x 4).
M0AC/M257 3-76 SM
Fusing
and Adjustment
7. Left stay [A] ( x 3)
Replacement
8. Remove the screw.
9. Release the fusing lamp harnesses [A], and then remove the plate [B] ( x 2, x 2).
10. Remove the fusing lamp holder [A] ( x 1).
SM 3-77 M0AC/M257
Fusing
11. Release the fusing lamp harness [A] at the right side ( x 1, x 5).
12. Right stay [A] ( x 3)
13. Release the fusing lamp harnesses [A] ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 3-78 SM
Fusing
14. Lamp holder [A] ( x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
15. Heating roller fusing lamp [A]
SM 3-79 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.6 FUSING BELT

1. Heating roller fusing lamp (page 3-76)
2. C-rings and bearings [A]
3. Gear [A] at the left side (C-ring x 1)
4. C-rings and bearings [A]
5. Remove the fusing belt [A] with rollers, lifting the shafts [B] up.
M0AC/M257 3-80 SM
Fusing
6. Fusing belt [A]
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-81 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.7 FUSING, HEATING AND TENSION ROLLER

1. Fusing belt with rollers (page 3-80 "Fusing Belt")
2. Fusing roller [A], heating roller [B] and tension roller [C]
When Reinstalling the Fusing Roller

When replacing the fusing roller, you have to apply lubricant to the following places.
 Apply "Barrierta S552R" (0.1g to 0.2g) to the left end [A] and right end [B] of the fusing roller
as shown below.
M0AC/M257 3-82 SM
Fusing
3.10.8 HEATING ROLLER THERMOSTAT

2. Fusing upper cover (page 3-72 "Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp")
3. Remove the four screws.
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Remove the plate [A], and then remove the heating roller thermostats [B].
 Do not re-use a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do
this.
SM 3-83 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.9 HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR

2. Fusing upper cover (page 3-72 "Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp")
4. Release the harness [A] ( x 2).
5. Heating roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-84 SM
Fusing
3.10.10 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR

1. Cleaning unit (page 3-71)
2. Thermistor assembly [A] ( x 1, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Pressure roller thermistor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 3-85 M0AC/M257
Fusing
3.10.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTAT

2. Pressure roller thermostats [A] ( x 2)
M0AC/M257 3-86 SM
Fusing
3.10.12 THERMOPILE
2. Thermopile base [A] ( x 2, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Thermopile cover [A] (hooks)
4. Thermopile [B]
SM 3-87 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed
3.11 PAPER FEED
3.11.1 SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Pull out the paper tray.
2. Cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Separation roller [A] ( x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-88 SM
Paper Feed
3.11.2 PICK-UP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS

2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Pick-up roller [A]
4. Paper feed roller [B]
SM 3-89 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed
3.11.3 PAPER FEED UNIT

4. Release the paper feed unit [A] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2)
M0AC/M257 3-90 SM
Paper Feed
3.11.4 REGISTRATION SENSOR

2. Registration roller guide [A] ( x 2)
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Registration sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-91 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed
3.11.5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR

2. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
3. Vertical transport sensor [A] (hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-92 SM
Paper Feed
3.11.6 PAPER HEIGHT SENSOR 1

2. Release the paper height sensor 1 [A] (hooks).
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Paper height sensor 1 [A] ( x1)
SM 3-93 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed

2. Paper height sensor 2 bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Paper height sensor 2 [A] ( x1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-94 SM
Paper Feed
3.11.8 PAPER LIFT SENSOR

2. Paper lift sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Paper lift sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
SM 3-95 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed
3.11.9 PAPER END SENSOR

2. Actuator [A] (tab x 2)
3. Paper end sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-96 SM
Paper Feed
3.11.10 PAPER FEED SENSOR

2. Release the harness [A] ( x 1).
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Paper feed sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
4. Paper feed sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
SM 3-97 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed
3.11.11 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

2. Tray lift motor unit [A] ( x 3, x 2, x 1)
3. Tray lift motor bracket [A] ( x 4, spring x 1)
 When reassembling, make sure that the gears [A] are set correctly before installing
the tray lift motor bracket.
4. Tray lift motor [A] ( x 2)
M0AC/M257 3-98 SM
Paper Feed
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.11.12 TRAY 1 SET SENSOR
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
5. Sensor holder [A] ( x 3, x 1)
6. Disconnect the connector [A].
7. Tray 1 set sensor [A] (hooks)
SM 3-99 M0AC/M257
Paper Feed
3.11.13 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD

2. Paper size sensor board [A] ( x 2, x 2)
M0AC/M257 3-100 SM
Paper Feed
3.11.14 CLEANING THE PAPER DUST CONTAINER

2. PCDU (page 3-21)
3. Peel off the tape [A] (service parts) and clean the paper dust container [B] with a
vacuum cleaner.
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-101 M0AC/M257
Paper Exit
3.12 PAPER EXIT
3.12.1 PAPER EXIT UNIT

3. Inner upper right cover [A] ( x 2)
4. Inner upper cover [A] ( x 1)

6. Paper exit unit holder [A] ( x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-102 SM
Paper Exit
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Lift the paper exit unit [A].
8. Paper exit unit [A] ( x 2)
SM 3-103 M0AC/M257
Paper Exit
3.12.2 PAPER EXIT SENSOR

2. Remove the gear [A] (release the hook shown by the red arrow), and then remove the
bushing [B].
3. Remove the bushing [C] ( x 1).
4. Remove the shaft [A], and then remove the paper exit upper guide [B].
5. Paper exit lower guide [A] (hook x 2)
M0AC/M257 3-104 SM
Paper Exit
and Adjustment
Replacement
6. Remove the idle roller [A], and release the sensor bracket [B] ( x 1).
7. Paper exit sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-105 M0AC/M257
Paper Exit
3.12.3 INVERTER SENSOR

2. Release the sensor bracket (page 3-104 "Paper Exit Sensor").
3. Inverter sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
3.12.4 PAPER OVERFLOW SENSOR

2. Release the sensor bracket (page 3-104 "Paper Exit Sensor").
3. Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-106 SM
Paper Exit
3.12.5 FUSING EXIT SENSOR

2. Fusing exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
3.12.6 INVERTER MOTOR
2. Inverter motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, timing belt x 1)
SM 3-107 M0AC/M257
Paper Exit
3.12.7 FUSING COOLING FAN

2. Fusing cooling fan base [A] ( x 2, x 1)
3. Fusing cooling fan [A] (hooks)
When installing the fusing cooling fan

Make sure that the fusing cooling fan is installed with its decal facing to the right of the machine.
M0AC/M257 3-108 SM
Paper Exit
3.12.8 UPPER COVER SENSOR

2. Upper cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-109 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
3.13 DUPLEX UNIT
3.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT

2. Connector cover (page 3-12 "Inner Right Front Cover")
3. Disconnect the six harnesses (page 3-12 "Inner Right Front Cover").
4. Remove the ground screw [A].
5. Release the right arm [A] ( x 1).
 Work carefully when releasing the right arm. This is because the right arm has strong
tension and this may cause injury.
6. Release the left arm [A] ( x 1).
M0AC/M257 3-110 SM
Duplex Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Open the duplex unit [A] fully, and then remove it.
3.13.2 BY-PASS TRAY UNIT

1. Open the by-pass tray unit.
2. Release the outer small pegs [A] of the cover.
 Release the left peg first, and then right peg.
SM 3-111 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
3. Tilt the by-pass tray as shown below.
4. Release the right inner large peg [A] first, and then left inner large peg [B].
5. Tilt the by-pass tray [A] as shown below, and then pull the by-pass tray.
 Tilting the by-pass tray rotates the peg lock arms [B] down so they can be removed from
the keyholes.
 When re-attaching the by-pass, tilt the by-pass tray as shown above, and then insert
the peg lock arms into the keyholes of the machine.
M0AC/M257 3-112 SM
Duplex Unit
3.13.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR

2. Disconnect the connector and remove the ground screw.
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. Duplex lower guide plate [A]
4. Duplex upper guide plate [A] ( x 7)
5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-113 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
M0AC/M257 3-114 SM
Duplex Unit
3.13.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

3. Paper transfer roller unit (page 3-50)
4. Release the sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Duplex exit sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-115 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
3.13.5 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR

4. Sensor base [A] ( x 2)
5. Sensor cover [A] (hooks)

6. Fusing entrance sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
M0AC/M257 3-116 SM
Duplex Unit
3.13.6 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR

2. By-pass tray unit (page 3-111)
3. Duplex upper guide plate (page 3-113 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")
4. Guide plate [A] (tabs)
and Adjustment
Replacement
5. Fusing fans (page 3-70)
6. Operation panel (page 3-9)
7. Duplex/By-pass motor cover [A] ( x 1)
SM 3-117 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
8. Right and left arms [A] ( x 2 each)
9. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket with the frame [A] ( x 6)
M0AC/M257 3-118 SM
Duplex Unit
and Adjustment
Replacement
10. Guide plate [A] ( x 4)
11. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1)
SM 3-119 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
12. Duplex/By-pass motor [A] ( x 2, x 1, gear x1, timing belt x1)
M0AC/M257 3-120 SM
Duplex Unit
3.13.7 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

2. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket with the frame (page 3-117 "Duplex/By-pass Motor")
3. Sensor holder [A] ( x 1)
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. By-pass paper end sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
SM 3-121 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
3.13.8 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER, FRICTION PAD

2. Duplex/By-pass motor bracket with the frame (page 3-117 "Duplex/By-pass Motor")
3. Guide plate [A] ( x 4)
4. Slide the roller holder [A] in the direction of the blue arrow ( x 2).
5. By-pass feed roller [A]
M0AC/M257 3-122 SM
Duplex Unit
6. Slide the roller holder [A] in the direction of the blue arrow.
and Adjustment
Replacement
7. Release the tension of the bracket [A] by releasing the lock of the solenoid [B] and
turning the timing belt [C].
8. Friction pad [A] (hooks)
SM 3-123 M0AC/M257
Duplex Unit
3.13.9 HVPS: D
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before removing the HVPS: D.
4. HVPS: D cover [A] ( x 2)
5. HVPS: D [A] ( x 3, x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-124 SM
Duplex Unit
3.13.10 FUSING FAN
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before removing the fusing fan.
2. Duplex upper guide plate (page 3-113 "Duplex Entrance Sensor")
3. Fusing fan bases [A] ( x 1 each, x 1 each)
and Adjustment
Replacement
4. Fusing fan [A] (hooks)
When installing the fusing fan

Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing to the front of the machine.
SM 3-125 M0AC/M257
Electrical Components
3.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
3.14.1 BOARDS
Rear Cover Open
[A] Bridge Board
[B] Controller Board
[C] PSU
M0AC/M257 3-126 SM
Controller Box Removal
and Adjustment
Replacement
[E] HVPS: CB Board
Right Cover Open
[F] BCU
SM 3-127 M0AC/M257
BCU with bracket Removed
[G] HVPS: T1T2 Board
3.14.2 HDD (OPTION)
 Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with SP5-846-051 if
possible.
 If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security or the Data Encryption feature, these
applications must be installed again.
1. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the controller unit [B] (knob screw x 2).
2. HDD assembly [A] (knob screw x 2, x 2)
M0AC/M257 3-128 SM
and Adjustment
Replacement
3. HDD [A] ( x 4, x 2)
Disposal of HDD Units

 Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client.
 If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD, the HDD
must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping.
 The HDD may contain proprietary or classified (Confidential, Secret) information. Specifically,
the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created
automatically during print job sorting and jam recovery. Such data is stored on the HDD in a
special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods.
SM 3-129 M0AC/M257
Reinstallation
Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is
replaced:
 Address book
The address book and document server documents (if needed) must be input again.
If you previously backed up the address book to an SD card with SP5846 051, you can use SP
5846 052 to copy the data from the SD card to the hard disk.
If the customer is using the following options, each option function must be set up again. For more,
see each reference guide.
 Data Overwrite Security Unit: See "Security Guide".
 HDD Encryption Unit: See "Security Guide".
3.14.3 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Pull out the controller unit (page 3-128 "HDD (Option)")
2. Remove the HDD assembly if it is installed (page 3-128 "HDD (Option)").
3. Controller board [A] ( x5)
4. Remove the Interface rails [A] and NVRAMs [B].
M0AC/M257 3-130 SM
When installing the new controller board
 When replacing the controller board, first, check which ESA applications have been
installed. After replacing the controller board, re-install the ESA applications by following
the installation instructions for each application.
 After reinstalling the ESA applications, print the SMC (SP-5-990-024/025 (SMC:
SDK/Application Info)). Then open the tandem tray [A] and remove the paper cassette
decal [B]. Store the SMC sheet [C] and the SD card(s) [D] that was used to install the
ESA application(s).
and Adjustment
Replacement
1. Remove the NVRAMs from the old controller board.
2. Install the NVRAMs on the new controller board after you replace the controller board.
 Make sure that you install the NVRAMs in the correct sockets (see [B] in the diagram
above).
 These NVRAMs are a set and must always be removed together and installed on a
new board at the correction locations. Failure to do this will cause the machine to
issue SC195-00.
 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static
electricity can damage NVRAM data.
 2M-2 is inserted into the connector labeled FRAM-2.
 2M-1 is inserted into the connector labeled FRAM-1.
 The semi-circular notch of each NVRAM should be aligned with the white semi-circular
notch below it as shown above at the dotted white lines.
 If the NVRAMs are installed incorrectly, this could cause the board and NVRAMs to
short out and cause permanent damage.
4. Turn on the main power of the machine
 Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data")
before you replace the NVRAM.
 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static
electricity can damage NVRAM data.
 Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
SM 3-131 M0AC/M257
Electrical Components Rev. 01/08/2016
3.14.4 BRIDGE BOARD

2. Controller cover (page 3-134 "Controller Box")
3. Pull out the controller unit (page 3-128 "HDD (Option)").
4. Bridge board ( x 5, x all, x 1)
3.14.5 PSU
⇒
 NEVER touch the areas outlined in red in the photos below to prevent electric shock
caused by residual charge.
 A residual charge of about 100V-400V remains in the AC circuits on the PSU board for
several months even when the board has been removed from the machine, after turning
off the machine power and unplugging the power cord.
 The procedure to discharge residual charge from the machine by unplugging the power
cord from the AC wall outlet and pressing the main power switch works only for the DC
circuits on this board. A residual charge remains in the AC circuits.
 The areas outlined in red on the bracket mean the residual charge of about 100V-400V
remains on the PSU board under the bracket.
2. Choke coil [A] (EU Only) ( x 2, x 1)
M0AC/M257 3-132 SM
and Adjustment
3. Remove the ground screw.
Replacement
4. Disconnect all the harnesses ( x 1).
5. PSU [A] ( x 10, x all)
SM 3-133 M0AC/M257
3.14.6 CONTROLLER BOX

4. Controller cover [A] ( x 6: Remove the screws indicated by the red circles as shown
below, and loosen the screws indicated by the blue circles.)
5. Disconnect all the harnesses as shown below.
6. Remove the screw and disconnect the connector.
M0AC/M257 3-134 SM
and Adjustment
7. Remove the seven screws.
Replacement
8. Pull out the controller box [A].
SM 3-135 M0AC/M257
3.14.7 BCU
2. Disconnect all the harnesses and the clamps.
3. Harness guide [A] ( x 1)
4. BCU [A] ( x 7)
M0AC/M257 3-136 SM
When installing the new BCU
 Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before
you replace the NVRAM.
 Keep NVRAM away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
1. Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU.
and Adjustment
2. Install the NVRAM on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
Replacement
 Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the
NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [A] to the downward side.

4. Turn on the main power of the machine.
5. "SC995-01" occurs.
6. Enter the serial number with SP5811-004.
7. Turn the main power of the machine off and on.
SM 3-137 M0AC/M257
Removing the BCU with bracket

2. Drive unit fan base (page 3-69 "Drive Unit Fan")
3. Harness cover [A] ( x 1, hooks)
4. BCU with bracket [A] ( x 3, x all, x all)
M0AC/M257 3-138 SM
3.14.8 HVPS: T1T2 BOARD

2. BCU with bracket (page 3-138)
3. HVPS: T1T2 board ( x 6, x all)
and Adjustment
Replacement
SM 3-139 M0AC/M257
3.14.9 HVPS: CB BOARD
 If the optional tray heater is installed in the machine, the HVPS: CB bracket may be still
hot. Wait until the HVPS: CB bracket cools before doing this procedure.
5. Disconnect the connector.
6. Disconnect the six connectors ( x 1).
7. Pull out the HVPS: CB bracket [A] ( x 2).
M0AC/M257 3-140 SM
and Adjustment
8. HVPS: CB board [A] ( x 6, x all)
Replacement
3.14.10 DC SWITCH BOARD
2. DC switch board [A] ( x 1, x 1)
SM 3-141 M0AC/M257
3.14.11 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

There are three NVRAMs. Two are on the controller board, and one is on the BCU.
 Always touch a metal surface before handling an NVRAM. Static electricity from your
hands can damage an NVRAM.
NVRAM on the BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC data (SP5-990-001) if possible.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 2. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001) if possible.
6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. SC195 occurs.
10. Specify the serial number and destination code of the machine.
 Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the serial number and destination
code.
11. Turn the main switch off and on.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001) if you have successfully
copied them to the SD card.
13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
15. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
16. Do the process control self-check.
M0AC/M257 3-142 SM
NVRAM on the Controller

After Replacement of a Defective NVRAM
1. You need the factory settings sheet provided with the machine.
2. Turn the power on, enter the SP mode, and then do the factory settings.
3. Re-install security settings as required.
NVRAM Upload and Download
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
and Adjustment
2. Output the SMC data (SP5-990-001) if possible.
Replacement
3. Turn the main switch off. Then unplug the power cord.
5. Copy the NVRAM data (SP5-824-001) and the address book data in the HDD
(SP5846-051) to an SD card if possible.
 An error message appears if local user information cannot be stored in an SD card

because the capacity is not enough.
 You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
6. Enter SP mode. Then print out the SMC reports (SP5-990-001) if possible.
7. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
8. Replace the NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.
9. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
10. Check if the serial number appears on the operation panel (SP5-811-002). Input the
serial number if it does not appear. (Contact your supervisor about this setting.)
11. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001) and HDD (SP5-846-52) if
you have successfully copied them to the SD card.
 The counter data in the user code information clears even if step 12 is done correctly.
 An error message appears if the download is incomplete. However, you can still use
the part of the address book data that has already been downloaded in step 11.
 An error message appears when the download data does not exist in the SD card, or,
if it is already deleted.
 You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.
12. Go out of SP mode. Then turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD
card slot 2.
SM 3-143 M0AC/M257
Adjustments
3.15 ADJUSTMENTS
3.15.1 GAMMA ADJUSTMENT
 Clean and/or replace related parts first to solve color quality problems. Do these
procedures if adjustments are necessary.
Summary
To adjust the printer gamma:
 Select the print mode you want to calibrate
 Print a color calibration test sheet
 Make the gradation scales on the printout smooth from the lowest to the highest density.
Adjust the CMY gradation scale at the top of the chart by balancing the density of the C, M,
and Y gradation scales - the CMY gray scale should change smoothly from minimum to
maximum. There should be no coloration.
Examine this color adjustment sheet:
You can adjust 15 points for each color: (example [A]) between 0 (lowest density) [B] and 255
(highest density) [C]. For each point, you can adjust the density within 0 and 255.
M0AC/M257 3-144 SM
Adjustments
and Adjustment
Replacement
The gradation scales marked "Default" are printed according to the default gamma settings in the
flash ROM in the controller. The gamma adjustment changes the densities at the adjustable points
in the gradation scale. The gradation scale marked "Current" shows the current settings.
Compare the "Current" gradation scale with the "Default" at the time you do the adjustment
procedure. Select the density for each of the 15 adjustable points, excluding points 0 and 255,
from the "Default" gradation scale.
The NVRAM holds three sets of controller gamma settings:
 Those saved this time: Controller SP1-101-001 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Current)
 Those saved in the previous adjustment: Controller SP1-101-002 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Prev)
 The factory settings: Controller SP1-101-003 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Factory).
SM 3-145 M0AC/M257
Adjustments
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter the controller service mode.
2. Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1102 "ToneCtlSet". Then press the
Enter key.
3. Use the up/down key to select the mode you want to calibrate. Then press the Escape
key until you get back to the controller service mode menu.
4. Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1103 "PrnColorSheet". Then press the
Enter key.
5. Use the up/down key to select Controller SP 1103 001 "ToneCtlSheet" (normally this is
displayed by default). Then press the Enter key.
6. When "Execute?" shows, press the Enter key to print out the "color calibration test
sheet".
7. Press the Escape key 2 times to exit from the menu when "Execute OK" shows. (You
return to Controller SP 1103 "PrnColorSheet" in the controller service menu.)
8. Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1104 "ToneCtlValue". Then press the
enter key.
9. Use the up/down arrow key to select the setting you want to adjust. Then press the
enter key. The three digits in the display (example "016") indicate a position on the
color calibration test sheet.
Operation Panel Display Color Calibration Test Sheet
Set Black 1 Default Value 16
: :
: :
Set Cyan 1 to 15 See Set Black 1 to 15
Set Magenta 1 to 15 See Set Black 1 to 15
Set Yellow 1 to 15 See Set Black 1 to 15
M0AC/M257 3-146 SM
Adjustments
Adjust the color density at each of the 15 points for each of the four colors.
 Do these to decide what density value to input:

 Look at the color adjustment sheet.
 Look at the gradation scale entitled "Default" for the color you want to adjust.
 Go along the scale until you reach the density you want to input.
 Read off the value on the scale and store it in the machine:
 Use the up/down key to move the cursor along the three-digit display. Then press the
and Adjustment
Enter key.
Replacement
 Use the up/down key to change the digit at the cursor. Then press the Enter key.
 Press the Escape key to exit from the menu.
 Do the same for all 15 points.
10. When the density setting is complete for all colors, print out a color adjustment sheet
again and make sure that the gradation scale for each printed color is smooth and that
the CMY gradation scale is gray. Do the adjustment again if there is an anomaly
(normally, repeat this procedure 3 to 5 times).
11. Do these when the adjustment results are satisfactory:
 Use Controller SP 1105 "ToneCtlSave" in the controller service menu, to store the new
settings in the controller.
 Reset the controller (press the [Reset] key when the machine is off line) to use the new
settings.
 You must reset the controller to keep the new settings in the controller NVRAM.
SM 3-147 M0AC/M257
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE
None
Service Program Mode
4. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
 Make sure that the data-in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the
printer to process the data.
4.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION
 The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only so that they can
properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than service
representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In
such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.
Accessing the Required Program

Use the "Up/Down arrow" keys to scroll through the menu listing.
1. Service: Controller service modes
2. Engine: Engine service modes
3. End: Exit service mode
To select an item, press the "OK" key. Then the sub-menu shows.
Scroll through the sub menu items using the " " keys.
To go back to a higher level, press the "Escape" key.
Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program

Enter the required program mode as explained above. The setting appearing on the display is the
current setting.
Select the required setting using the " " keys, then press the "OK" key. The previous value
remains if the "OK" key is not pressed.
Exiting Service Mode

Select "End" from the service mode main menu, then press the "OK" key.
 To make the settings effective, turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode.
SM 4-1 M0AC/M257
4.1.2 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen

Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the control panel screen is
limited (12 or 17 characters), the description of SP modes displayed on the screen needs to be
abbreviated. The following are the major abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full
description is over 12 or 17 characters.
1. Paper Type
N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2 (plain & recycled)
TC: Thick paper, Thick 1: Thick paper 1, Thick 2: Thick paper 2
TN: Thin paper
SP: Special paper
2. Color Mode [Color]
[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC], [Cl]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
3. Process Speed
LS: Low speed xx
RS: Regular speed xxx
HS: High speed xxx
As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode (B&W or
Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend on the process
speed.
Mode Resolution (dpi) Line speed (mm/s) Print speed (ppm)
600 x 600 260 40

Plain Paper
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
600 x 600 260 40

Middle Thick
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
600 x 600 182 28

Thick 1
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
Thick 2 600 x 600 85 15
M0AC/M257 4-2 SM
Mode Resolution (dpi) Line speed (mm/s) Print speed (ppm)
Maintenance
Reference
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
System
600 x 600 85 15
Thick 3
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
600 x 600 85 15
Thick 4
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
600 x 600 260 40

Thin
1,200 x 1,200 85 15
OHP 600 x 600 85 15
4. Count Unit
R: Rotation
S: Prints
5. Environment
LL: Low temperature and Low humidity
ML: Medium temperature and Low humidity
MM: Medium temperature and Medium humidity
MH: Medium temperature and High humidity
HH: High temperature and High humidity
7. Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only - Do not touch the SP mode in the field.
"P" in the right hand side of the mode number column means that this SP mode relates to the
Printer Controller. If "P" is not in the column, this SP mode relates to the Printer Engine.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be
turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored
in the NVRAM (Engine and Printer Controller). If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to
the default value. "ENG", "CTL" and "NV" indicate which NVRAM contains the data.
 ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
 CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
 NV: NVRAM on the NVRAM expansion board (user account enhancement kit)
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following manner.
SM 4-3 M0AC/M257
[ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric
 If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the
SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only
numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by
using only the numbers.
4.1.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING

Do not change the bit switches unless you are told to do this by the manufacturer.
2. Select the "Service" menu with " / " keys, and then push the "OK" key.
3. Push the "OK" key.
5. To select a bit switch, push the " " keys.

7. Set the value with these keys:

 [Left] [Right]: Moves the cursor to one of the adjacent bits.
 [Up] [Down]: Changes a bit between "0" and "1".
 [Escape]: Goes out of the program without saving changes.
 [OK]: Goes out of the program and saves changes.
8. Push the "Escape" key one or more times until the menu "SP mode (Service)" is
shown.
9. Select "End" and push the OK key.
M0AC/M257 4-4 SM
Service SP Mode Tables
4.2 SERVICE SP MODE TABLES
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 Responding with the hostname as the 0: Model 1: Hostname

sysName name (PnP
name)
This Bit Switch can change the value of the sysName.

0: (default): Model name (PnP name)
1: Host name
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts
will never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot.
bit 5 [PS and PDF] Paper size error margin 0: ±5pt 1: ±10pt
When a PS job is printed by using a custom paper size, the job might not
be printed because of a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation
error. By default, the error margin for matching to a paper size is ±5 points.
By enabling this Bit Switch, the error margin for matching to a paper size
can be extended to ±10 points.
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border around the printable area.
SM 4-5 M0AC/M257
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 Color balance switching 0: Disable 1: Enable
This Bit Switch can be used to restore the color balance to match that of
previous models. If this Bit Switch is set to "1" (Enabled), the color balance
from 09S and earlier models will be used.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a Collate Type 0: Shift 1: Normal

Collate Collate
A collate type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
explicitely define a collate type.
Note: If BitSwitch 5-0 is enabled, this BitSwitch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The machine ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
M0AC/M257 4-6 SM
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as
Maintenance
HP4000/HP8000.
Reference
System
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side
because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce
printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
SM 4-7 M0AC/M257
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device
can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 Prevent SDK applications from altering

0: Disable 1: Enable
the contents of a job.
If this BitSw is enabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter print
data. This is achieved by preventing SDK applications from accessing a
module called the "GPS Filter".
Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for troubleshooting the effects of
SDK applications on data.
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria 0: Pattern3 1: Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs 0: Disable 1: Enable

to 1000 jobs. (100) (1000)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image

rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
M0AC/M257 4-8 SM
Routes all pages through the duplex unit.
Maintenance
If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last page of an odd-paged duplex
Reference
System
job are not routed through the duplex unit. This could result in problems
with letterhead/pre-printed pages.
Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper.
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
007 Bit Switch 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0
DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print 1: Enable

without requiring User Code (allow BW
0: Disable jobs to print
without a user
code)
BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if user code
authentication is enabled.
Note: Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 PCL, RPCS, PS: Forced BW print 0: Enable 1: Disable
Switches whether to ignore PDL color command.
bit 7 DFU - -
SM 4-9 M0AC/M257
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately) (10 seconds)
1284).
bit 0 To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL auto-detection does

not necessarily mean that the job cannot be printed. This bit switch tells the
device whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10
seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 0: Disable
1: Enable
Job Cancel (Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch is enabled, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bit switch is enabled, printing under the following conditions
might result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack

(JOB END) when printing multiple 0: Disable 1: Enable
collated copies.
This bitsw determines the timing of the PJL USTATUS JOB END sent when
multiple collated copies are being printed.
0 (default): JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy
has completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented
after the first copy and then again at the end of the job.
1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has
finished printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the
end of each job.
bit 5
DFU - -
to 7
M0AC/M257 4-10 SM
1001 Bit Switch
Maintenance
Reference
010 Bit Switch A DFU - -
System
1001 Bit Switch
011 Bit Switch B 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 0: Does not

1: Allow
Print job interruption allow
interruption
interruption
0 (default): Print jobs are not interrupted. If a job is promoted to the top of
the print queue, it will wait for the currently printing job to finish.
1: If a job is promoted to the top of the queue, it will interrupt the currently
printing job and start printing immediately.
bit 2 Switch for enabling or disabling

Limitless Paper Feeding for the Bypass 0: Enable 1: Disable
Tray
SM 4-11 M0AC/M257
When the Bypass Tray is the target of the Auto Tray Select and Any
Size/Type is configured for the Tray Setting Priority setting of the Bypass
Tray, this Bit Switch can switch the behavior whether or not Limitless
Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.* The default is Enabled (=0).
*Limitless Paper Feeding will try a matching tray of the next highest
priority if a job specified to Auto Tray Select as the tray setting is submitted
and the tray runs out of paper.
Enabled (=0: Default):
Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.
If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type
but has run out of paper, printing will occur from the Bypass Tray.
Disabled (=1):
Limitless Paper Feeding is not applied to the Bypass Tray.
If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type
but has run out of paper, printing will stop and an alert will appear on the
LCD screen, stating that the tray has run out of paper. This prevents
unexpected use of the Bypass Tray.
Limitations when this Bit Switch is set to "1":
- The "Paper Tray Priority: Printer" setting must be configured to a tray
other than the Bypass Tray.
- Jobs that contain more than one paper size cannot be printed.
bit 4 Add "Apply Auto Paper Select" is the

condition that decides if the device's
paper size or paper type should be
overwritten.
If this Bit Switch is set to "1" (enable), the "Apply Auto Paper Select"
setting will decide if the paper size or paper type that is specified in the
device settings should be overwritten by the job's commands when "Tray
Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overwritten (priority is given to the job’s
commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: Not overwritten (priority is given to the
device settings)
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
M0AC/M257 4-12 SM
Maintenance
1001 Bit Switch
Reference
System
012 Bit Switch C DFU - -
1003 [Clear Setting]
1003 001 Initialize System Initializes settings in the System menu of the
user mode.
1003 003 Delete Program DFU
1004 [Print Summary]
1004 001 Service Summary Prints the service summary sheet (a

summary of all the controller settings).
1005 [Display Version]
1005 002 Printer Version Displays the version of the controller

firmware.
1007 [Supply Display]
Enables or disables the display for information on each consumable supply.
1007 001 Development [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: OFF, 1: ON
1007 002 PCU
1007 003 Transfer
1007 004 Int. Transfer
1007 005 Transfer Roller
1007 006 Fuser
1007 007 Fuser Oil
SM 4-13 M0AC/M257
1101 [ToneCtlSet]
1101 001 Tone (Factory) Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be
either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
1101 002 Tone (Prev.)
setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 003 Tone (Current)
1102 [ToneCtlSet]
Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The
asterisk (*) shows which mode is set.
 00: *1200x1200Photo (1 bit, 4 colors)
 01: 600x600Photo (4 bits, 4 colors)
 02: 600x600Photo (2 bits, 4 colors)
 03: 600x600Photo (1 bit, 4 colors)
 04: 1200x1200Text (1 bit, 4 colors)
 05: 600x600Text (4 bits, 4 colors)
 06: 600x600Text (2 bits, 4 colors)
 07: 600x600Text (1 bit, 4 colors)
1103 [PrnColorSheet]
1103 001 ToneCtlSheet Prints the test page to check the color balance
before and after the gamma adjustment.
1103 002 ColorChart
1104 [ToneCtlValue]
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection
menu.
1104 001 Set Black 1 [0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]
1104 021 Set Cyan 1
1104 041 Set Magenta 1
1104 061 Set Yellow 1
1104 002 Set Black 2 [0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step]
M0AC/M257 4-14 SM
1104 022 Set Cyan 2
Maintenance
Reference
System
1104 003 Set Black 3 [0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step]
1104 023 Set Cyan 3
1104 004 Set Black 4 [0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step]
1104 024 Set Cyan 4
1104 005 Set Black 5 [0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step]
1104 025 Set Cyan 5
1104 006 Set Black 6 [0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step]
1104 026 Set Cyan 6
1104 007 Set Black 7 [0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step]
1104 027 Set Cyan 7
1104 008 Set Black 8 [0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
1104 028 Set Cyan 8
SM 4-15 M0AC/M257
1104 009 Set Black 9 [0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]
1104 029 Set Cyan 9
1104 010 Set Black 10 [0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]
1104 030 Set Cyan 10
1104 011 Set Black 11 [0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]
1104 031 Set Cyan 11
1104 012 Set Black 12 [0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]
1104 032 Set Cyan 12
1104 013 Set Black 13 [0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]
1104 033 Set Cyan 13
1104 014 Set Black 14 [0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]
1104 034 Set Cyan 14
1104 015 Set Black 15 [0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]
M0AC/M257 4-16 SM
1104 035 Set Cyan 15
Maintenance
Reference
System
1105 [ToneCtlSave]
Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current
Setting. Before the machine stores the new "current settingR", it moves the
data stored as the "current setting" to the "previous setting" memory-storage
location.
1106 [Toner Limit Value]
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 001 TonerLimitValue [100 to 400 / 220 / 1%/step]
1109 [Economy Color]
Adjusts the toner density in "Economy Color" mode.
1109 001 Text [0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step]
1109 002 Image
1109 003 Line
1109 004 Paint
1112 [Supply End]
Turns on or off the machine operation when the machine detects a supply
en.
1112 001 0:continue 1:stop [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
SM 4-17 M0AC/M257
Engine SP Mode Tables: SP1000
4.3 ENGINE SP MODE TABLES: SP1000
4.3.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
1001 [LEdge Regist] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type -> Plain, Middle
Thick, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick3
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor

operation timing for each mode.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the trailing edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the leading edge of paper.
1-001-001 Tray:Plain *ENG [–9 to 9 / 3.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-002 Tray:MThick *ENG [–9 to 9 / -0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-003 Tray: Thick1 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -1.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-006 Tray:Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-007 Tray:MThick:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -0.7 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-008 Tray:Thick1:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -0.1 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-009 By-pass: Plain *ENG [–9 to 9 / 3.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-010 By-pass: MThick *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.4 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-011 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -1.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-014 Bypass:Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-015 Bypass: MThck:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.1 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-016 Bypass: Thck1:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.1 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-017 Duplex: Plain *ENG [–9 to 9 / 3.9 / 0.1 mm/step]
M0AC/M257 4-18 SM
1-001-018 Duplex: MThick *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.1 / 0.1 mm/step]
Maintenance
Reference
1-001-019 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -1.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
System
1-001-020 Duplex: Thick 2 *ENG [–9 to 9 / -2.4 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-021 Duplex:Plain:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-022 Duplex:MThck:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.1 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-023 Duplex:Thck1:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-024 Tray Thin *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-001-026 By-pass Thin *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 [S-to-S Regist]
Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode and tray.
Increasing a value: an image is moved to the rear edge of paper.
Decreasing a value: an image is moved to the front edge of paper.
1-002-001 By-pass Table *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1-002-002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG
1-002-006 Duplex *ENG
1003 [Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type), Paper Type: N: Normal, MThick: Middle
Thick, TH: Thick
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing

the paper feed timing.
1-003-001 Tray1:Plain *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-002 Tray1:MThick *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
SM 4-19 M0AC/M257
1-003-003 Tray1:Thick1 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-004 Tray234:Plain *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-005 Tray234:MThick *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-006 Tray234:Thick1 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-007 By-pass:Plain *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-008 By-pass:MThick *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-009 By-pass:Thick1 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -4 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-010 Duplex:Plain *ENG [–20 to 20 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-011 Duplex:MThick *ENG [–20 to 20 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-012 Duplex:Thick1 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -4 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-013 Tray1:Plain:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-014 Tray1:M-Thick:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-015 Tray1:Thick1:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-016 Tray234:Plain:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-017 Tray234:M-Thick:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-018 Tray234:Thick1:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-019 By-pass:Plain:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-020 By-pass:M-Thick:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -3 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-021 By-pass:Thick1:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -4 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-022 Duplex:Plain:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-023 Duplex:M-Thick:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1-003-024 Duplex:Thick1:1200 *ENG [–20 to 20 / -4 / 1 mm/step]
1103 [Fusing Idling] Fusing Idling Adjustment
1-103-016 Ex.Idling Time(L) *ENG [ 0 to 60 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the idling time in the low
temperature condition.
M0AC/M257 4-20 SM
1-103-017 Ex.Idling Time(H) *ENG [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Maintenance
Specifies the idling time in the high
Reference
System
temperature condition.
1-103-018 Ex.Idling Time(M) *ENG [ 0 to 60 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the idling time in the
middle temperature condition.
1-103-019 ExIdl Temp:PRoll *ENG [ 0 to 160 / 110 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the threshold temperature
of the pressure roller for idling
extention mode.
[Fusing Idling BF]

1104
MT: Middle Thick, PR: Pressure Roller
1-104-001 Envir. Thresh *ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]

Selects the environmental
condition.
0: LL condition
1: LL and MM condition
2: All condition
1-104-002 Idl Temp:P-Roll *ENG [0 to 160 / 160 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the threshold temperature for the pressure roller idling before a
job.
1-104-003 Idling Time:BW *ENG Specifies the fusing idling time

for each printe mode before a
1-104-004 Idling Time:FC *ENG
job.
1-104-005 Idl Time:MTh:BW *ENG [0 to 10 / 2 / 1 sec/step]
1-104-006 Idl Time:MTh:FC *ENG
007-009 Specifies the thereshold temperature of the paper feed before a job.
1-104-007 P.FeedTemp:P-Roll *ENG [0 to 160 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
1-104-008 P.F Temp:MT:PR:BW *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
1-104-009 P.F Temp:MT:PR:FC *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
SM 4-21 M0AC/M257
1-104-010 Upper Limit Temp *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the additional
temperature for the upper limit
of the heating roller.
1-104-011 Offset:Feed Start *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the subtract
temperature for the lower limit
1-104-012 Offset:FdStart:MT *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]

temperature of the middle
thick paper for the lower limit
1-104-013 Offst:FdS600Pl1BW *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

temperature of the plain 1
paper in the 600 dpi BW
printing mode for the lower
limit of the heating roller.
1-104-014 Offst:FdS600Pl2BW *ENG [0 to 100 / 25 / 1 deg/step]

temperature of the plain 2
paper in the 600 dpi BW
printing mode for the lower
1-104-030 FdStrt Time *ENG [15 to 500 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the waiting time for
the paper feeding.
1-104-031 Offst:FdStrt:1200 *ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1 deg/step]

temperature in the 1200 dpi
printing mode for the upper
M0AC/M257 4-22 SM
1-104-033 Offst:FdStrt:Glsy *ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
Reference
System
temperature in the glossy
printing mode for the upper
1105 [Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature Adjustment
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type –> Center and Ends: Heating roller, P-Roller or PR –>
Pressure roller
Paper Type -> Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special
Printing Mode -> S: Simplex, D: Duplex
1-105-001 Fusing Ready Temp *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition.
1-105-002 Fusing Ready: Offset *ENG [5 to 30 / 11 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the subtracted
temperature of the heating roller
for the fusing reload start.
1-105-003 PR:RdyTrgt Temp. *ENG [50 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition.
1-105-007 P-Roll Ready Temp *ENG [0 to 150 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the subtracted temperature of the pressure roller for the fusing
reload start.
1-105-010 Stand-By: Center * ENG [50 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the target center
temperature of the heating roller
(center) for the stand-by mode.
1-105-011 Stand-By: Ends * ENG [50 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the target temperature
of the heating roller (ends) for
the stand-by mode.
1-105-012 Stand-By:P-Roller * ENG [50 to 160 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
SM 4-23 M0AC/M257
Specifies the target temperature of the pressure roller for the stand-by
mode.
1-105-013 Panel Off: Center * ENG [50 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature (center) in the panel off mode.
1-105-014 Panel Off: Ends * ENG [50 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature (both ends) in the panel off mode.
1-105-015 Panel Off: P-Roller *ENG [50 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the presure roller temperature in the panel off mode.
1-105-016 Low Power: Center *ENG Specifies the heating roller

temperature (center or ends) in
1-105-017 Low Power: Ends *ENG
the low power mode.
[30 to 180 / 40 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-018 Low Power: P-Roller *ENG [30 to 160 / 110 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature in the low power mode.
1-105-019 Off Mode: Center *ENG Specifies the heating roller

temperature (center or ends) in
1-105-020 Off Mode: Ends *ENG
the sleep mode.
[0 to 180 / 0 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-021 Off Mode:P-Roller *ENG [0 to 170 / 0 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature in the sleep mode.
030 to 239 The target fusing temperature for each paper type and mode can be
adjusted by the following SPs.
1-105-030 Plain:FC:S:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 155 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-031 Plain1:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-032 Plain:FC:D:Center *ENG
1-105-033 Plain1:FC:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-034 Plain:BW:S:Center *ENG
1-105-035 Plain1:BW:S:Ends *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-24 SM
1-105-036 Plain:BW:D:Center *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
1-105-037 Plain1:BW:D:Ends *ENG
System
1-105-038 Thin:FC:S:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 145 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-039 Thin:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-040 Thin:FC:D:Center *ENG
1-105-041 Thin:FC:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-042 Thin:BW:S:Center *ENG
1-105-043 Thin:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-044 Thin:BW:D:Center *ENG
1-105-045 Thin:BW:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-046 Thick1:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 165 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-047 Thick 1:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-048 Thick1:FC:D:Cntr *ENG
1-105-049 Thick 1:FC:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-050 Thick1:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-051 Thick 1:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-052 Thick1:BW:D:Cntr *ENG
1-105-053 Thick 1:BW:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-054 Thick2:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-056 OHP:FC *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-057 OHP:BW *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-058 SP 1:FC:S:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 170 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-059 SP 1:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-060 SP 1:FC:D:Center *ENG
1-105-061 SP 1:FC:D:Ends *ENG
SM 4-25 M0AC/M257
1-105-062 SP 1:BW:S:Center *ENG
1-105-063 SP 1:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-064 SP 1:BW:D:Center *ENG
1-105-065 SP 1:BW:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-082 TargetTemp AF Rdy *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the target temperature for the maintain mode after the machine
has reached the target temperature in warm-up mode.
1-105-083 Rcvry Target Temp *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg /step]
Specifies the target temperature for the print mode without printing job
after the machine's recovery.
M0AC/M257 4-26 SM
1-105-087 Thick 2:FC:S:Ends *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
Reference
System
1-105-089 Thick3:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-090 Thick 3:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-109 MThick:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 175 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-110 MThick:FC:D:Cntr *ENG
1-105-111 MThick:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-112 MThick:BW:D:Cntr *ENG
1-105-113 M-Thick:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-114 M-Thick:FC:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-115 M-Thick:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-116 M-Thick:BW:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-120 Plain2:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-121 Plain2:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-122 Plain2:FC:D:Cntr *ENG
1-105-123 Plain2:FC:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-124 Plain2:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-125 Plain2:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-126 Plain2:BW:D:Cntr *ENG
1-105-127 Plain2:BW:D:Ends *ENG
1-105-128 F:Pln1:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-129 F:Pln1:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-130 F:Pln1:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-131 F:Pln1:BW:S:Ends *ENG
SM 4-27 M0AC/M257
1-105-132 F:Pln2:FC:S:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 130 / 1 deg /step]
1-105-133 F:Pln2:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-134 F:Pln2:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-135 F:Pln2:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-136 F:MTh:FC:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-137 F:MTh:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-138 F:MTh:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-139 F:MTh:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-142 Glssy:Plain1:Cntr *ENG
1-105-143 Glssy:Plain1:Ends *ENG
1-105-144 Glssy:Plain2:Cntr *ENG [100 to 180 / 135 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-145 Glssy:Plain2:Ends *ENG
1-105-146 Glssy:MThick:Cntr *ENG
1-105-147 Glssy:MThick:Ends *ENG
1-105-160 F:Thk1:FC:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-161 F:Thk1:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-162 F:Thk1:BW:S:Cntr *ENG
1-105-163 F:Thk1:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-164 F:SP1:FC:S:Center *ENG
1-105-165 F:SP1:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-166 F:SP1:BW:S:Center *ENG
1-105-167 F:SP1:BW:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-168 F:SP2:FC:S:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 140 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-169 F:SP2:FC:S:Ends *ENG
1-105-170 F:SP2:BW:S:Center *ENG
1-105-171 F:SP2:BW:S:Ends *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-28 SM
1-105-201 Plain1:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
Reference
1-105-202 Thin:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
System
1-105-203 Thick1:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-206 OHP:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 80 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-207 SP1:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-210 M-thick:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 130 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-211 Plain2:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 125 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-212 F:Plain1:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-213 F:Plain2:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-214 F:M-thick:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-215 Glssy:Pln1:S:Prs *ENG [50 to 160 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-216 Glssy:Pln2:S:Prs *ENG [50 to 160 / 110 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-217 Glssy:MThk:S:Prs *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-220 F:Thick1:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-221 F:SP1:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 105 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-222 F:SP2:S:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 115 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-223 Plain1:D:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-224 Thick1:D:Press *ENG
1-105-225 Thick2:D:Press *ENG
1-105-226 SP1:D:Press *ENG
SM 4-29 M0AC/M257
1-105-229 M-thick:D:Press *ENG
1-105-230 Plain2:D:Press *ENG
1-105-231 F:Plain1:D:Press *ENG
1-105-232 F:Plain2:D:Press *ENG
1-105-233 F:M-thick:D:Press *ENG [50 to 160 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
1-105-234 Glssy:Pln1:D:Prs *ENG
1-105-235 Glssy:Pln2:D:Prs *ENG
1-105-236 Glssy:MThk:D:Prs *ENG
1-105-237 F:Thick1:D:Press *ENG
1-105-238 F:SP1:D:Press *ENG
1-105-239 F:SP2:D:Press *ENG
1106 [FusingTemp Displ] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)
Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.
1-106-001 F-Roller:Center ENG [–20 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
1-106-002 Fusing Roller:End ENG [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
The heating roller has two lamps. One heats the center of the heating
roller and the other heats both ends of the heating roller.
1-106-003 P-Roller:Center ENG [–10 to 250 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
The pressure roller has a one lamp.
1108 [Ready Temp Set]
Japan use only
1-108-007 Ready Temp Time *ENG [22 to 60 / 43 / 0.1 sec/step]
M0AC/M257 4-30 SM
Maintenance
1109 [Fusing Nip Chck]
Reference
System
1-109-001 Execute ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]
Executes the nip band measurement
between fusing belt and pressure
roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and
fusing is not good, replace the
pressure roller or install a new fusing
unit.
1-109-002 Pre-Idling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109-001.
1-109-003 Stop Time * ENG [5 to 30 / 20 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the time for measuring the nip.
1112 [Env.Crrct:Fusing]
1-112-001 Temp.:Thresh:Low *ENG [10 to 23 / 17 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature condition.
1-112-002 Temp.:Thresh:High *ENG [24 to 40 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the threshold temperature for high temperature condition.
1-112-003 Low Temp Correct *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller. When the low
temperature condition (specified with SP1112-001) is detected, the value of
this SP is added to the heating roller temperature.
1-112-004 High Temp Correct *ENG [0 to 15 / 3 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller. When the high
temperature condition (specified with SP1112-002) is detected, the value of
this SP is subtracted from the heating roller temperature.
1-112-005 J-Lo Temp. Corr *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
SM 4-31 M0AC/M257
Specifies the temperature correction in the paper feeding for the heating
roller.
1-112-006 J-Hi Temp. Corr *ENG [0 to 15 / 3 / 0.1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction in the paper feeding for the heating
roller.
1113 [Standby Mode Set]
1-113-001 Wait Time AF Ready *ENG [0 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the time for keeping the target temperature without any jobs after
reloading (SP1105-082).
1-113-003 WaitTime AF Rcvry *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
recovery (SP1105-083).
1-113-004 Wait Time AF Job *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
a last job.
1-113-005 PR Thresh AF Rdy *ENG [0 to 160 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for entering the
wait time mode (SP1-113-001).
1-113-006 PR Thresh AF Job *ENG [0 to 160 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the threshold temperature of the pressure roller for entering the
wait time mode (SP1-113-004).
1-113-008 On/Off SW Timer *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the interval for entering the PID control from the On/Off control.
1115 [Stand-by Idling]
1-115-001 Interval *ENG [0 to 240 / 60 / 1 min/step]
Specifies the interval between idling during stand-by mode.

This idling during the stand-by mode prevents the roller deformation.
M0AC/M257 4-32 SM
1-115-002 Idling Time *ENG [0 to 60 / 2 / 0.1 sec/step]
Maintenance
Reference
Specifies the length of each idling operation during stand-by mode.
System
1-115-003 Idling Speed *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Half SPD, 1: Full SPD
Selects the line speed for the
stand-by idling.
1116 [Fusing Temp Change]

Paper Type –> MThick: Middle Thick
1-116-010 Center Temp. 1 *ENG [-10 / 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (center) when the
paper width is 226 mm or more.
The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116-018.
1-116-011 Ends Temp. 1 *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (ends) when the
1-116-012 Center Temp. 2 *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (center) when the
1-116-013 Ends Temp. 2 *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (ends) when the
1-116-018 Control Time 1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with
SP1116-010 and -011.
The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP
has passed after feeding the paper.
1-116-019 Control Time 2 *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
SM 4-33 M0AC/M257
Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with
SP1116-012 and -013.
The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP
has passed after feeding the paper.
022 to Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller (center and ends)
033 when the middle thick or other paper is used.
1-116-022 C-Temp1:Mthick *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
1-116-023 EndTemp1:MThick *ENG
1-116-024 C-Temp2:Mthick *ENG
1-116-025 EndTemp2:MThick *ENG
1-116-030 CenterTemp1:Other *ENG
1-116-031 EndTemp1:Other *ENG
1-116-032 CenterTemp2:Other *ENG
1-116-033 EndTemp2:Other *ENG
1118 [Curl Correction]
1-118-001 Execute Pattern *ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1]
Selects the curl correction mode.

0: No curl correction mode
1: Plain in 600 dpi mode
2: Plain in 1200 dpi mode
3: Curl coefficient correction
 This SP is not effective for all curl situations. Use this SP if you see
a sharp back curl after the machine recovered from "OFF mode" in
a high temperature and humidity environment.
1-118-002 Humidity Thresh 1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %]
Specifies the first threshold humidity for executing the curl correction.
1-118-003 Humidity Thresh 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %]
Specifies the second threshold humidity for executing the curl correction.
M0AC/M257 4-34 SM
-004 to Specifies the additional temperature to the target temperature of the
Maintenance
-007 heating roller and pressure roller when the curl correction mode 1 or 3 is
Reference
System
selected with SP1-118-001.
1-118-004 Pattern1:MM:HRoll *ENG [-30 to 0 / -3 / 1 deg]
1-118-005 Pattern1:MM:PRoll *ENG [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
1-118-006 Pattern1:HM:HRoll *ENG [-30 to 0 / 0 / 1 deg]
1-118-007 Pattern1:HM:PRoll *ENG [0 to 60 / 0 / 1 deg]
-008 to Specifies the additional temperature to the target temperature of the

-011 heating roller and pressure roller when the curl correction mode 2 or 3 is
selected with SP1-118-001.
1-118-008 Pattern2:MM:HRoll *ENG [-30 to 0 / -5 / 1 deg]
1-118-009 Pattern2:MM:PRoll *ENG [0 to 60 / 50 / 1 deg]
1-118-010 Pattern2:HM:HRoll *ENG [-30 to 0 / -5 / 1 deg]
1-118-011 Pattern2:HM:PRoll *ENG [0 to 60 / 50 / 1 deg]
1120 [Multi-Print Mode]
1-120-001 Feed Condition *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
Selects the paper feed control mode.

0: Productivity priority,
1: Fusing quality priory (paper size change: small size -> large size),
2: Fusing quality priority (print mode change: duplex -> simplex)
1121 [Maximum Duty Sw]
1-121-001 Ctrl Method Sw *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Selects the power control method for the fusing unit.

0: FIX, 1: POWER
SM 4-35 M0AC/M257
1135 [Inrush Control]
1-135-001 Inrush Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1]

0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the inrush control which
is designed for the UPS and breaker
input.
1159 [Fusing Jam Detect]
1-159-001 SC Display *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.

0: No detection, 1: Detection
1201 [CPM Down Setting] DFU
1-201-001 Low: Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -10 / 1 deg/step]
1-201-002 Low: Up Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -7 / 1 deg/step]
1-201-003 Low: 1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 5 %]
1-201-004 Low: 2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 5 %]
1-201-005 Low: 3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %]
1-201-006 Unit Low Judge Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 deg/step]
1-201-007 High: 1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 75 / 5 %]
1-201-008 High: 2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 5 %]
1-201-009 High: 3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 25 / 5 %]
1-201-010 Hi: 1-CPM DwnTemp. *ENG [160 to 240 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
1-201-021 Judging Interval *ENG [1 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]
M0AC/M257 4-36 SM
1801 [Motor Spd Adjust] FA
Maintenance
Low: 85 mm/s, High: 260 mm/s, Middle: 182 mm/s
Reference
System
1-801-001 Regist:Plain: Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-002 Regist:Plain: High *ENG
1-801-003 Regist:M-Thick: Low *ENG
1-801-004 Regist:M-Thick: High *ENG
1-801-005 Regist:Thick1:Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.7 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-006 Regist:Thick1:Mid *ENG
1-801-008 BkOpcDevMot:260 *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.15 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-009 BkOpcDevMot:182 *ENG
1-801-011 BkOpcDevMot:85 *ENG
1-801-013 ColorOpcMot:260 *ENG [-11 to 11 / 0 / 1 step]
1-801-019 FusingMot:260 *ENG [-4 to 4 / 1.85 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-020 FusingMot:182 *ENG
1-801-022 FusingMot:85 *ENG [-4 to 4 / 1.55 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-029 Regist:Thick2: Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.7 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-030 Regist:Thick3: Low *ENG
1-801-031 Feed:Plain: Low *ENG [-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-032 Feed:Plain: High *ENG
1-801-033 Feed:M-Thick: Low *ENG
1-801-034 Feed:M-Thick: High *ENG
1-801-035 Feed:Thick1: Low *ENG [-2 to 2 / 0.7 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-036 Feed:Thick1: Middle *ENG
1-801-037 Feed:Thick2: Low *ENG
SM 4-37 M0AC/M257
1-801-038 Feed:Thick3: Low *ENG
1-801-039 VertTr:Plain:Low *ENG [-2 to 2 / 0.4 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-040 VertTr:Plain:High *ENG
1-801-041 VertTr:M-Thk:Low *ENG
1-801-042 VertTr:M-Thk:High *ENG
1-801-043 VertTr:Thick1:Low *ENG [-2 to 2 / 0.7 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-044 VertTr:Thick1:Mid *ENG
1-801-045 VertTr:Thick2:Low *ENG
1-801-046 VertTr:Thick3:Low *ENG
1-801-047 By-pass:Plain: Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-048 By-pass:Plain: High *ENG
1-801-049 By-pass:MThk: Low *ENG
1-801-050 By-pass:MThk: High *ENG
1-801-051 By-pass:Thick1: Low *ENG
1-801-052 By-pass:Thick1: Mid *ENG
1-801-055 Duplex:Plain: Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.4 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-056 Duplex:Plain: High *ENG
1-801-057 Duplex:M-Thk: Low *ENG
1-801-058 Duplex:M-Thk: High *ENG
1-801-059 Duplex:Thick1: Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0.7 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-060 Duplex:Thick1: Mid *ENG
1-801-061 Duplex:Thick2: Low *ENG
1-801-062 Rev CW:Plain:Low *ENG [-4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1%/step]
1-801-063 Rev CW:Plain:High *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-38 SM
1-801-064 Rev CW:M-Thk:Low *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
1-801-065 RevCW:M-Thk:High *ENG
System
1-801-066 Rev CW:Thick1:Low *ENG
1-801-067 Rev CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
1-801-068 Rev CW:Thick2:Low *ENG
1-801-069 Rev CCW:Plain:Low *ENG
1-801-070 Rev CCW:Plain:Hi *ENG
1-801-071 Rev CCW:M-Thk:Low *ENG
1-801-072 RevCCW:M-Thk:High *ENG
1-801-073 Rev CCW:Thick1:Lo *ENG
1-801-074 RevCCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
1-801-075 Rev CCW:Thick2:Lo *ENG
1-801-101 Offset: 260: Color *ENG [-11 to 11 / 0 / 1/step]
1-801-102 Offset: 182: Color *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1/step]
1-801-103 Offset: 85: Color *ENG [-80 to 80 / 0 / 1 step]
1-801-130 OpcMotAdjCtrl *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: No correction, 1: Correction
Selects the fine adjustment mode
for the drum motor.
SM 4-39 M0AC/M257
1902 [Gain Con] Gain Control
1-902-001 Execute *ENG Execute drum phase adjustment.
1-902-002 Result *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]

Displays the result of drum phase
adjustment.
0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
1-902-003 Auto Execute *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

Turns the automatic drum phase
adjustment on or off.
0: Off, 1: On
1907 [Feed Timing Adj.] DFU

Paper Type -> Pln: Plain, Thk: Thick
Line Speed -> Low: 85 mm/s, High: 260 mm/s, Middle: 182 mm/s
Parts Name -> F-: Feed, J-Gt: Junction Gate, SOL/Sol: Solenoid, CL:
Clutch, STM: Stepping Motor, Tr: Tray, F-On: Feed On Timing
1-907-001 F-Solenoid ON:Pln *ENG [-10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm/step]
1-907-002 F-STM OFF: Plain *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1-907-003 F-STM ON: Plain *ENG
1-907-004 F-Solenoid ON:Thk *ENG [-10 to 40 / 0 / 2.5 mm/step]
1-907-005 F-STM OFF: Thick *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1-907-006 F-STM ON: Thick *ENG
1-907-007 F-START : Low *ENG
1-907-014 Bypass Sol ON:Low *ENG [-10 to 40 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1-907-015 Bypass Sol ON:Mid *ENG
1-907-016 Bypass Sol ON:Hi *ENG
1-907-017 J-GtSOL1:ON:Low *ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
M0AC/M257 4-40 SM
1-907-018 J-GtSOL1:ON:Mid *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
1-907-019 J-GtSOL1:ON:High *ENG
System
1-907-020 J-GtSOL1:OFF:Low *ENG
1-907-021 J-GtSOL1:OFF:Mid *ENG
1-907-022 J-GtSOL1:OFF:High *ENG
1-907-023 J-GtSOL2:ON:Low *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1-907-024 J-GtSOL2:ON:Mid *ENG
1-907-025 J-GtSOL2:ON:High *ENG
1-907-026 J-GtSOL2:OFF:Low *ENG
1-907-027 J-GtSOL2:OFF:Mid *ENG
1-907-028 J-GtSOL2:OFF:High *ENG
1-907-029 Tr234:F-SOL ON:P *ENG [-10 to 25 / 0 / 2.5 mm/step]
1-907-030 Tr234:F-SOL OFF:P *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1-907-031 Tr234:F-CL OFF:P *ENG
1-907-032 Tr234:F-STM ON:P *ENG
1-907-033 Tr234:F-SOL ON:T *ENG [-10 to 25 / 0 / 2.5 mm/step]
1-907-034 Tr234:F-SOL OFF:T *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1-907-035 Tr234:F-CL OFF:T *ENG
1-907-036 Tr234:F-STM ON:T *ENG
1-907-037 Tr234:F-ON:H-M *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
1-907-038 Tr234:F-On:Low *ENG
SM 4-41 M0AC/M257
1950 [Fan Cool Timeset]
Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end.
1-950-001 Development Fan *ENG [0 to 600 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

(Development Fan 1)
1-950-002 Development Fan2 *ENG
1-950-003 Imaging Fan (Laser Unit Fan) *ENG
1-950-004 Fusing Exit Fan1 (Fusing Fan *ENG

1)
1-950-005 Fusing Exit Fan2 (Fusing Fan *ENG

2)
1-950-006 PSU Fan *ENG
1-950-007 P_Toner_Fan (Toner Supply *ENG

Fan)
1-950-008 Image Form Fan (Drive Unit *ENG

Fan)
1-950-009 P_FUSNS (Fusing Cooling *ENG

Fan)
M0AC/M257 4-42 SM
Engine SP Mode Tables - SP2000
4.4 ENGINE SP MODE TABLES - SP2000
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.4.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)
2013 [Env. Correct:PCU] Environment Correction: PCU
2-013-007 CurrentTemp:Displ *ENG Displays the current temperature.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
2-013-008 RHumid:FC:Display *ENG Displays the current relative

humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
2-013-009 AHumid:FC:Display *ENG Displays the absolute humidity.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m 3/step]
2-013-010 Env.Range:Bk:Dspl *ENG Displays the previous

environmental condition, which is
measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
2-013-011 Prev.Temp:Bk:Dspl *ENG Displays the previous temperature.

[0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
2-013-012 RHumid:Bk:Display *ENG Displays the previous relative

humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1%RH/step]
2-013-013 AHumid:Bk:Display *ENG Displays the previous absolute

humidity.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m 3/step]
2101 [Color Regist Adj.]
This value is the one of parameters for the automatic line position
adjustment and is adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value
for SP2101-001 after replacing the laser unit. For details, see "Laser Unit"
in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section. The value should be
provided with the new laser unit.
SM 4-43 M0AC/M257
2-101-001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG [–511 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
2102 [Mag. Adjustment] DFU Magnification Adjustment

Function Name -> M Mag.: Main Scan Magnification, M B-P: Main Scan
Beam Pitch
Line Speed -> Low: 85 mm/s, Std: 260 mm/s, Mid: 182 mm/s
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment
and are adjusted at the factory. These SPs must be input only when a new
laser unit is installed.
2-102-001 M Mag.: Std Spd K *ENG [0 to 408 / 204 / 1 /step]
2-102-002 M Mag.: Mid Spd K *ENG
2-102-003 M Mag.: Low Spd K *ENG
2-102-013 M B-P Dot: Bk *ENG [–20 to 20 / 9 / 1 dot/step]
2-102-014 M B-P Subdot: Bk *ENG [–15 to 15 / -3 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2-102-015 M B-P Dot: C *ENG [–20 to 20 / 9 / 1 dot/step]
2-102-016 M B-P Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / -3 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2-102-017 M B-P Dot: M *ENG [–20 to 20 / 9 / 1 dot/step]
2-102-018 M B-P Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / -4 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2-102-019 M B-P Dot: Y *ENG [–20 to 20 / 9 / 1 dot/step]
2-102-020 M B-P Subdot: Y *ENG [–15 to 15 / -4 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2103 [EraseMargin Adj.] (Area, Paper Size)
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
2-103-001 Lead Edge Width *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
2-103-002 Trail. Edge Width *ENG
2-103-003 Left *ENG [0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
2-103-004 Right *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-44 SM
2104 [LD IntlPower Adj.] LD Initial Power Adjustment
Maintenance
Reference
Adjusts the LD initial power. These SPs must be input only when a new
System
laser unit is installed.
2-104-001 LD1: K *ENG [60 to 140 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]
2-104-002 LD2: K *ENG
2-104-003 LD1: C *ENG
2-104-004 LD2: C *ENG
2-104-005 LD1: M *ENG
2-104-006 LD2: M *ENG
2-104-007 LD1: Y *ENG
2-104-008 LD2: Y *ENG
2109 [Test Pattern]
Generates the test pattern.
2-109-003 Pattern Selection ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
0 None 12. Independent Pattern (2dot)

1: Vertical Line (1dot) 13. Independent Pattern (4dot)
2: Vertical Line (2dot) 14. Trimming Area
3: Horizontal (1dot) 15: Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound's Tooth Check
5: Grid Vertical Line (Horizontal)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 17: Band (Vertical)
7: Grid pattern Small 18: Band (Horizontal)
8: Grid pattern Large 19: Checker Flag Pattern
9: Argyle Pattern Small 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
10: Argyle Pattern Large 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin
11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 22: Two Beam
23: Full Dot Pattern
SM 4-45 M0AC/M257
2-109-005 Color Selection ENG Specifies the color for the test
pattern.
[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
1: All colors, 2: Cyan, 3: Magenta, 4:
Yellow
2-109-006 Density: Bk ENG Specifies the color density for the

test pattern.
2-109-007 Density: C ENG
[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
2-109-008 Density: M ENG 0: Lightest density
15: Darkest density
2-109-009 Density: Y ENG
2111 [Line Pos. Ajust]
2-111-001 Mode a ENG Executes the fine line position

adjustment twice.
If this SP is not completed (NG is
displayed), do SP2111-003 first and
then try this SP again.
2-111-002 Mode b ENG Executes the fine line position

adjustment once.
If this SP is not completed, do
SP2111-003 first and then try this SP
again.
2-111-003 Mode c ENG Executes the rough line position

adjustment once.
After doing this SP, make sure to
execute SP2111-001 or -002.
Otherwise, the line position
adjustment is not perfectly done.
2-111-004 Mode d ENG Executes the rough adjustment and

fine adjustment, once each.
M0AC/M257 4-46 SM
Maintenance
2112 [TM/P-Sensor Test] FA
Reference
System
2-112-001 Execute ENG This SP is used to check the ID
sensors at the factory. The results of
this SP are displayed in SP2140 to
SP2145.
2117 [Skew Adjustment] Skew Adjustment Input
Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.
2-117-001 Pulse: C *ENG [–100 to 100 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2-117-002 Pulse: M *ENG
2-117-003 Pulse: Y *ENG
2118 [Skew Adjustment] Skew Adjustment Execution
2-118-001 Execute: C ENG Changes the current skew adjustment

values to the values specified with
2-118-002 Execute: M ENG
SP2117.
2-118-003 Execute: Y ENG
2119 [Skew Adjust Displ]
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
2-119-001 C *ENG [–75 to 75 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
2-119-002 M *ENG
2-119-003 Y *ENG
2153 [Shade: SP Clear]
2-153-001 SP clear exe ENG Clears "Shading Correct Settings"

(SP2152: SSP).
SM 4-47 M0AC/M257
2180 [Line Pos. Adj. Clear] DFU
2-180-001 Color Regist. ENG
2-180-002 Mag Adjust ENG
2-180-003 MUSIC Result ENG
2-180-004 Area Mag. Correct ENG
2193 [MUSIC Condition] DFU

Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
2-193-001 Auto Execution *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment.
2-193-002 Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color
printing mode after job end.
2-193-003 Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode
after job end.
2-193-004 Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color
printing mode during job.
2-193-005 Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode
during jobs.
2-193-006 Page: Standby: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode
in stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and
the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
M0AC/M257 4-48 SM
Maintenance
2-193-007 Page: Standby: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Reference
System
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode
in stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and
the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
2-193-008 Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Adjusts the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment
(Mode b: adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends
on the combinations of several conditions.
2-193-009 Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
Adjusts the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b:
adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the
combinations of several conditions.
2-193-010 Magnification *ENG [0 to 10 / 1 / 0.1 %/step]
Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment. If the

length of the main scan is changed by this amount since the previous
MUSIC, then MUSIC is done again.
2-193-011 Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
Adjusts the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment
(Mode a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment
depends on the combinations of several conditions.
2-193-012 Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1 minute/step]
Adjusts the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a:
adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the
combinations of several conditions.
2-193-013 Time 3 *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
2-193-014 Pg:FCJbBef:BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
2-193-015 Pg:FCJobBef:FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
SM 4-49 M0AC/M257
2-193-016 Pg:PowerON:BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and FC printing
mode at the power-on. The line position adjustment is done when the
number of outputs in monochrome and color printing mode reaches the
value specified with this SP and the other conditions such as the
temperature change and time elapsing are satisfied.
2194 [MUSIC Exe Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
Displays the execution result of the line position adjustment.
2-194-001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step]
2-194-002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step]
2-194-003 Day *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step]
2-194-004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step]
2-194-005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]
2-194-006 Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
2-194-007 Execution Result *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
2-194-008 Number of Exe. *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]
2-194-009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 times/step]
2-194-010 Error Result: C *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Not done
2-194-011 Error Result: M *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2-194-012 Error Result: Y *ENG 2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the
target
4: Out of the adjustment range
5 to 9: Not used
M0AC/M257 4-50 SM
Maintenance
2220 [Skew Origin Set]
Reference
System
Resets the value of the skew adjustment motor for each color.
These SPs must be executed when a new laser optics housing unit is
installed.
2-220-001 C:Skew Motor ENG [Execute]
2-220-002 M:Skew Motor ENG
2-220-003 Y:Skew Motor ENG
2241 [Temp/Humid: Disp]
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
2-241-001 Temperature ENG [–1280 to 1270 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
2-241-002 Relative Humidity ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 0.1%RH/step]
2-241-003 Absolute Humidity ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 g/m 3/step]
2302 [Env.Crrct:Trnsfer] DFU

Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
2-302-002 Forced Setting *ENG [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets the environment condition manually.

0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle humidity)
4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
6: SLL (Super low temperature/ low humidity)
SM 4-51 M0AC/M257
2-302-003 AHumidity:Thresh1 *ENG [0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m 3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML.
2-302-004 AHumidity:Thresh 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 g/m 3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM.
2-302-005 AHumidity:Thresh 3 *ENG [0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01

g/m 3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between MM and MH.
2-302-006 AHumidity:Thresh 4 *ENG [0 to 100 / 24 / 0.01

g/m 3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH.
2-302-007 Temp:Threshold *ENG [–5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Adjusts the threshold temperature for SLL. If detected temperature is less

than a value specified by this SP, SLL condition is determined regardless of
humidity.
2308 [PaperSize Correct] DFU
Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
2-308-001 Threshold 1 *ENG [0 to 250 / 194 / 1 mm/step]

Threshold 1 ≤ paper:
Paper is detected as "S1" size.

Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1:

Threshold 3 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 2:
M0AC/M257 4-52 SM
Maintenance
2311 [NoImage Area:Bias] DFU
Reference
System
2-311-001 Image Transfer *ENG Adjusts the bias of the image transfer
belt between images. This value is
added to the value of the image transfer
belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2-311-002 Paper Transfer *ENG Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer
roller between images.
[0 to 230 / 0 / 1 - A/step]
2316 [Power ON:Bias] DFU
2-316-001 Image Transfer *ENG [0 to 80 / 5 / 1 A /step]
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer roller at power-on or a closed cover.
2326 [PTR CL:Bias] DFU

Paper Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
2-326-001 Positive:before and *ENG [0 to 2100 / 1000 / 10 V /step]

after JOB
Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
paper transfer roller.
2-326-002 Negative:before and *ENG [10 to 995 / 100 / 10 %/step]

after JOB
Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
2-326-003 Positive:after JAM *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 10 V/step]
Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
2-326-004 Negative:after JAM *ENG [10 to 995 / 100 / 10 %/step]
SM 4-53 M0AC/M257
2351 [Common: BW: Bias]

Parts Name -> ITr: Image Transfer Roller
Line Speed -> S-Spd: 260 mm/sec, MiddleSpd: 182 mm/sec, Low Spd: 85
mm/sec
2-351-001 ITr: S-Spd *ENG [0 to 80 / 26 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
2-351-002 ITr: MiddleSpd *ENG [0 to 80 / 17 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for M-Thick
paper.
2-351-003 ITr: Low Spd *ENG [0 to 80 / 7 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1
paper.
2357 [Common: FC: Bias] DFU

mm/sec
2-357-001 ITr:S-Spd:Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 26 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode
for plain paper.
2-357-002 ITr:S-Spd:C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color
mode for plain paper.
2-357-003 ITr:S-Spd:M *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for
plain paper.
2-357-004 ITr:S-Spd:Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode
for plain paper.
M0AC/M257 4-54 SM
Maintenance
2-357-005 ITr:MiddleSpd:Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 17 / 1 A]
Reference
System
for M-Thick paper.
2-357-006 ITr:MiddleSpd:C *ENG [0 to 80 / 15 / 1 A]
mode for M-Thick paper.
2-357-007 ITr:MiddleSpd:M *ENG [0 to 80 / 15 / 1 A]
M-Thick paper.
2-357-008 ITr:MiddleSpd:Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 15 / 1 A]
for M-Thick paper.
2-357-009 ITr: Low Spd: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 7 / 1 A]
for thick 1 paper.
2-357-010 ITr: Low Spd: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 6 / 1 A]
mode for thick 1 paper.
2-357-011 ITr: Low Spd: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 6 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
2-357-012 ITr: Low Spd: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 6 / 1 A]
for thick 1 paper.
SM 4-55 M0AC/M257
2360 [ALL:BW:EnvCor.Tbl] DFU

All Paper Type: BW Printing Mode: Environmet Correction Table
mm/sec
2-360-001 ITr: S-Spd *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]
2-360-002 ITr: MiddleSpd *ENG [1 to 100 / 53 / 1 /step]
2-360-003 ITr: Low Spd *ENG [1 to 100 / 56 / 1 /step]
2360 [ALL:FC:EnvCor.Tbl] DFU

All Paper Type: FC Printing Mode: Environmet Correction Table
2-360-004 ITr:S-Spd:Bk *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]
2-360-005 ITr:S-Spd:C *ENG [1 to 100 / 51 / 1 /step]
2-360-006 ITr:S-Spd:M *ENG [1 to 100 / 51 / 1 /step]
2-360-007 ITr:S-Spd:Y *ENG [1 to 100 / 52 / 1 /step]
2-360-008 ITr:MiddleSpd:Bk *ENG [1 to 100 / 53 / 1 /step]
2-360-009 ITr:MiddleSpd:C *ENG [1 to 100 / 54 / 1 /step]
2-360-010 ITr:MiddleSpd:M *ENG [1 to 100 / 54 / 1 /step]
2-360-011 ITr:MiddleSpd:Y *ENG [1 to 100 / 55 / 1 /step]
2-360-012 ITr: Low Spd: Bk *ENG [1 to 100 / 57 / 1 /step]
2-360-013 ITr: Low Spd: C *ENG [1 to 100 / 58 / 1 /step]
2-360-014 ITr: Low Spd: M *ENG [1 to 100 / 58 / 1 /step]
2-360-015 ITr: Low Spd: Y *ENG [1 to 100 / 58 / 1 /step]
2401 [Plain1: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain 1 paper.

S-Spd: 260 mm/sec, L-Spd: 85 mm/sec
2-401-001 SepaDC:S-Spd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10

-V/step]
2-401-002 SepaDC:S-Spd:2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-56 SM
2-401-003 SepaDC:L-Spd:1st *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
2-401-004 SepaDC:L-Spd:2nd *ENG
System
2403 [Plain1: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in
black-and-white mode.
Normal: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
2-403-001 PTR:Normal:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 – A /step]
2-403-002 PTR:Normald:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 23 / 1 – A /step]
2-403-003 PTR:Low:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 15 / 1 – A /step]
2-403-004 PTR:Low:2nd *ENG
2407 [Plain1: Bias: FC]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain 1 paper in full color
mode.
2-407-001 PTR:Normal:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 38 / 1 – A /step]
2-407-002 PTR:Normal:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 40 / 1 – A /step]
2-407-003 PTR:Low:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 – A /step]
2-407-004 PTR:Low:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 – A /step]
2411 [PlainT:SizeCor:BW] DFU
Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for
each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
2-411-001 PTR:Normal:1st:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width)
2-411-002 PTR:Normal:2nd:S1 *ENG
2-411-003 PTR:Low:1st:S1 *ENG
2-411-004 PTR:Low:2nd:S1 *ENG
SM 4-57 M0AC/M257

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-411-006 PTR:Normal:2nd:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-411-007 PTR:Low:1st:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-411-008 PTR:Low:2nd:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

139 mm > S4 size (Paper
width)

width)

width)
M0AC/M257 4-58 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
width)
2412 [PlainT:SizeCor:FC] DFU
Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current
for each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP
values.

S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper
2-412-002 PTR:Normal:2nd:S1 *ENG
width)
2-412-003 PTR:Low:1st:S1 *ENG
2-412-004 PTR:Low:2nd:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-59 M0AC/M257

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

139 mm > S4 (Paper width)



2413 [PlnT:SizEnvCor:BW] DFU
Adjusts the size correction coefficient table for the paper transfer roller
current for each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these
SP values.
2-413-001 PTR:Normal:1st:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 19 / 1/step]

width)
2-413-002 PTR:Normal:2nd:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 14 / 1/step]

width)
2-413-003 PTR:Low:1st:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1/step]

width)
2-413-004 PTR:Low:2nd:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 11 / 1/step]

width)
M0AC/M257 4-60 SM
Maintenance
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




SM 4-61 M0AC/M257
2414 [PlnT:SizEnvCor:FC] DFU
SP values.

width)

width)

width)

width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
M0AC/M257 4-62 SM
Maintenance
165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




2421 [Plain:LE Correct] DFU
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current or discharge plate
DC at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are
multiplied by these SP values.
Normal/ Std: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
 The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422.
2-421-001 PTR:Normal:1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-421-002 PTR:Normal:2nd *ENG
2-421-003 PTR:Low:1st *ENG
2-421-004 PTR:Low:2nd *ENG
2-421-005 SepaDC:Std:1st *ENG
2-421-006 SepaDC:Std:2nd *ENG
SM 4-63 M0AC/M257
2-421-007 SepaDC:Low:1st *ENG
2-421-008 SepaDC:Low:2nd *ENG
2422 [Plain:SW Tmng:LE] DFU
Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/
discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area
and the image area.
Std: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
2-422-001 PTr:Std:1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2-422-002 PTr:Std:2nd *ENG
2-422-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-422-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
2423 [Plain:TE Correct] DFU

Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current or

discharge plate DC for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and
SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
 The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424.
2-423-001 PTr:Std:1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2-423-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-423-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-423-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-64 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
2424 [Plain:SW Tmng:TE] DFU
Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge

plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the
image area.
Parts Name -> PTr: Paper Transfer Roller
Function Name -> SepaDC: Separation DC
2-424-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-424-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
2425 [HH-s: LE Correct]

HH Condition Small Size Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper
leading edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these
SP values.
Line Speed -> Std: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
2-425-001 PTr:Std&Low:1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2-425-002 PTr:Std&Low:2 *ENG
SM 4-65 M0AC/M257
2430 [Plain1: EnvCor] DFU

Plain 1: Environment Correction
2-430-013 TblSepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the size correction
2-430-014 TblSepaDC:Std:2nd *ENG
coefficient table for the
2-430-015 TblSepaDC:Low:1st *ENG discharge plate DC for each
printing side.
2-430-016 TblSepaDC:Low:2nd *ENG
2-430-017 EdSepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1 /step]

2-430-018 EdSepaDC:Std:2nd *ENG
coefficient table for the
2-430-019 EdSepaDC:Low:1st *ENG discharge plate DC (leading
and traiing edges) for each
2-430-020 EdSepaDC:Low:2nd *ENG
printing side.
2439 [Plain2: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain2 paper.

StdSpd: 260 mm/sec, LowSpd: 85mm/sec
2-439-001 SepaDC:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V/step]
2-439-002 SepaDC:StdSpd:2nd *ENG
2-439-003 SepaDC:LowSpd:1st *ENG
2-439-004 SepaDC:LowSpd:2nd *ENG
2440 [Plain2: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current of the plain 2 paper for the paper transfer roller in
2-440-001 PTr:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 - A /step]
2-440-002 PTr:StdSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 23 / 1 - A /step]
2-440-003 PTr:LowSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
2-440-004 PTr:LowSpd:2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-66 SM
2441 [Plain2: Bias: FC]
Maintenance
Reference
Adjusts the curren of the plain 2 paper for the paper transfer roller in full
System
color mode.
2-441-001 PTr:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 38 / 1 - A /step]
2-441-002 PTr:StdSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 40 / 1 - A /step]
2-441-003 PTr:LowSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 - A /step]
2-441-004 PTr:LowSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 - A /step]
2442 [Plain2: SzCor: BW] DFU

Plain 2: Size Correction: BW Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient of the plain 2 paper for the paper
transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2440 and SP2441 are
Std: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec
2-442-001 PTr:Std:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5 %/step]

2-442-002 PTr:Std:2Sid: S1 *ENG
2-442-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-442-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-442-007 PTr:Low:1:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 135 / 5 %/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-67 M0AC/M257

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm (Paper
width)

width)

width)

width)




2443 [Plain2: SzCor: FC] DFU

Plain 2: Size Correction: FC Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient of the plain 2 paper for the paper

2-443-002 PTr:Std:2Sid:S1 *ENG
2-443-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-443-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-68 SM
Maintenance
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




SM 4-69 M0AC/M257
2444 [Plain2:SzEnvCr:BW] DFU

Plain 2: Size Environment Correction: BW Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient table of the plain 2 paper for the
paper transfer roller current for each paper size. SP2440 and SP2441 are
2-444-001 PTr:Std:1Sid:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 19 / 1 /step]


2-444-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-444-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
2-444-007 PTr:Low:1:S2 *ENG
(Paper width)
2-444-008 PTr:Low:2:S2 *ENG

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
2-444-011 PTr:Low:1:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 8 / 1 /step]

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
M0AC/M257 4-70 SM
Maintenance
139 mm > S4
Reference
System
(Paper width)

139 mm > S4
2-444-015 PTr:Low:1:S4 *ENG
(Paper width)
2-444-016 PTr:Low:2:S4 *ENG
2445 [Plain2:SzEnvCr:FC] DFU

Plain 2: Size Environment Correction: FC Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient table of the plain 2 paper for the
Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec





194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-71 M0AC/M257

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




2446 [Plain2: LE Correct] DFU

Plain 2: Leading Edge Correction
DC at the paper leading edge of the plain 2 paper in each mode. SP2440
and SP2441 are multiplied by these SP values.
M0AC/M257 4-72 SM
2-446-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
2-446-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
System
2-446-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2447 [Plain2:SW Tmng:LE] DFU

Plain 2: Switch Timing: Leading Edge
discharge plate at the paper leading edge of the plain 2 paper between the
erase margin area and the image area.
2-447-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-447-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
2448 [Plain2: TE Correct] DFU

Plain2: Trailing Edge Correction
SM 4-73 M0AC/M257
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the
paper trailing edge of the plain 2 paper in each mode. SP2440 and SP2441
are multiplied by these SP values.
2-448-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-448-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-448-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2449 [Plain2:SW Tmng:TE] DFU

plate at the paper trailing edge of the plain 2 paper between the erase
margin area and the image area.
Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec
2-449-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-449-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-74 SM
2450 [Plain2: EnvCor]
Maintenance
Reference
2-450-013 TblSepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1/step]
System
2-450-014 TblSepaDC:Std:2nd *ENG
coefficient table of the plain 2
2-450-015 TblSepaDC:Low:1st *ENG paper for the discharge plate DC
for each printing side.
2-450-016 TblSepaDC:Low:2nd *ENG
2-450-017 EdSepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1/step]

2-450-018 EdSepaDC:Std:2nd *ENG
coefficient table of the plain 2
2-450-019 EdSepaDC:Low:1st *ENG paper for the discharge plate DC
(leading and traiing edges) for
2-450-020 EdSepaDC:Low:2nd *ENG
each printing side.
2451 [Thin: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper.

Standard: 260 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
2-451-001 SepaDC:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V/step]
2453 [Thin: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current of the thin paper for the paper transfer roller in
2-453-001 PTr:Std:1Sid *ENG [0 to 230 / 23 / 1 – A/step]
2-453-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 12 / 1 – A/step]
2457 [Thin: Bias: FC]
Adjusts the current of the thin paper for the paper transfer roller in full color
mode.
2-457-001 PTr:Std:1Sid *ENG [0 to 230 / 29 / 1 – A /step]
SM 4-75 M0AC/M257
2-457-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 – A /step]
2461 [Thin: SzCor: BW] DFU

Thin: Size Correction: BW Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient of the thin paper for the paper
2-461-001 PTr:Std:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]

2-461-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]


width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)


2462 [Thin: SzCor: FC] DFU

Thin: Size Correction: FC Printing Mode
M0AC/M257 4-76 SM
Adjusts the size correction coefficient of the thin paper for the paper
Maintenance
Reference
System

2-462-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
2-462-007 PTr:Low:1:S2 *ENG
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
2-462-011 PTr:Low:1:S3 *ENG
(Paper width)

2-462-015 PTr:Low:1:S4 *ENG
2463 [Thin:SzEvCor:BW] DFU

Thin: Size Environment Correction: BW Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient table of the thin paper for the paper



194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-77 M0AC/M257

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)


2464 [Thin:SzEvCor:FC] DFU

Thin: Size Environment Correction: FC Printing Mode
Adjusts the size correction coefficient table of the thin paper for the paper



194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
M0AC/M257 4-78 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
2471 [Thin:LE Correct] DFU

Thin: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction of the thin paper to the paper transfer roller current or
discharge plate DC at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2453 and
2-471-001 PTr:Std:1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-471-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-471-005 SepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step]
2472 [Thin:SW Tmng:LE] DFU

Thin: Switch Timing: Leading Edge
and the image area.
2-472-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-472-005 SepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 30 / 2 mm/step]
2473 [Thin:TE Correct] DFU

Thin: Trailing Edge Correction
SM 4-79 M0AC/M257
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current or

discharge plate DC at the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2453 and
2-473-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2474 [Thin:SW Tmng:TE] DFU

Thin: Switch Timing: Trailing Edge

image area.
2-474-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2480 [Thin: EnvCor] DFU

Thin: Environment Correction
2-480-013 SepaDC:Std:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

coefficient table of the thin paper
for the discharge plate DC for each
printing side.
[Thin: EdgeEnvCor]
M0AC/M257 4-80 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
coefficient table of the thin paper
for the discharge plate DC (leading
and traiing edges) for each printing
side.
2501 [Thick1: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper.

Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
2-501-001 SepaDC:MidSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /

step]
2-501-002 SepaDC:MidSpd:2nd *ENG
2502 [Thick 1: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in
2-502-001 PTr:MidSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 15 / 1 – A /step]
2-502-002 PTr:MidSpd:2nd *ENG Not used
2-502-003 PTr:LowSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 9 / 1 – A /step]
2-502-004 PTr:LowSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
2507 [Thick 1: Bias: FC]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color
mode.
2-507-002 PTr:MidSpd:2nd *ENG Not used
SM 4-81 M0AC/M257
2511 [Thick1: SzCor: BW] DFU

Thick 1: Size Correction: BW Printing
Adjusts the size correction coefficient of the thick 1 paper for the paper
Mid: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85 mm/sec
2-511-001 PTr:Mid:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]

2-511-002 PTr:Mid:2Sid: S1 *ENG
2-511-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]

2-511-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
M0AC/M257 4-82 SM
Maintenance
165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




2512 [Thick1: SzCor: FC] DFU

Thick 1: Size Correction: FC Printing

2-512-002 PTr:Mid:2Sid:S1 *ENG
2-512-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-512-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-83 M0AC/M257

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




M0AC/M257 4-84 SM
Maintenance
2513 [Thick1:SzEvCor:BW] DFU
Reference
System
Thick 1: Size Environment Correction: BW Printing
Adjusts the size correction coefficient table of the thick 1 paper for the
2-513-001 PTr:Mid:1Sid:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1/step]


2-513-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1/step]



194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-85 M0AC/M257

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




2514 [Thick1:SzEvCor:FC] DFU

Thick 1: Size Environment Correction: FC Printing





194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
M0AC/M257 4-86 SM
Maintenance
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)




SM 4-87 M0AC/M257
2521 [Thick1:LE Correct] DFU

Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction of the thick 1 paper to the paper transfer roller
current or discharge plate DC at the paper leading edge in each mode.
SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values.
2-521-001 PTr:Mid:1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-521-002 PTr:Mid:2 *ENG
2-521-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-521-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2-521-005 SepaDC:Mid:1st *ENG
2-521-006 SepaDC:Mid:2nd *ENG
2522 [Thick1:SW Tmng:LE] DFU
and the image area.
2-522-001 PTr:Mid:1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2-522-002 PTr:Mid:2nd *ENG
2-522-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-522-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-88 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
2523 [Thick1:TE Correct] DFU
Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the
paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by
these SP values.
2-523-002 PTr:Mid:2 *ENG
2-523-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-523-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2524 [Thick1:SW Tmng:TE] DFU

image area.
2-524-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-524-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
SM 4-89 M0AC/M257
2530 [Thick1: EnvCor] DFU
2-530-013 SepaDC:Mid:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

coefficient table of the thick 1
2-530-015 SepaDC:Low:1st *ENG paper for the discharge plate DC
[Thick1:Ed-Env.Cor] DFU

each printing side.
2551 [Thick2: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper.
2-551-003 SepaDC:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V/step]
2-551-004 SepaDC:2nd *ENG
2553 [Thick 2: Bias: BW] DFU
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in
2-553-001 PTr:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 9 / 1 – A /step]
2-553-002 PTr:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
M0AC/M257 4-90 SM
2558 [Thick 2: Bias: FC] DFU
Maintenance
Reference
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick2 paper in full color
System
mode.
2561 [Thick2: SzCor: BW]
2-561-003 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]

2-561-004 PTr:2:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]

2-561-007 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5% /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-561-008 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5% /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-561-011 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5% /step]

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
2-561-012 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5% /step]

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
2-561-015 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5% /step]

2-561-016 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5% /step]

SM 4-91 M0AC/M257
2562 [Thick2: SzCor: FC]
2-562-003 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]

2-562-004 PTr:2:S1 *ENG
2-562-007 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5% /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-562-008 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5% /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-562-011 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5% /step]

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
2-562-012 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5% /step]

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)
2-562-015 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5% /step]

2-562-016 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5% /step]

2-563-003 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1 /step]

2-563-004 PTr:2:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

M0AC/M257 4-92 SM
2-563-007 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)
2-563-008 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-563-011 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1 /step]

width)
2-563-012 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

width)
2-563-015 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 18 / 1 /step]

2-563-016 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

2-564-003 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step]

2-564-004 PTr:2:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1 /step]

2-564-007 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-564-008 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-93 M0AC/M257
2-564-011 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step]

width)
2-564-012 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1 /step]

width)
2-564-015 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 13 / 1 /step]

2-564-016 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 38 / 1 /step]


2-571-001 PTr: 1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-571-002 PTr: 2nd *ENG
2-571-003 SepaDC:1st *ENG
and the image area.
2-572-001 PTr : 1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step]
2-572-002 PTr : 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-94 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
DC for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2553 and SP2558 are
2-573-001 PTr: 1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-573-002 PTr: 2nd *ENG

image area.
2-574-001 PTr : 1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2-574-002 PTr : 2nd *ENG
2-580-015 SepaDC:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

*ENG
2-580-016 SepaDC:2nd paper for the discharge plate DC
[Thick2:Ed-Env.Cor] DFU
SM 4-95 M0AC/M257
*ENG Adjusts the size correction

2-580-020 SepaDC:2nd paper for the discharge plate DC
each printing side.
2601 [OHP: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP.
2-601-001 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step]
2603 [OHP: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white
mode.
2-603-001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 230 / 8 / 1 – A /step]
2608 [OHP: Bias: FC]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
2-608-001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 230 / 21 / 1 – A /step]
2611 [OHP: SzCor: BW]

OHP: Size Correction: BW Printing
Adjusts the size correction coefficient of the OHP paper for the paper
2-611-003 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]


194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
M0AC/M257 4-96 SM
Maintenance
165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

2612 [OHP: SzCor: FC]

OHP: Size Correction: FC Printing


194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

2613 [OHP:Sz-Env.Cor:BW] DFU

OHP: Size Environment Correction: BW Printing
2-613-003 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 15 / 1 /step]


194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-97 M0AC/M257

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

2614 [OHP:Sz-Env.Cor:FC] DFU

OHP: Size Environment Correction: FC Printing


194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

165 mm > S3 size ≥ 139 mm
(Paper width)

2621 [OHP:LE Correct] DFU

OHP: Leading Edge Correction
2-621-001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-621-002 Separation DC *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-98 SM
2622 [OHP:SW Tmng:LE] DFU
Maintenance
Reference
System
and the image area.
2-622-001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2623 [OHP:TE Correct] DFU

OHP: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current or or discharge

plate DC for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2603 and SP2608
are multiplied by these SP values.
2-623-001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2624 [OHP:SW Tmng:TE] DFU

image area.
2-624-001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2630 [OHP: EnvCor] DFU
2-630-015 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the size correction coefficient
table of the OHP paper for the
discharge plate DC.
SM 4-99 M0AC/M257
[OHP: Edge-EnvCor] DFU
2-630-019 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the size correction coefficient
table of the OHP paper for the
discharge plate DC (leading and
traiing edges).
2647 [Thick3: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 3.
2-647-001 SepaDC:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step]
2648 [Thick3: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in
2649 [Thick3: Bias: FC]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color
mode.
2650 [Thick3: SzCor: BW]
values.
2-650-001 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
M0AC/M257 4-100 SM
2-650-002 PTr:2:S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width)
Maintenance
Reference
2-650-003 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]
System
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-650-004 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-650-005 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]

width)
2-650-006 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step]

width)
2-650-007 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step]

2-650-008 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step]

2651 [Thick3: SzCor: FC]
2-651-001 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]

2-651-002 PTr:2:S1 *ENG
2-651-003 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-651-004 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 160 / 5%/step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-651-005 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]

width)
SM 4-101 M0AC/M257
2-651-006 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [100 to 995 / 270 / 5%/step]

width)
2-651-007 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 200 / 5%/step]

2-651-008 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [100 to 995 / 435 / 5%/step]

SP values.
2-652-001 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

2-652-002 PTr:2:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

2-652-003 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-652-004 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-652-005 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

width)
2-652-006 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

width)
2-652-007 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

2-652-008 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 22 / 1 /step]

M0AC/M257 4-102 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
SP values.
2-653-001 PTr:1:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

2-653-002 PTr:2:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1 /step]

2-653-003 PTr:1:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-653-004 PTr:2:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1 /step]

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
2-653-005 PTr:1:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

width)
2-653-006 PTr:2:S3 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1 /step]

width)
2-653-007 PTr:1:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 24 / 1 /step]

2-653-008 PTr:2:S4 *ENG [1 to 100 / 27 / 1 /step]


SP values.
SM 4-103 M0AC/M257
2-654-001 PTr: 1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-654-002 PTr: 2nd *ENG
and the image area.
2-655-002 PTr : 2nd *ENG

Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper
trailing edge in each mode. SP2648 and SP2649 are multiplied by these
SP values.
2-656-001 PTr: 1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-656-002 PTr: 2nd *ENG

image area.
M0AC/M257 4-104 SM
Maintenance
Reference
2-657-002 PTr : 2nd *ENG
System

Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment

2-660-016 *ENG
coefficient table of the thick 3 paper
SepaDC:2nd for the discharge plate DC for each
printing side.
[TThick3:Ed-Env.Cor] DFU

2-660-020 *ENG
coefficient table of the thick 3 paper
SepaDC:2nd for the discharge plate DC (leading

and traiing edges) for each printing
side.
2701 [MThick: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for middle thick paper.
2-701-001 SepaDC:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step]
2703 [MThick:Bias:BW]
Standard: 260mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in
SM 4-105 M0AC/M257
2-703-001 PTr:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 20 / 1- A /step]
2-703-002 PTr:StdSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1- A /step]
2-703-003 PTr:LowSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 10 / 1- A /step]
2-703-004 PTr:LowSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 12 / 1- A /step]
2707 [MThick:Bias:FC]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for middle thick in full color
mode.
2-707-001 PTr:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 35 / 1- A /step]
2-707-002 PTr:StdSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 25 / 1- A /step]
2-707-003 PTr:LowSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 12/ 1- A /step]
2-707-004 PTr:LowSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 14 / 1- A /step]
2713 [MThick: SzCor: BW] DFU
2-713-001 PTr:Std:1Sid:S1 *ENG [100 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]

2-713-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-713-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

width)

width)
M0AC/M257 4-106 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)




2714 [MThick: SzCor: FC] DFU
SM 4-107 M0AC/M257
2-714-002 PTr:Std:2Sid:S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width)
2-714-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-714-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)


M0AC/M257 4-108 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
2715 [MThick:SzEvCor:BW] DFU





width)

width)

width)

width)

width)
SM 4-109 M0AC/M257

width)

width)

width)




2716 [MThick:SzEvCor:FC] DFU
values.




M0AC/M257 4-110 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)




SM 4-111 M0AC/M257
2721 [MThick:LE Correct] DFU

SP values.
2-721-001 PTr:Std:1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]
2-721-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-721-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-721-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2722 [MThick:SW Tmng:LE] DFU

and the image area.
2-722-001 PTr:Std:1 *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm /step]
2-722-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-722-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-722-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-112 SM
Maintenance
2723 [MThick:TE Correct] DFU
Reference
System
SP values.
2-723-001 PTr:Std:1 *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5% /step]
2-723-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-723-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-723-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2724 [MThick:SW Tmng:TE] DFU


image area.
2-724-001 PTr:Std:1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm /step]
2-724-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-724-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
SM 4-113 M0AC/M257
2730 [MThick: EnvCor] DFU


coefficient table of the middle thick
2-730-015 SepaDC:Low:1st *ENG paper for the discharge plate DC for
each printing side.
[MThick:Ed-Env.Cor] DFU

coefficient table of the middle thick
(leading and traiing edges) for each
printing side.
2751 [Special 1: Bias]
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 1.

2-751-001 SepaDC:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step]
2753 [SP 1: Bias: BW]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in
2-753-001 PTr:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 20 / 1 – A /step]
2-753-002 PTr:StdSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 18 / 1 – A /step]
M0AC/M257 4-114 SM
Maintenance
Reference
2-753-004 PTr:LowSpd:2nd *ENG
System
[0 to 230 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
2757 [SP 1: Bias: FC]
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full
color mode.
2-757-001 PTr:StdSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 230 / 35 / 1 – A /step]
2-757-002 PTr:StdSpd:2nd *ENG [0 to 230 / 25 / 1 – A /step]
2761 [SP 1: SzCor: BW] DFU

2-761-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-761-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-115 M0AC/M257

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)

width)

width)




2762 [SP 1: SzCor: FC] DFU

2-762-002 PTr:Std:2Sid:S1 *ENG
2-762-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-116 SM
2-762-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
System
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)

width)

width)



SM 4-117 M0AC/M257

2763 [SP 1:SzEvCor:BW] DFU
SP values.





194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)
M0AC/M257 4-118 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
width)

width)

width)




2764 [SP 1:SzEvCor:FC] DFU
SP values.




SM 4-119 M0AC/M257

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)

width)

width)




M0AC/M257 4-120 SM
2771 [SP 1:LE Correct] DFU
Maintenance
Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Reference
System
SP values.
2-771-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-771-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-771-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2772 [SP 1:SW Tmng:LE] DFU
and the image area.
2-772-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-772-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
SM 4-121 M0AC/M257
2773 [SP 1:TE Correct] DFU

Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
SP values.
2-773-002 PTr:Std:2 *ENG
2-773-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-773-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
2774 [SP 1:SW Tmng:TE] DFU

image area.
2-774-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-774-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-122 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
2780 [SP 1: EnvCor] DFU


coefficient table of the special 1
each printing side.
[SP 1:Ed-Env.Cor] DFU

printing side.

2-801-001 SepaDC:MidSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V /step]
2-801-002 SepaDC:MidSpd:2nd *ENG
2803 [SP 2: Bias: BW]
SM 4-123 M0AC/M257
2-803-002 PTr:MidSpd:2nd *ENG
2807 [SP2: Bias: FC]
color mode.
2-807-002 PTr:MidSpd:2nd *ENG
Middle: 182 mm/sec, Low: 85mm/sec

2-811-002 PTr:Mid:2Sid: S1 *ENG
2-811-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-811-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

width)

width)
M0AC/M257 4-124 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)




SM 4-125 M0AC/M257
2-812-002 PTr:Mid:2Sid:S1 *ENG S1 size ≥ 194 mm (Paper width)
2-812-003 PTr:Low:1:S1 *ENG
2-812-004 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG
2-812-005 PTr:Mid:1Sid:S2 *ENG [100 to 995 / 150 / 5%/step]]

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)


M0AC/M257 4-126 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
2-813-001 PTr:Mid:1Sid:S1 *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1 /step]





width)

width)

width)

width)

width)
SM 4-127 M0AC/M257

width)

width)

width)








M0AC/M257 4-128 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)

width)




SM 4-129 M0AC/M257

SP values.
2-821-002 PTr:Mid:2 *ENG
2-821-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-821-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
and the image area.
2-822-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-822-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-130 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
SP values.
2-823-002 PTr:Mid:2 *ENG
2-823-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG
2-823-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG

image area.
2-824-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG
2-824-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
SM 4-131 M0AC/M257


each printing side.

printing side.

Low: 85 mm/sec
2-851-003 SepaDC:LowSpd:1st *ENG [0 to 6000 / 2000 / 10 -V/step]
2852 [SP3: Bias: BW]
Low: 85 mm/sec
M0AC/M257 4-132 SM
Maintenance
2857 [Special 3: Bias: FC]
Reference
System
color mode.
Low: 85 mm/sec
Low: 85mm/sec

2-861-002 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)


SM 4-133 M0AC/M257
Low: 85mm/sec

2-862-002 PTr:Low:2:S1 *ENG

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)


Low: 85mm/sec


M0AC/M257 4-134 SM
Maintenance
194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
Reference
System
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

width)

width)


Low: 85mm/sec



194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)

194 mm > S2 size ≥ 165 mm
(Paper width)
SM 4-135 M0AC/M257

width)

width)



SP values.
Low: 85 mm/sec
2-871-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-871-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG
Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge
plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the
image area.
Low: 85 mm/sec
2-872-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2-872-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-136 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
trailing edge in each mode. SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP
values.
Low: 85 mm/sec
2-873-003 PTr: Low: 1st *ENG [0 to 995 / 100 / 5%/step]
2-873-004 PTr: Low: 2nd *ENG

image area.
Low: 85 mm/sec
2-874-003 PTr: Low : 1st *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2-874-004 PTr: Low : 2nd *ENG

Low: 85 mm/sec
2-880-015 SepaDC:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]
SM 4-137 M0AC/M257
2-880-016 SepaDC:Low:2nd *ENG Adjusts the size correction

paper for the discharge plate DC for
each printing side.
2-880-019 SepaDC:Low:1st *ENG [1 to 100 / 30 / 1 /step]

2-880-020 *ENG
SepaDC:Low:2nd paper for the discharge plate DC

printing side.
2904 [Reverse Time] DFU
Adjusts the time for how long the image transfer belt motor reverses after
job end.
2-904-003 Transfer All *ENG [0 to 800 / 70 / 10 msec/step]
2906 [Drum] DFU
2-906-001 Y Phase Angle *ENG [0 to 359 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
2-906-002 M Phase Angle *ENG
2-906-003 C Phase Angle *ENG
2-906-004 K Phase Angle *ENG
2-906-005 Color Phase Angle *ENG
2-906-006 Y AmpSetting *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]
2-906-007 M AmpSetting *ENG
2-906-008 C AmpSetting *ENG
2-906-009 K AmpSetting *ENG
2-906-010 Color AmpSetting *ENG
2-906-011 K Stop Position *ENG [0 to 359 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
M0AC/M257 4-138 SM
2-906-012 Color Stop Posi *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
System
2907 [FC: ACS] DFU
Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the
color PCUs. This SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color
PCUs when the number of B/W image printouts reaches the number of
sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in
the full color mode.
If this SP is set to "0", the image transfer belt does not move away.
2-907-001 Bk Image Count *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
2911 [Offset Phase] DFU
2-911-001 Y Drum *ENG [0 to 359 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
2-911-002 M Drum *ENG
2-911-003 C Drum *ENG
2-911-004 K Drum *ENG
2912 [Offset Gain] DFU
2-912-001 Y Drum *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]
2-912-002 M Drum *ENG
2-912-003 C Drum *ENG
2-912-004 K Drum *ENG
2914 [Shutter] DFU
2-914-008 Open:DelayTime *ENG [0 to 500 / 240 / 10 msec/step]
2-914-009 Close:DelayTime *ENG [0 to 500 / 370 / 10 msec/step]
2-914-010 Open:AdjDelayTime *ENG [0 to 500 / 100 / 10 msec/step]
2-914-011 Cl:AdjDelayTime *ENG [0 to 500 / 180 / 10 msec/step]
SM 4-139 M0AC/M257
2-914-014 Open/Close:Skip *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2960 [Process Interval] DFU
2-960-001 Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 1 / 1 sec/step]
M0AC/M257 4-140 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.5.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
3011 [ProCon ManualExe.]
3-011-001 Normal ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

Executes the normal process control
manually (potential control).
Check the result with SP3-325-001 after
executing this SP.
3-011-002 Density Adj ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]

Executes the toner density adjustment
manually. Check the result with
SP3-325-001 after executing this SP.
3-011-003 Pre-ACC ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]

Executes the process control that is
normally done before ACC.
The type of process control is selected
with SP3-041-004.
3-011-004 Full MUSIC ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]

normally done at the same time as
MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC (line
position adjustment) twice.
3-011-005 Normal MUSIC ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step ]

normally done at the same time as
MUSIC. This SP does the MUSIC (line
position adjustment) once.
SM 4-141 M0AC/M257
3012 [ProCon Chck Rslt] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order "Y C M K"
e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the
others were successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the Process Control Error section for
details.
3-012-001 History: Latest *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
3-012-002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG
3013 [TD Sn Initial Set] Developer Initialization Setting
3-013-001 Execution: ALL ENG Executes the initialization of the TD

sensor for each color.
3-013-002 Execution: COL ENG
3-013-003 Execution: Bk ENG
3-013-004 Execution: C ENG
3-013-005 Execution: M ENG
3-013-006 Execution: Y ENG
3015 [ForcdTonSuply:Exe] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
M0AC/M257 4-142 SM
3-015-001 Execution: ALL ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
Executes the manual toner supply to
Reference
3-015-002 Execution: COL ENG
System
the development unit.
3-015-003 Execution: Bk ENG
3-015-004 Execution: C ENG
3-015-005 Execution: M ENG
3-015-006 Execution: Y ENG
3016 [ForcdTonSuply:Set] Forced Toner Supply Setting ([Color])
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
3-016-001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG [0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
3-016-002 Supply Time: C *ENG
3-016-003 Supply Time: M *ENG
3-016-004 Supply Time: Y *ENG
3041 [Pro Con Type]
3-041-001 Voltage Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the
charge DC bias and development DC bias
set with SP2-005 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables the process control.
3-041-002 LD Power Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
1: CONTROL (adjusted by process
control)
Selects the LD power control mode.
3-041-003 AtCtrl PrhbtSet *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
DFU
SM 4-143 M0AC/M257
3-041-004 Pre-ACC Proc Ctrl *ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]

0: Not Execute
1: Process Control
2: TC Control
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
3-041-005 Pat Calc Method *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

0: FIXED
1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
3043 [TD Adjust Mode]
3-043-001 Rept Nmbr:PowerON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment

at power on.
0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,
4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too
low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled
3-043-002 Rept Nmbr:Initial *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

at the developer initialization.
6 to 9: Disabled
3-043-003 Rept Nmbr:Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
M0AC/M257 4-144 SM
Maintenance
in stand by mode.
Reference
System
6 to 9: Disabled
3-043-004 Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

at ACC.
6 to 9: Disabled
3-043-005 Rept Nmbr:Recvry *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Not used
3-043-006 Rept Nmbr:Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]

at job end.
6 to 9: Disabled
3-043-007 Rept Nmbr:Intrrpt *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

during printing. DFU
3-043-018 CPttrn:LD:DUTY:Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
SM 4-145 M0AC/M257
Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density
adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected
development gamma values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values
(SP3611-005) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
3-043-019 CPttrn:LD:DUTY:C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
adjustment.
3-043-020 CPttrn:LD:DUTY:M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
adjustment.
3-043-021 CPttrn:LD:DUTY:Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
adjustment.
3044 [Toner Supply Type] Toner Supply Type ([Color])
Selects the toner supply method type.
3-044-001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored
3-044-002 C *ENG
with SP 3401)
3-044-003 M *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
3-044-004 Y *ENG
3: MBD (Vtref_Fixed)
4: MBD (Vtref_Control)
M0AC/M257 4-146 SM
3045 [TnrEnd Detect:Set]
Maintenance
Reference
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
System
3-045-001 ON/OFF *ENG DFU
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
3101 [Toner End/Near End]
Displays the amount of each color toner. DFU
3-101-001 Toner Replen.:Bk *ENG [1 to 600 / 360 / 1 g/step]
3-101-002 Toner Replen.:C *ENG
3-101-003 Toner Replen.:M *ENG
3-101-004 Toner Replen.:Y *ENG
005-008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner.
3-101-005 Toner Consum.:Bk *ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
3-101-006 Toner Consum.:C *ENG
3-101-007 Toner Consum.:M *ENG
3-101-008 Toner Consum.:Y *ENG
009-012 Displays the remaining amount of each color toner. These are calculated
by the operating times of the toner supply pumps.
3-101-009 Toner Remain.:Bk *ENG [–50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
3-101-010 Toner Remain.:C *ENG
3-101-011 Toner Remain.:M *ENG
3-101-012 Toner Remain.:Y *ENG
013-016 Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color. The toner near end
message appears on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches
this threshold. When one of these SPs (SP3-101-009 to 012 or -032 to
-035) reaches this threshold, toner near end is detected.
3-101-013 Near End Thresh: Bk *ENG [0 to 600 / 45 / 1 g/step]
SM 4-147 M0AC/M257
3-101-014 Near End Thresh: C *ENG
3-101-015 Near End Thresh: M *ENG
3-101-016 Near End Thresh: Y *ENG
032-035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color, using pixel count.
3-101-032 Pixel:Remain.:Bk *ENG [-50000 to 600 / 0 / 0.001 g/step]
3-101-033 Pixel:Remain.:C *ENG
3-101-034 Pixel:Remain.:M *ENG
3-101-035 Pixel:Remaining:Y *ENG
3102 [Ton End/Recvry] Not used
Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when
the TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
3-102-001 Repeat: Bk *ENG [1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]
3-102-002 Repeat: C *ENG
3-102-003 Repeat: M *ENG
3-102-004 Repeat: Y *ENG
3201 [TD Sn :Vt Disp]
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
3-201-001 Current: Bk *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]
3-201-002 Current: C *ENG
3-201-003 Current: M *ENG
3-201-004 Current: Y *ENG
3221 [Vtcnt: Display/Set]
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
3-221-001 260 Current: Bk *ENG [2.45 to 5 / 3.7 / 0.01 V/step]
M0AC/M257 4-148 SM
3-221-002 260 Current: C *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
3-221-003 260 Current: M *ENG
System
3-221-004 260 Current: Y *ENG
3-221-009 182 Current: Bk *ENG [2.45 to 5 / 3.5 / 0.01 V/step]
3-221-010 182 Current: C *ENG
3-221-011 182 Current: M *ENG
3-221-012 182 Current: Y *ENG
3222 [Vtref:Display/Set]
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
3-222-001 Current: Bk *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
3-222-002 Current: C *ENG
3-222-003 Current: M *ENG
3-222-004 Current: Y *ENG
3239 [Vtref Correct:Set]
Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
3-239-015 Correct Value Coef *ENG [1 to 9.99 / 2.5 / 0.01 /step]
3242 [LD Power Setting]
Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.
3-242-001 StdSpd:Coef: Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 152 / 1 /step]
3-242-002 StdSpd:Coef: C *ENG
3-242-003 StdSpd:Coef: M *ENG
3-242-004 StdSpd:Coef: Y *ENG
3-242-005 StdSpd:Offset: Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 7 / 1 /step]
SM 4-149 M0AC/M257
3-242-006 StdSpd:Offset: C *ENG
3-242-007 StdSpd:Offset: M *ENG
3-242-008 StdSpd:Offset: Y *ENG
3-242-009 MidSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 141 / 1 /step]
3-242-010 MidSpd:Coef:C *ENG
3-242-011 MidSpd:Coef:M *ENG
3-242-012 MidSpd:Coef:Y *ENG
3-242-013 MidSpd:Offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 13 / 1 /step]
3-242-014 MidSpd:Offset:C *ENG
3-242-015 MidSpd:Offset:M *ENG
3-242-016 MidSpd:Offset:Y *ENG
3-242-017 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 123 / 1 /step]
3-242-018 LowSpd:Coef:C *ENG
3-242-019 LowSpd:Coef:M *ENG
3-242-020 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG
3-242-021 LowSpd:Offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 16 / 1 /step]
3-242-022 LowSpd:Offset:C *ENG
3-242-023 LowSpd:Offset:M *ENG
3-242-024 LowSpd:Offset:Y *ENG
3251 [Coverage]
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
3-251-001 Latest: Pixcel Bk ENG Displays the latest coverage for each
color.
3-251-002 Latest: Pixcel C ENG
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 cm 2/step]
3-251-003 Latest: Pixcel M ENG
3-251-004 Latest: Pixcel Y ENG
M0AC/M257 4-150 SM
005-008 Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
Maintenance
"Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
Reference
System
reach the number specified with SP3251-017.
3-251-005 Average S: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01%/step]
3-251-006 Average S: C *ENG
3-251-007 Average S: M *ENG
3-251-008 Average S: Y *ENG
"Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
reach the number specified with SP3251-018.
3-251-009 Average M: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01%/step]
3-251-010 Average M: C *ENG
3-251-011 Average M: M *ENG
3-251-012 Average M: Y *ENG
"Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
reach the number specified with SP3-251-019.
3-251-013 Average L: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01%/step]
3-251-014 Average L: C *ENG
3-251-015 Average L: M *ENG
3-251-016 Average L: Y *ENG
017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016.
3-251-017 Total Page Set:S *ENG [1 to 100 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
3-251-018 Total Page Set:M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
3-251-019 Total Page Set:L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
020-022 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-024 to -027.
3-251-020 Total Page Set:S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]
3-251-021 Total Page Set:M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
SM 4-151 M0AC/M257
3-251-022 Total Page Set:L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
3-251-024 LatestCoverage:Bk ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.01%/step]
3-251-025 Latest Coverage:C ENG
3-251-026 Latest Coverage:M ENG
3-251-027 Latest Coverage:Y ENG
3311 [IDSn Detect Value]
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
3-311-001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
3-311-002 Voffset reg: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
3-311-003 Voffset reg: M *ENG
3-311-004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
3-311-005 Voffset dif: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
3-311-006 Voffset dif: M *ENG
3-311-007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
3-311-008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
3-311-009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG
3-311-010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [Vsg Adjust: Exe.]
3-321-010 P/TM Sensor All ENG Execute the ID sensor initialization

setting for all sensors
3322 [Vsg Adj. Rslt:Vsg]
M0AC/M257 4-152 SM
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
Maintenance
Reference
3-322-001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
System
3-322-002 Vsg reg: C *ENG
3-322-003 Vsg reg: M *ENG
3-322-004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG
3-322-005 Vsg dif: C *ENG
3-322-006 Vsg dif: M *ENG
3-322-007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
3-322-008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
3-322-009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
3-322-010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
3325 [Vsg Adjust Result]
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front,
sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta,
sensor for Yellow and sensor for Rear).
3-325-001 Latest *ENG [111 to 9999 / 9999 / 1 /step]

9: Unexpected error
3-325-002 Latest 1 *ENG
3: Offset voltage error
3-325-003 Latest 2 *ENG 2: Vsg adjustment value error
1: O.K
3-325-004 Latest 3 *ENG
3-325-005 Latest 4 *ENG
3-325-006 Latest 5 *ENG
3-325-007 Latest 6 *ENG
3-325-008 Latest 7 *ENG
3-325-009 Latest 8 *ENG
3-325-010 Latest 9 *ENG
SM 4-153 M0AC/M257
3363 [IDPatTimSet] DFU
3-363-004 MUSIC Delay Time *ENG Adjusts the processing timing for the
pattern that is used for the line position
adjustment.
[-2500 to 2500 / 300 / 1 msec/step]
3401 [Fixed Supply Mode]
Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.
3-401-001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step]

These SPs are used only when
3-401-002 Fixed Rate: C *ENG
SP3-044 is set to "0".
3-401-003 Fixed Rate: M *ENG
3-401-004 Fixed Rate: Y *ENG
3411 [TnrSpplyRate:Dspl]
Displays the current toner supply rate.
3-411-001 Latest: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
3-411-002 Latest: C *ENG
3-411-003 Latest: M *ENG
3-411-004 Latest: Y *ENG
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
3-421-001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
3-421-002 Upper Limit: C *ENG
[0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
3-421-003 Upper Limit: M *ENG
3-421-004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
3-421-005 Min.SupplyTime:Bk *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply time.

[0 to 1000 / 200 / 1 msec/step]
3-421-006 Min.SupplyTime:C *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-154 SM
3-421-007 Min.SupplyTime:M *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
3-421-008 Min.SupplyTime:Y *ENG
System
3453 [Toner Supply:Set]
Adjusts the toner supply time.
3-453-001 MtContMaxDrTime *ENG [0 to 10000 / 800 / 1 msec/step]
3-453-002 MtBreakTime *ENG [0 to 10000 / 200 / 1 msec/step]
3501 [ProCon Target M/A]
Adjusts the target M/A of the full coverage in single color printer mode.
3-501-001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.482 / 0.001 mg/cm 2/step]
3-501-002 Maximum M/A: C *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
3-501-003 Maximum M/A: M *ENG
3-501-004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
3510 [ImgAdj.Cuntr:Dspl]
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
3-510-001 Pro.Control:BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
3-510-002 Pro.Control:FC *ENG
3-510-003 Power ON: BW *ENG
3-510-004 Power ON: FC *ENG
3-510-005 MUSIC: BW *ENG
3-510-006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
3-510-007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
3-510-008 Charge AC Control *ENG
3-510-009 MUSIC:Power ON:BW *ENG
SM 4-155 M0AC/M257
3-510-010 MUSIC:Power ON:FC *ENG
3511 [Exe.Interval:Set]
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
3-511-001 Job End:ProCon:BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
3-511-002 Job End:ProCon:FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 85 / 1 page/step]
3-511-003 Intrrpt:ProCon:BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
3-511-004 Intrrpt:ProCon:FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
3-511-005 Initial:ProCon:BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
3-511-006 Initial:ProCon:FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
3-511-007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
3-511-008 ChrgAC Ctrl Count *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
3-511-019 Env.Crrct:ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: Not Correct (OFF),
3-511-020 Gamma Correction *ENG
1: Correct (ON)
3-511-021 NoUseT Cor:ON/OFF *ENG
3-511-022 Cor. Coef.1:JE:BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01/step]
3-511-023 Cor. Coef.2:JE:BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
3-511-024 Cor. Coef.1:JE:FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.59 / 0.01/step]
3-511-025 Cor. Coef.2:JE:FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
3-511-026 CorCoef1:Intpt:BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
3-511-027 CorCoef2:Intpt:BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
3-511-028 CorCoef1:Intpt:FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]
3-511-029 CorCoef2:Intpt:FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
3-511-030 MaxNmbrCor.Thresh *ENG [0 to 99 / 5 / 1/step]
3-511-031 MaxNmbrCor. Count *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
M0AC/M257 4-156 SM
3512 [Image Adj.: Interval]
Maintenance
Reference
Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position
System
adjustment during printing.
3-512-001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 page/step]
3-512-002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
3513 [PCU M StopTime:Bk]
Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped.

These are used for process control execution timing.
3-513-001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step]
3-513-002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / 1 / 1/step]
3-513-003 Day *ENG [1 to 31 / 1 / 1/step]
3-513-004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
3-513-005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / 0 / 1/step]
3514 [Env Disp:Job End]
Displays the environmental conditions at the last job.

These are used for process control execution timing.
3-514-001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / 0 / 0.1°C/step]
3-514-002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
3-514-003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/cm 3/step]
3515 [Exec Intvl:Disp]
Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a
number of conditions. These are the results after considering all the
conditions.
3-515-001 Job End:ProCon:BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
3-515-002 Job End:ProCon:FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
SM 4-157 M0AC/M257
3-515-003 Intrrpt:ProCon:BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
3-515-004 Intrrpt:ProCon:FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
3516 [Refresh Mode] DFU
While making prints with low coverage, the developer is agitated with less
toner consumption and the toner carrier attraction tends to increase. This
may cause low image density or poor transfer (white dots). To prevent this,
the coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be consumed by
performing the refresh mode.
3-516-001 Dev.MRotatDspl:Bk *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 0.1 m/step]
3-516-002 Dev.MRotatDspl:C *ENG
3-516-003 Dev.MRotatDspl:M *ENG
3-516-004 Dev.MRotatDspl:Y *ENG
3-516-005 Rotation Thresh *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0.1 / 1 m/step]
3-516-006 Pixel Cvrg Sum:Bk *ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 cm 2/step]
3-516-007 Pixel Cvrg Sum:C *ENG
3-516-008 Pixel Cvrg Sum:M *ENG
3-516-009 Pixel Cvrg Sum:Y *ENG
3-516-010 Required Area: Bk *ENG
3-516-011 Required Area: C *ENG
3-516-012 Required Area: M *ENG
3-516-013 Required Area: Y *ENG
3-516-014 Reflesh Thresh:Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 35 / 1 cm 2/m/step]
3-516-015 Reflesh Thresh:C *ENG [0 to 255 / 18 / 1 cm 2/m/step]
3-516-016 Reflesh Thresh:M *ENG
3-516-017 Reflesh Thresh:Y *ENG
3-516-018 Pattern Number:Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 time/step]
M0AC/M257 4-158 SM
3-516-019 Pattern Number:C *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
3-516-020 Pattern Number:M *ENG
System
3-516-021 Pattern Number:Y *ENG
3-516-022 PttrnNmbr:ULimit *ENG [0 to 255 / 16 / 1 time/step]
3-516-023 TnrConsumPtrnArea *ENG [10 to 2550 / 130 / 10 cm 2/step]
3-516-024 Supply Coeff. *ENG [0 to 2.55 / 0.8 / 0.01/step]
3-516-025 JobEnd:Area Coef. *ENG [0.1 to 25.5 / 1 / 0.1/step]
3-516-026 JobEnd:Vb Coeff. *ENG [0 to 100 / 40 / 1%/step]
3-516-027 Job End Length *ENG [0 to 56 / 28 / 1mm/step]
3-516-028 Job End Supply *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.45 / 0.001 mg/cm 2/step]
3-516-029 TnCnmp:IntvlThsh *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
3-516-030 TnCnmp:Couter:Bk *ENG
3-516-031 TnCnmp:Couter:FC *ENG
3-516-032 TnCnmp:IntvlThsh2 *ENG [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 page/step]
3518 [ImgAdj. Exe. Flag] DFU
3-518-008 MUSIC *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
3-518-009 Drum Phase Adj. *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OFF. 1: ON
3520 [TrunsferIdleTime] DFU
3-520-001 Temperature:H *ENG Specifies the idle rotation times of the

ITB after the process control.
3-520-002 Temperature:M *ENG
[0 or 3 / 1.9 / 1 revolution/step]
3-520-003 Temperature:L *ENG
3-520-004 Temperature:L:ON *ENG
005 to Adjusts the threshold temperature for entering the ITB idle rotation after the
006 process control.
SM 4-159 M0AC/M257
3-520-005 TempRangeThrsh:T2 *ENG [20 or 30 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
3-520-006 TempRangeThrsh:T1 *ENG [0 or 15 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
3522 [Intl ProCon Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these
SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the
process control at power on is executed.
3-522-002 No-Use Time Set *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]
3-522-003 Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
3-522-004 RHumidity Change *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
3-522-005 AHumidity Change *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m 3/step]
3531 [No-use ProCon Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these
SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the
process control at stand-by is executed.
3-531-001 No-Use Time Set *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]
3-531-002 Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1 deg/step]
3-531-003 RHumidity Change *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
3-531-004 AHumidity Change *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m 3/step]
3-531-005 Max. Exe. Number *ENG Adjusts the maximum execution time
for the process control at stand-by.
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611 [DevGamma:Dspl/Set]
3-611-001 Bk (Current) *ENG Displays the current development gamma

for Bk
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
M0AC/M257 4-160 SM
3-611-002 C (Current) *ENG Displays the current development gamma
Maintenance
for C/M/Y.
Reference
3-611-003 M (Current) *ENG
System
[0 to 5 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
3-611-004 Y (Current) *ENG
3-611-005 Bk(TargetDisplay) *ENG Displays the target development gamma

for Bk.
[0 to 5 / 0.85 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
3-611-006 C (TargetDisplay) *ENG Displays the target development gamma

for C/M/Y.
[0 to 5 / 0.85 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
3-611-007 M (TargetDisplay) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm 2/kV /step]
3-611-008 Y (TargetDisplay) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.77 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
3800 [Toner Collection Bttl Full]
3-800-001 Full Detect Date *ENG Displays the date of the near full
detection for the wate toner bottle.
3902 [Man. New Unit Set]
Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
3-902-001 Deve. Unit:Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON
3-902-002 Deve. Unit:C *ENG
3-902-003 Deve. Unit:M *ENG
3-902-004 Deve. Unit:Y *ENG
3-902-009 PCU: Bk *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON
3-902-010 PCU: C *ENG
3-902-011 PCU: M *ENG
3-902-012 PCU: Y *ENG
3-902-013 ITB Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON
3-902-014 Fusing Unit *ENG
SM 4-161 M0AC/M257
3-902-015 Fusing Roller *ENG Do not use 3902-013 if you only change
the cleaning unit.
3-902-016 Fusing Belt *ENG
3902-015: This is for the image transfer
3-902-017 ITB Cleaning Unit *ENG belt cleaning unit.
3-902-018 PTR Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: OFF, 1: ON
3-902-020 ITB TCollect Bttl *ENG
M0AC/M257 4-162 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
There are no Group 4 SP modes for this machine.
SM 4-163 M0AC/M257
4.7.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
5001 [All Indecators On] *CTL -
Turns on or off the all indicators on the operation panel.
5024 [mm/inch Display Selection]
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
5-024-001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)

1: inch (USA)
5045 [Accounting Counter]
Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of
whether the counter value is negative or positive.
5-045-001 Counter Method *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]

0: Developments
1: Prints
5051 [Toner Refill Detection Display]
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
5-051-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step] Alphanumeric

0: ON
1: OFF
5055 [Display IP Address]
Display or does not display the IP address on the operation panel.
5-055-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]

0: No, 1: Yes
M0AC/M257 4-164 SM
Maintenance
5074 [Home Key Customization] Not used
Reference
System
Sets applications that appear on the operation panel when the [Home] key
is pressed.
5-074-002 Login Setting *CTL [0 to 0xFF / 00000000 / 1/step]

Sets login operation mode for panel
display.
5-074-050 Show Home Edit *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Function disable
1: SDK application
2: Legacy application (reserved)
5-074-091 Function Setting *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Function disable
1: SDK application
2: Legacy application (reserved)
5-074-092 Product ID *CTL [0 to 0xFFFF FFFF/ 0 / 1/step]

Sets the application product ID.
5-074-093 Application Screen ID *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

Sets the display category of the application
that is specified in the SP5075-001
Setting for future function enhancement.
5083 [LED Light Switch]
Turns on or off the LED at the toner near end or waste toner near end.
5-083-001 Toner Near End *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OFF, 1: ON
5-083-002 Waste Toner Near End *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OFF, 1: ON
5131 [PSize/Type Select]
5-131-001 1.NA 2.EU ASIA *ENG [0 to 2 / 1: NA, 2: EU/ASIA / 1/step]

0: Japan, 1: NA, 2: EU/ASIA
SM 4-165 M0AC/M257
Selects the paper size type (for originals and paper).

After changing the value, turn the main power switch off and on.
5169 [CE Login]
If you will change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode
with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
5-169-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
5186 [RK 4]
Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device)

disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1
(Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
5-186-001 - *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Disable
1: Enable
5191 [Power Setting]
Shifts to the power save mode or not.
5-191-001 Power Str [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

*CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
5195 [Limitless SW] DFU
5-195-001 - *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]

0: Productivity priority
1: Tray priority
M0AC/M257 4-166 SM
Selects the paper feed mode.
Maintenance
Productivity priority:
Reference
System
This changes the feeding tray as soon as the machine detects the priority
tray even the paper still remains in the feeding tray.
Tray priority:
This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray where the machine
has been feeding paper has been run out of.
This SP is activated only when a customer selects the "Auto Paper Selsct".
5302 [Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
KO: +540 (Korea)
5-302-002 Time Difference *CTL [-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step]
5305 [Auto Off Set]
Turns on or off the limitation for the auto power off function.
5-305-101 Auto Off Limit Set [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

*CTL 0: Limitation off
1: Limitation on
5307 [Daylight Saving Time]
5-307-001 ON/OFF CTL [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
SM 4-167 M0AC/M257
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
 Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set.

Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
5-307-003 Start CTL
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in
the first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit
setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
 The digits are counted from the left.
 Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
5-307-004 End CTL -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
 The digits are counted from the left.
 Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
M0AC/M257 4-168 SM
Maintenance
5401 [Access Control]
Reference
System
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following
settings. DFU
5-401-104 Authentication Time *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 second /step]
Specifies the time for the authentication timeout.

0 = 60 seconds, 1 to 255 = displayed time (seconds)
5-401-162 Extend Certification *CTL Selects the log out type for the extend
Detail authentication device.
Bit 0: Log-out without an IC card
0: Not allowed (default)
1: Allowed
5-401-200 SDK1 Unique ID *CTL "SDK" is the "Software Development

Kit". This data can be converted from
5-401-201 SDK1 Certification *CTL
SAS (VAS) when installed or
Method
uninstalled. (DFU)
5-401-210 SDK2 Unique ID *CTL

Method
5-401-220 SDK3 Unique ID *CTL

Method
5-401-230 SDK certification device *CTL -
 Bit 0: SDK authentication

0: Off (Default), 1: On (SDK authentication enabled)
Selects the SDK authentication setting.
 Bit 2: Administrator log in setting
0: Off (Default), 1: On
5-401-240 Detail Option *CTL -
SM 4-169 M0AC/M257
Enalbes or disables the log out confirmation option.

 Bit 0: Log out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
Selects the automatic log out time.
 Bit 1 and 2: Automatic log out timer reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01: 10 seconds,
10: 20 seconds, 11: 30 seconds
5402 [Access Control]
5-402-101 SDKJ1 Limit Setting *CTL [0 to 0xFF / 00000000 / 1/step]

bit0: SDKJ Authentication
5-402-102 SDKJ2 Limit Setting *CTL
-0: Panel Type
5-402-103 SDKJ3 Limit Setting *CTL -1: Remote Type
bit1: Using user code setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
5-402-105 SDKJ5 Limit Setting *CTL bit2: Using key-counter setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
bit3: Using external billing device setup
5-402-107 SDKJ7 Limit Setting *CTL -0: OFF, 1: ON
bit4: Using extended external billing
device setup

bit5 to 6: Not used
5-402-110 SDKJ10 Limit Setting *CTL bit7: Using extended function J limit
5-402-111 SDKJ11 Limit Setting *CTL users

-0: OFF, 1: ON
5-402-117 SDKJ17 Limit Setting *CTL [0 to 0xFF / 00000000 / 1/step]

bit0: SDKJ Authentication
-0: Panel Type
5-402-119 SDKJ19 Limit Setting *CTL -1: Remote Type
M0AC/M257 4-170 SM
5-402-120 SDKJ20 Limit Setting *CTL bit1: Using user code setup
Maintenance
-0: OFF, 1: ON
Reference
System
bit2: Using key-counter setup
bit3: Using external billing device setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
5-402-124 SDKJ24 Limit Setting *CTL bit4: Using extended external billing
device setup
-0: OFF, 1: ON
5-402-126 SDKJ26 Limit Setting *CTL bit5 to 6: Not used
bit7: Using extended function J limit
users
5-402-141 SDKJ1 ProductID *CTL [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF / 0 / 1/step]
SM 4-171 M0AC/M257
5404 [User Code Clear]
5-404-001 - *CTL Clears all counters for users.
5-404-101 User Code Counter *CTL Turns on or off the user code counter
Clear clear mode.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Clear, 1: No Clear
M0AC/M257 4-172 SM
Maintenance
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Reference
System
5-411-004 Simplified *CTL Determines whether easy LDAP
Authentication certification is done.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step] 1: On, 0: Off
5-411-005 Password Null Not *CTL This SP is referenced only when

Permit SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On).
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
5-411-006 Detail Option *CTL bit 0: anonymous atuthentication

0: OFF, 1: ON
bit 1 to 7: Not used
5412 [Krb-Certification]
Executes Kerberos certification according to certified encryption strength.

Kerberos is a computer network authentication protocol which works on the
basis of tickets to allow nodes communicating over a non-secure network to
prove their identity to one another in a secure manner. Kerberos also refers
to a suite of free software published by Massachusetts Institute of
Technology (MIT) that implements the Kerberos protocol.
5-412-100 Encrypt Mode *CTL [- / 11111111 / 1/step]

0x01:AES256-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96
0x02:AES128-CTS-HMAC-SHA1-96
0x04:DES3-CBC-SHA1
0x08:RC4-HMAC
0x10:DES-CBC-MD5
0xFF(0x1F):ALL
SM 4-173 M0AC/M257
5413 [Lockout Setting]
5-413-001 Lockout On/Off *CTL Switches on/off the lock on the local
address book account.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off, 1: On
5-413-002 Lockout Threshold *CTL Sets a limit on the frequency of

lockouts for account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
5-413-003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL Determines whether the system waits

the prescribed time for input of a
correct user ID and password after an
account lockout has occurred.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not
cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if
correct user ID and password are
entered.
5-413-004 Cancellation Time *CTL Determines the length of time that the
system waits for correct input of the
user ID and password after a lockout
has occurred. This setting is used only
if SP5413-3 is set to "1" (on).
[1 to 9999 / 60 / 1 min. /step]
5414 [Access Mitigation]
5-414-001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL Switches on/off masking of

continuously used IDs and passwords
that are identical.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1/step]
0: Off
1: On
M0AC/M257 4-174 SM
5-414-002 Mitigation Time *CTL Sets the length of time for excluding
Maintenance
continuous access for identical user
Reference
System
IDs and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min. /step]
5415 [Password Attack]
5-415-001 Permissible Number *CTL Sets the number of attempts to attack

the system with random passwords to
gain illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt /step]
5-415-002 Detect Time *CTL Sets the time limit to stop a password
attack once such an attack has been
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec. /step]
5416 [Access Information]
5-416-001 User Max Num *CTL Limits the number of users used by the
access exclusion and password attack
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users /step]
5-416-002 Password Max Num *CTL Limits the number of passwords used
by the access exclusion and password
attack detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 passwords /step]
5-416-003 Monitor Interval *CTL Sets the processing time interval for
referencing user ID and password
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec. /step]
5417 [Access Attack]
5-417-001 Permissible Number *CTL Sets a limit on access attempts when

an excessive number of attempts are
detected for machine features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1 /step]
SM 4-175 M0AC/M257
5-417-002 Attack Detect Time *CTL Sets the length of time for monitoring
the frequency of access to machine
features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec. /step]
5-417-003 Cert Wait *CTL Sets the wait time to slow down the
speed of certification when an
excessive number of access attempts
have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec. /step]
5-417-004 Attack Max Num *CTL Sets a limit on the number of requests
received for certification in order to
slow down the certification speed when
an excessive number of access
attempts have been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 /1 attempt /step]
5420 [User Authentication]
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
5-420-041 Printer *CTL Determines whether certification is

required before a user can use the
printer applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: On, 1: Off
5-420-051 SDK1 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON. 1: OFF

Determines whether certification is
5-420-061 SDK2
required before a user can use the
5-420-071 SDK3 SDK application.
M0AC/M257 4-176 SM
Maintenance
5481 [Authentication Error Code]
Reference
System
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
5-481-001 System Log Disp *CTL Determines whether an error code

appears in the system log after a user
authentication failure occurs.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off, 1: On
5501 [PM Alarm Interval]
5-501-001 Printout *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 / step]

0: Alarm off
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value
(1 to 9999) x 1000 ≥ PM counter
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
5-504-001 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
5505 [Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.

The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a
set number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
5-505-001 - *CTL [0 to 255 / 16 / 100 prints /step]
SM 4-177 M0AC/M257
5507 [Supply/CC Alarm] *CTL -
Enables or disables the notifying a supply call via the @Remote.
5-507-001 Paper Size 0: Off, 1: On
5-507-003 Toner 0: Off, 1: On
5-507-005 Drum 0: Off, 1: On
5-507-006 Waste Toner Bottle 0: Off, 1: On
5-507-007 Transfer Belt 0: Off, 1: On
5-507-008 Fusing Unit 0: Off, 1: On
5-507-080 Toner Call Timing Changes the timing of the "Toner Supply Call"
via the @Remote, when the following
conditions occur.
0: At replacement
1: At near end
5-507-081 Toner Call Tresh [10 to 90 / 10 / 1%/step]

Changes the toner remaining threshold for the
"Toner Supply Call" via the @Remote.
5-507-128 Interval :Others [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step]
5-507-133 Interval :A4
5-507-134 Interval :A5
5-507-142 Interval :B5
5-507-164 Interval :LG
5-507-166 Interval :LT
5-507-172 Interval :HLT
5515 [SC/Alarm Setting]
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when
an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when
an SC error occurs.
M0AC/M257 4-178 SM
5-515-001 SC Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
Maintenance
0: Off, 1: On
Reference
System
5-515-002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]
0: Off, 1: On
5-515-003 Service Parts End Call
5-515-004 User Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]

0: Off, 1: On
5-515-006 Communication Test Call
5-515-007 Machine Information Notice
5-515-008 Alarm Notice [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]

0: Off, 1: On
5-515-009 Non Genuin Tonner Alarm [0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]

0: Off, 1: On
5-515-010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
5-515-011 Supply Manegement Report Call
5-515-012 Jam/Door Open Call [0 or 1 / 0 / - /step]

0: Off, 1: O
5517 [Get Machine Info]
5-517-031 SMC Inf: Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 10 / 1minute/step]

Interval When SMC info collect is interrupt, retries
during the time between receiving Request
for obtaining SMC info, to value set with this
setting.
5731 [Counter Effect]
This SP is uesd only for Japan machines.
5-731-001 MK1 Paper -> [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

*CTL
Combine 0: OFF, 1: ON
SM 4-179 M0AC/M257
5745 [DeemedPowerConsumption]
5-745-211 Controller Standby *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-212 STR *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-213 Main Power Off *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-214 Scanning and Printing *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-215 Printing *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-216 Scanning *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-217 Engine Standby *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-218 Low Power *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

Consumption
5-745-219 Silent Condition *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5-745-220 Heater Off *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
5749 [Import/Export]
Imports and exports preference information.
5-749-001 Export CTL [- / - / -]

Option: Unique
Copy config: Encryption, Encryption key
(if selected)
[Execute]
5-749-101 Import CTL [- / - / -]

Option: Unique
Copy config: Encryption, Encryption key
(if selected)
[Execute]
M0AC/M257 4-180 SM
Maintenance
5751 [Key Event Encryption Setting]
Reference
System
Use the soft keyboard to set encryption key information.
5-751-001 Password *CTL [32 characters / - / 1/step]
 Memory Clear (SP5-801)

 The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter
charge setting and meter charge counters are not cleared.
5801 [Memory Clear]
5-801-001 All Clear Resets all correction data for process control and
all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
5-801-002 Engine [ENG] Clears the engine settings.
5-801-003 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
5-801-004 IMH Initializes the IMH settings.
5-801-005 MCS Initializes the Mcs settings.
5-801-008 Printer The following service settings:

 Bit switches
 Gamma settings (User & Service)
 Toner Limit
The following user settings:
 Tray Priority
 Menu Protect
 System Setting except for setting of Energy
Saver
 I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
 PCL Menu
SM 4-181 M0AC/M257
5-801-010 GWWS Deletes the network file application management

files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login
ID.
5-801-011 NCS All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

(NCS: Network Control Service)
5-801-014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)
settings.
5-801-015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS (User Information Control
Service) settings.
5-801-016 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

Service) settings.
5-801-017 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and

Charge-control Service) settings.
5-801-018 SRM Memory Clr Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)
settings.
5-801-019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
5-801-021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
5-801-025 Websys Initializes the web system settings.
5-801-026 PLN Initializes the PLN settings.
5-801-027 SAS Initializes the SAS settings.
5803 [Input Check] See "page 4-277 "Input Check Table"" in this
section.
5804 [Output Check] See "page 4-282 "Output Check Table"" in this
section.
5810 [SC Reset]
Resets a type A service call condition.
 Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
M0AC/M257 4-182 SM
5-810-001 Fusing SC Reset CTL -
Maintenance
Reference
System
5811 [Machine Serial] Machine Serial Number Display
5-811-002 Display *ENG Displays the machine serial number.
5811 [Machine Serial Set]
5-811-004 BCU *ENG Inputs the serial number.
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
5-812-001 Telephone *CTL -
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is

printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user's "Counter"
menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters
can be input).
5-812-002 Facsimile *CTL -
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number
is printed on the Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters
can be input).
5816 [NRS Function]
5-816-001 I/F Setting *CTL [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]

0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
Selects the remote service setting.
5-816-002 CE Call *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
SM 4-183 M0AC/M257
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
 This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
5-816-003 Function Flag *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables the remote service function.
5-816-007 SSL Disable *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: No. SSL used.
1: Yes. SSL not used.
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by

SSL during an RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface.
5-816-008 RCG Connect Timeout *CTL [1 to 90 / 30 / 1second/step]
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the @Remote network.
5-816-009 RCG Write Timeout *CTL [0 to 100 / 60 / 1second/step]
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written
to the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
5-816-010 RCG Read Timeout *CTL [0 to 100 / 60 / 1second/step]
Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written
from the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
5-816-011 Port 80 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port
80 on the @Remote network.
5-816-013 RFU Timing *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Any status of a target machine
1: Sleep or panel off mode only
Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.
M0AC/M257 4-184 SM
5-816-014 RCG Error Cause CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Maintenance
0: Initial state, normal condition
Reference
System
1: Error
Displays RCG connection error. cause
5-816-021 Function Flag *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag.
5-816-023 Connect Mode (N/M) *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
This SP displays and selects the RCG-N connection method.
5-816-061 Noti Time Expire Timing *CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1/step]
Proximity of the expiration of the certification.
5-816-062 HTTP Proxy Use *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Not use
1: Use
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine
communicates with the service center.
5-816-063 HTTP Proxy Host *CTL [up to 127 / - / 1/step]
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between the RCG device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display
the customer proxy server address.
The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
 The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters

beyond the 128 character are ignored.
 This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
SM 4-185 M0AC/M257
5-816-064 HTTP Proxy Port *CTL [0 to 0xffff / 0 / 1/step]
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between the embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary
to set up the embedded RC Gate-N.
 This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
5-816-065 HTTP Proxy Aut User *CTL [up to 31 / - / 1/step]
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
 The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.
 This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
5-816-066 HTTP Proxy Aut *CTL [up to 31 / - / 1/step]

Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
 The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any

character beyond the 31st character is ignored.
 This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
5-816-067 Cer Updt Cond *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by Embedded RC Gate is set correctly.
1 The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received

from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
2 The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being

notified of the successful update.
3 The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of

the failed update.
M0AC/M257 4-186 SM
4 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
Maintenance
update is being sent to the GW URL.
Reference
System
11 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
12 The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is

being notified of the certification update request.
13 The notification of the request for certification update has completed

successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
14 The notification of the certification request has been received from

the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
15 The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified
of the successful completion of this event.
16 The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
notified of the failure of this event.
17 The certification update request has been received from the GW

URL, the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it
was completed, but a certification error has been received, and the
rescue certification is being recorded.
18 The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW

URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
5-816-068 Cer Abnml Cause *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for
update of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
1 Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

has expired.
2 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the

certification has expired.
3 Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

certification.
SM 4-187 M0AC/M257
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
5-816-069 Cer Updt Reg ID *CTL [- / - / -]
The ID of the request for certification.
5-816-083 Firm Updating *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step]

0: waiting for receiving firmware
update.
1: waiting for scheduling firmware
update start.
2: waiting for user confirmation
3: preparing for device firmware
update.
4: processing device firmware
update.
5: termination processing
Displays the status of the firmware update
5-816-085 Firm Up User Conf *CTL [- / - / -]
This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version
of the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to
confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system
manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the
URL.
5-816-086 Firmware Size *CTL [- / - / -]
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files
during the firmware update execution.
5-816-087 CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [8digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays the macro version of the @Remote certification. This SP displays

8-digit characters.
5-816-088 CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [16digits / - / 1digit/step]
M0AC/M257 4-188 SM
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote certification.
Maintenance
This SP displays 16-digit characters.
Reference
System
5-816-089 CERT:ID2 Code CTL [17digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces are displayed as

underscores (_). Asterisks (****) indicate that no @Remote certification
exists. This SP displays 17-digit characters.
5-816-090 CERT:Subject CTL [17digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays the common name of the @Remote certification subject. CN = the

following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks
(****) indicate that no DESS exists.
5-816-091 CERT:Serial Num CTL [16digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks (****) indicate
that no DESS exists. This SP displays 16-digit characters
5-816-092 CERT:Issuer CTL [30digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays the common name of the issuer of the @Remote certification. CN

= the following 30 bytes. Asterisks (****)indicate that no DESS exists.
5-816-093 CERT:St ExpTime CTL [10digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays the start time of the period for which the current @Remote
certification is enabled. This SP displays 10-digit characters.
5-816-094 CERT:End ExpTime CTL [10digits / - / 1digit/step]
Displays the end time of the period for which the current @Remote
certification is enabled. This SP displays 10-digit characters.
5-816-102 CERT:Encrypt Level *CTL [1 or 2 / 1 / 1/step]

1: 512 bit
2: 2048 bit
Displays cryptic strength of the NRS certification.
SM 4-189 M0AC/M257
5-816-103 Client Communication *CTL Displays the method for the client
Method communication in the @Remote.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Not connected, 1: IPv4,
2: IPv6, 3: Host name
communication
5-816-104 Client Communication *CTL Specifies the communiation

Limit limitation to the @Remote Gateway.
[1 to 7 / 7 / 1/step]
Host IPv6 IPv4

name
1 No No Yes
2 No Yes Yes
3 No Yes Yes
4 Yes No No
5 Yes No Yes
6 Yes Yes No
7 Yes Yes Yes
5-816-115 Network Information *CTL Specifies the waiting time for the
Waiting Timer network information.
[5 to 255 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
5-816-200 Polling Manual Execution CTL [- / - / -]

[Execute]
Executes the center polling manually.
M0AC/M257 4-190 SM
Maintenance
5-816-201 Instl:Condition CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
Reference
System
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service
device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device
is set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is
completed. In this status, this unit cannot answer a polling request from the
external RCG.
2. The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit
cannot answer a polling request.
3. The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the
embedded RCG device cannot be set.
4 The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
5-816-202 Instl:ID# *CTL [- / - / -]
Allows entering the number of the request needed for the RCG-N device.
5-816-203 Instl:Reference CTL [- / - / -]

[Execute]
Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW URL.
5-816-204 Instl:Ref Rslt CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with
SP5816 203.
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 20: Dial-up failure (modem type only)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 21: Ansewer tone detection failure
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name (modem type only)
or password) 22: Carrier detection failure (modem
6: Communication error type only)
8: Other error 23: Modem setting parameter error
9: Inquiry executing (modem type only)
11: Registration number error 24: Power supply error (modem type
(already registered number) only)
12: Registration number error 25: Modem line disconnected (modem
(parameter error) type only)
26: Busy line (modem type only)
SM 4-191 M0AC/M257
5-816-205 Instl:Ref Section CTL [- / - / -]
Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered
at the GW URL.
5-816-206 Instl:Rgstltn CTL [- / - / -]

[Execute]
Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
5-816-207 Instl:Rgstltn Rst CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
0: Succeeded 21: Ansewer tone detection failure

1: Inquiry number error (modem type only)
2: Registration in progress 22: Carrier detection failure (modem
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) type only)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 23: Modem setting parameter error
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name (modem type only)
or password) 24: Power supply error (modem type
8: Other error only)
9: Registration executing 25: Modem line disconnected (modem
20: Dial-up failure (modem type type only)
only) 26: Busy line (modem type only)
5-816-208 Instl:ErrorCode CTL [-2147483647 to 2147483647 / - /

-/step]
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when
either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
Cause Code Meaning
Illegal Modem -11001 Chat parameter error

Parameter
-11002 Chat execution error
-11003 Unexpected error
-11004 Cutting process occurred during modem

communication.
M0AC/M257 4-192 SM
-11005 NCS reboot occurred during modem
Maintenance
communication.
Reference
System
Operation -12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring
Error,Incorrect device status.
Setting
-12003 Attempted registration without execution of an
inquiry and no previous registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for

certification and ID2.
-12005 @Remote communication is prohibited. The

device has an Embedded RC gate-related
problem.
-12006 A confirmation request was made after the

confirmation had been already completed.
-12007 The request number used at registration was

different from the one used at confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed because mainframe

was in use.
-12009 D2 mismatch between an individual certification

and NVRAM.
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
Error Caused -2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the correct

by Response international prefix for the telephone number.
from GW URL
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
SM 4-193 M0AC/M257
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
-2398 Incorrect request number format
5-816-209 Install Clear CTL [- / - / -]

[Execute]
Releases the machine from its embedded RCG setup.
5-816-240 CommError Time CTL Displays the date and time of

@Remote connection error.
5-816-241 CommError Code 1 CTL Displays the error code at @Remote

connection.
5-816-242 CommError Code 2 CTL
5-816-243 CommError Code 3 CTL
5-816-244 CommError State 1 CTL Displays the error stae at @Remote

connection.
5-816-245 CommError State 2 CTL
5-816-246 CommError State 3 CTL
5-816-247 SSL Error Count CTL Displays the error counter for the
SSL connection.
5-816-248 Other Error Count CTL Displays the error counter for the
other connection.
5-816-250 Print Com Log CTL [- / - / -]
Prints the communication log.
 This SP is activated only when SP 5816-021 is set to “1”.
M0AC/M257 4-194 SM
Maintenance
5821 [RCG Setting]
Reference
System
5-821-002 RCG IPv4 Address *CTL [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h
/ 1/step]
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
5-821-003 RCG Port *CTL [0 to 65535 / 443 / 1/step]

Sets destination port number of RCG
(Remote Communication Gate) at call
process against center.
5-821-004 RCG IPv4 Path *CTL [- / /RCG/services/ - / -]

Sets the URL path of the destination for
processing calls to the @Remote service
center. 17 Numeric characters allowed (0
to 17)
5-821-005 RCG IPv6 Address *CTL [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h

/ 1/step]
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
5-821-006 RCG IPv6 URL Path *CTL [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h

/ 1/step]
Sets the URL path of the destination for
center. 17 Numeric characters allowed (0
to 15)
5-821-007 RCG Host Name *CTL Sets the host name of the destination for
center.
5-821-008 RCT Host URL Path *CTL Sets the host URL path of the destination
for processing calls to the @Remote
service center. 255 bites characters
allowed (0 to 255)
SM 4-195 M0AC/M257
5824 [NV-RAM Upload]
Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
number) from the NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM
Data Upload/Download" in the "System Maintenance Reference" of the
Field Service Manual.
5-824-001 - *CTL -
5825 [NV-RAM Download]
Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For
details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System
Maintenance Reference" of the Field Service Manual.
5-825-001 - *CTL -
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
5-828-050 1284 Compatibility Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

(Centro) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
5-828-052 ECP (Centro) Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
 This SP is activated only when

SP5-828-50 is set to "1".
5-828-065 Job Spooling Enables/disables Job Spooling.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
5-828-066 Job Spooling Clear: Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at
Start Time power on.
0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
M0AC/M257 4-196 SM
5-828-069 Job Spooling Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for
Maintenance
(Protocol) each protocol.
Reference
System
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
5-828-087 Protocol usage Shows which protocols have been used with the
network.
0: Off (Not used the network with the protocol.)
1: On (Used the network with the protocol once or
more.)
bit0: IPsec, bit1: IPv6, bit2: IEEE 802. 1X,
bit3:Wireless LAN, bit4: Security mode level
setting, bit5:Appletalk, bit6: DHCP, bit7: DHCPv6,
bit8: telnet, bit9: SSL, bit10: HTTPS, bit11:
BMLinkS printing, bit12: diprint printing, bit13: LPR
printing, bit14: ftp printing, bit15: rsh printing, bit16:
SMB printing, bit17: WSD-Printer, bit18:
WSD-Scanner, bit19: Scan to SMB, bit20: Scan to
NCP, bit21: Reserve, bit22: Bluetooth, bit23: IEEE
1284, bit24: USB printing, bit25: Dynamic DNS,
bit26: Netware printing, bit27: LLTD, bit28: IPP
printing, bit29: IPP printing (SSL), bit30: ssh, bit31:
sftp
5-828-090 TELNET (0: OFF 1: Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
5-828-091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Web operation.
[0 or 1 / 1 / – /step]
SM 4-197 M0AC/M257
5-828-145 Active IPv6 Link Local This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on
Address the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the
format:
"Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
5-828-147 Active IPv6 Stateless These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
Address 1 referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN in the
format:
5-828-149 Active IPv6 Stateless
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address 2
5-828-151 Active IPv6 Stateless configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Address 3

Address 4

Address 5
5-828-156 IPv6 Manual Address This SP is the IPv6 manually set address
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN in the
format:
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
5-828-158 IPv6 Gateway This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on

Address the Ethernet or wireless LAN. The IPv6 address
consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of
16 bits each.
5-828-161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6
Setting stateless.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
M0AC/M257 4-198 SM
5-828-236 Web Item visible Displays or does not display the Web system
Maintenance
items.
Reference
System
[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff /step] 0: Not displayed,
1: Displayed
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
5-828-237 Web shopping link Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH
visible on the top page and link page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Not display, 1:Display
5-828-238 Web supplies Link Displays or does not display the link to
visible Consumable Supplier on the top page and link
page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
5-828-239 Web Link1 Name This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on
the link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
5-828-240 Web Link1 URL This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on
the link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL are 127 characters.
5-828-241 Web Link1 visible Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on
the top page of the web system.
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
5-828-242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
5-828-243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
5-828-244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
5-828-249 DHCPv6 DUID Specifies the IP address for the IPV6 device.
SM 4-199 M0AC/M257
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL
5-832-001 HDD Formatting (ALL) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP
mode only if there is a hard disk error.
5840 [IEEE 802.11]
5-840-006 Channel MAX *CTL Sets the maximum number of channels

available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels
available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the maximum
end of the range for each area. Adjust the
upper 4 bits to set the maximum number
of channels.
EU: [1 to 13 / 13 / 1/step]
NA: [1 to 11 / 11 / 1/step]
AS: [1 to 14 / 14 / 1/step]
5-840-007 Channel MIN *CTL Sets the minimum number of channels

available for data transmission via the
wireless LAN. The number of channels
available varies according to location. The
default settings are set for the minimum
end of the range for each area. Adjust the
lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of
channels.
EU: [1 to 13 / 1 / 1/step]
NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 1 / 1/step]
AS: [1 to 14 / 14 / 1/step]
5-840-011 WEP Key Select *CTL Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary /step]
00: Key #1
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
M0AC/M257 4-200 SM
5-840-045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL Selects the debug level for WPA
Maintenance
authentication application.
Reference
System
[1 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3:
error
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
5-840-046 11w *CTL Selects the operation of the IEEE802.11

option.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled, 1: Priority, 2: Necessary
5-840-047 PSK Set Type *CTL Selects the type of the PSK.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Passphrase, 1: PSK
5842 [GWWS Analysis] DFU
5-842-001 Setting 1 *CTL Default: 00000000 – do not change

Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the
DeskTopBinder software
5-842-002 Setting 2 *CTL Adjusts the debug program modesetting.

Bit7: 5682 mmseg-log setting
0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msec.
0 to 6: Not used
5844 [USB]
5-844-001 Transfer Rate *CTL Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

[0001 or 0004 / 0004 / - /step]
0001: Full speed, 0004: Auto Change
5-844-002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID.
5-844-003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID.
5-844-004 Dev Release Num *CTL Displays the device release version
number.
SM 4-201 M0AC/M257
5-844-005 Fixed USB Port *CTL Displays the fixed USB Port.
5-844-006 PnP Model Name *CTL Displays the PnP Model Name.
5-844-007 PnP Serial Number *CTL Displays the PnP Serial Number.
5-844-008 Mac Supply Level *CTL Enables or disable the Mac supply
level.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
5-844-100 Notify Unsupport *CTL Displays a message of the unspported

USB device for the USB host slot.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed
5845 [Delivery Server Setting]
Provides items for delivery server settings.
5-845-003 Retry Interval *CTL [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 sec /step]
Determines the time interval between retries before the machine returns to
standby after an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery
scanner or SMTP server.
5-845-004 Number of Retries *CTL [0 to 99 / 3 / 1 /step]
Determines the number of retries before the machine returns to standby

after an error occurs during an image transfer with the delivery or SMTP
server.
5-845-022 Instant Trans Off *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / - /step]
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
error.
5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL -
5-846-010 LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
M0AC/M257 4-202 SM
5-846-041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
Maintenance
Reference
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a
System
basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However,
the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install a new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD
automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the
system administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
5-846-043 Addr Book Media Displays the slot number where an address
book data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1 /step]
0: Unconfirmed
1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
5-846-047 Initialize Local Addr Book Clears the local address book information,
including the user code.
5-846-049 Initialize LDAP Addr Book Clears the LDAP address book information,
except the user code.
5-846-050 Initialize All Addr Book Clears all directory information managed by
UCS, including all user codes.
5-846-051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD
card.
SM 4-203 M0AC/M257
5-846-052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the
SD card.
5-846-053 Clear Backup Info Deletes the address book data from the SD
card in the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from
this machine.
This feature does not work if the card is
write-protected.
 After you do this SP, go out of the SP

mode, and then turn the power off.
 Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.
5-846-060 Search Option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS
local address book.
Bit: Meaning
0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
5-846-062 Complexity Option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
 This SP does not normally require adjustment.

 This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
5-846-063 Complexity Option 2 DFU
M0AC/M257 4-204 SM
5-846-094 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function
Maintenance
for the address book data.
Reference
System
5848 [Web Service] *CTL -
SP5848-2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting.
Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
5-848-004 Access Ctrl: user Directory Switches access control on and off.
(only Lower 4 bits) 0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
5-848-009 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower
4 bits)
5-848-011 Access Ctrl: Device

management (Lower 4 bits)
5-848-022 Access Ctrl: uadministration

(Lower 4bits)
5-848-024 ac:Log Switches the log service on and off.

0000: Log service available
0001: Log service not available
0010: Log service available (No application
off-line EX at operation)
0100: REST API not available
5-848-025 ac:Rest Enables or disables the REST web service

function.
bit 0; 0: Disable, 1: Enable
bit 1 to 3; Not used
5-848-217 Setting: Timing DFU
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
5-849-001 Display The "Counter Clear Day" has been

changed to "Installation Date" or "Inst.
Date".
SM 4-205 M0AC/M257
5-849-002 Print Determines whether the installation date is

printed on the printout for the total counter.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
5-849-003 Total Counter -
5851 [Bluetooth Mode]
Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
5856 [Remote ROM Update]
Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port

(IEEE1284) when updating the remote ROM.
5-856-002 Local Port *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: Disable
1: Enable
5857 [Save Debug Log]
5-857-001 On/Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: OFF
1: ON
Switches the debug log feature on and
off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
5-857-002 Target(2:HDD 3:SD) *CTL [1 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]

1: IC card
2: HDD
3: SD card
Selects the storage device to save
debug logs information.
M0AC/M257 4-206 SM
5-857-101 Start Date *CTL [- / 20120101 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
Sets start date of the debug log
Reference
System
output.
5-857-102 End Date *CTL [- / 20371212 / 1 /step]

Sets end date of the debug log output.
5-857-103 All Logs *CTL [Execute]

Obtains all debug logs.
5-857-104 Controller Logs *CTL [Execute]

Obtains controller debug log only.
5-857-105 Engine Debug Logs *CTL [Execute]

Obtains engine debug log only.
5-857-107 Opepanel Debug Logs *CTL [Execute]

Outputs the controller debug log to the
media inserted front I/F
5-857-120 Make LogTrace Dir *CTL [Execute]

Makes a folder for the log trace in the
SD card.
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
5-860-002 SMTP Srvr Port no. Input the SMTP server port number.
5-860-003 SMTP Auth SMTP authentication enable/disable
5-860-006 SMTP Auth Encryp Encryption mode for SMTP

authentication enable/disable (Only
valid if 5860 3 is set to "enable")
5-860-007 POP before SMTP Enable/disable POP before SMTP. If

the SMTP server does not have
authentication, you can enable POP
before SMTP, them POP
authentication is available (SP 5860
13)
SM 4-207 M0AC/M257
5-860-008 POP to SMTP Waiting When using POP before SMTP, this
SP mode determines the maximum
wait time between POP
authentication and connection with
SMTP. Communication stops if this
time is exceeded.
5-860-009 Mail Receive Protocol Selects the protocol for the mail
reception.
[0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: No reception
1: POP3
2: IMAP4
3: SMTP
5-860-013 POP3/IMAP4 Auth. If POP before SMTP is enabled,

then you can use this SP to enable
or disable encryption mode for POP
authentication
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Auto
1: Off
2: On
5-860-014 POP Serv Port No. Input the POP server port number.
5-860-015 IMAP4 Srvr Port Input the IMAP4 server port number.
5-860-016 SMTP Rx Port No. Input the SMTP port for the mail
reception.
5-860-017 Mail Rx Interval Specifies the interval for the mail

reception.
5-860-019 Mail Keep Setting Selects the mail saving setting.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not saved in the mail server
1: All saved in the mail server
2: Only error mails saved in the mail
server
5-860-020 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / – /step]
M0AC/M257 4-208 SM
Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
Maintenance
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the
Reference
System
mail is not received during this prescribed time.
5-860-021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – /step]
Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply

mail.
0: No
1: Yes
5-860-022 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – /step]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched.
1: Yes. "From" item switched.
5-860-025 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – /step]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
 Bit 0: LOGIN
 Bit 1: PLAIN
 Bit 2: CRAM MD5
 Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
 Bit 4 to 7: Not used
 This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by

UP mode.
5-860-026 S/MIME: MIME Header CTL Selects the MIME header type of an
Setting E-mail sent by S/MIME.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Microsoft Outlook Express
standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5866 [E-mail Report] Not Used
SM 4-209 M0AC/M257
5-866-001 Report Validity *CTL Enables or disables the e-mail alert.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – /step]
0: Enable, 1: Disable
5-866-005 Add Date Field *CTL Adds or does not add the date field to
the header of the alert mail.
[0 or 1 / 0 / – /step]
0: Not added, 1: Added
5869 [RAM Disk Setting]
5-869-001 Mail Function *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables or disables the e-mail transfer function. This SP sets the RAM disk
size for the e-mail transfer function.
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
5-870-001 Writing *CTL Rewrites the common certification

used for the @Remote.
5-870-003 Initialize *CTL -
Initializes the set certification.

When the GW controller board is replaced with a new one for repair, you
must execute the "Initiralize (-003)" and "Writing (-001)" just after the new
board replacement.
NOTE: Turn off and on the main power switch after the "Initiralize (-003)"
and "Writing (-001)" have been done.
5-870-004 Writing: 2048bit *CTL -
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
5-873-001 Move Exec This SP copies the application programs from the original
SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
M0AC/M257 4-210 SM
5-873-002 Undo Exec This SP copies back the application programs from an
Maintenance
SD card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD
Reference
System
card slot 1. Use this menu when you have mistakenly
copied some programs by using "Move Exec"
(SP5873-1).
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]

This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an
SC error occurs.
 The reboot does not occur for Type A and C SC codes.
5-875-001 Reboot Mode *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

Enables or disables the automatic
reboot function when an SC error
occurs.
0: The machine reboots automatically
when the machine issues an SC error
and logs the SC error code. If the
same SC occurs again, the machine
does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when
an SC error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A
or C SC codes.
5-875-002 Reboot Method *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

This setting determines how the
machine reboots after an SC code is
issued.
0: Manual reboot
1: Automatic reboot.
5878 [Option Setup]
5-878-001 Overwrite Security - Enables the Data Overwrite Security

unit. Press "EXECUTE" on the operation
panel. Then turn the machine off and on.
SM 4-211 M0AC/M257
5-878-002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5884 [Plain 1/2 Setting]
5-884-001 By-pass Table *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: Plain Paper 1
5-884-002 Tray 1 *ENG
1: Plain Paper 2
5-884-003 Tray 2 *ENG
5-884-004 Tray 3 *ENG
5-884-005 Tray 4 *ENG
5887 [SD Get Counter]
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
5-887-001 - *CTL This SP sends a text file to an SD card

inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot).
The operation stores. The file is stored
in a folder created in the root directory
of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
The file is saved as a text file (*.txt)
prefixed with the number of the
machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2
(lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch
[EXECUTE].
3. Touch [Execute] in the message
when you are prompted.
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
5-888-001 - *CTL Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No authentication, No protection for
logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs
(only an administrator can see the logs)
M0AC/M257 4-212 SM
Maintenance
5893 [SDK Application Counter]
Reference
System
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
5-893-001 SDK-1 *CTL -
5-893-002 SDK-2 *CTL -
5-893-003 SDK-3 *CTL -
5-893-004 SDK-4 *CTL -
5-893-005 SDK-5 *CTL -
5-893-006 SDK-6 *CTL -
5-893-007 SDK-7 *CTL -
5-893-008 SDK-8 *CTL -
5-893-009 SDK-9 *CTL -
5-893-010 SDK-10 *CTL -
5-893-011 SDK-11 *CTL -
5-893-012 SDK-12 *CTL -
5894 [External Counter Setting]
DFU
5-894-001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
5900 [Engine Log Upload]
Selects the target module or trigger for the engine log uploading.
5-900-001 Pattern *ENG [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step ]
5-900-002 Trigger *ENG [ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step ]
SM 4-213 M0AC/M257
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
5-907-001 Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5930 [MeterClick Ch]
5-930-001 - *ENG -
Switches the meter-click charge mode on and off.

[0: OFF], [1: ON]
Important: Turn the main switch off/on after changing this setting.
OFF:
Meter charge mode disabled (default). This setting is for machines were
the operator is responsible for replacing the PCDU, the ITB unit, and the
fusing unit.
Alert messages are displayed on the operation panel when the PCDU, the
ITB unit, and the fusing unit reach the limit of their yield.
ON:
Meter charge mode enabled. This setting is for machines which the service
technician has responsibility for servicing.
 Alert messages are not displayed when the PCDU, the ITB unit, and
the fusing unit reach the limits of their yield.
 If the setting of SP5-930-001 is set to "1 (enabled)", the settings of

SP5-930-010, -014 and -016 must be adjusted.
5-930-010 PCDU *ENG Displays or does not display the end

display for the PCDU. This SP is
activated only when the SP5930-001 is
set to "1".
[0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
M0AC/M257 4-214 SM
5-930-014 Mid Trans Unit *ENG Displays or does not display the end
Maintenance
display for the ITB unit. This SP is
Reference
System
set to "1".
[0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5-930-016 Fusing Unit *ENG Displays or does not display the end
display for the fusing unit. This SP is
set to "1".
[0 or 1 / 1 / - /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5987 [Mech. Counter]
5-987-001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG This SP detects that a mechanical

counter device is removed. If it is
detected, SC610 occurs.
5990 [SP Print mode]
Prints out the SMC sheets.
5-990-001 All (Data List) CTL -
5-990-002 SP (Mode Data List) CTL
5-990-004 Logging Data CTL
5-990-005 Diagnostic Report CTL
5-990-006 Non-Default CTL
5-990-007 NIB Sumary CTL
5-990-024 SDK/J Summary CTL
5-990-025 SDK/J Appli.Info CTL
5-990-026 Printer SP CTL
SM 4-215 M0AC/M257
5992 [SP Text mode]

Copies the SMC report to a file on an SD card inserted into the SD card slot
on the right side of the machine operation panel.
1: front SD slot
2: back SD slot (service slot)
5-992-001 All (Data List) CTL [Execute]
5-992-002 SP (Mode Data List) CTL [Execute]
5-992-004 Logging Data CTL [Execute]
5-992-005 Diagnostic Report CTL [Execute]
5-992-006 Non-Default CTL [Execute]
5-992-007 NIB Summary CTL [Execute]
5-992-024 SDK/J Summary CTL [Execute]
5-992-025 SDK/J Application Info CTL [Execute]
5-992-026 Printer SP mode CTL [Execute]
M0AC/M257 4-216 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
There are no Group 6 SP modes for this machine.
SM 4-217 M0AC/M257
4.9.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
7401 [Total SC Counter]
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
7-401-001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step]
7-401-002 Total SC Counter *CTL
7403 [SC History]
Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen,
but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
7-403-001 Latest *CTL -
7-403-002 Latest 1
7-403-003 Latest 2
7-403-004 Latest 3
7-403-005 Latest 4
7-403-006 Latest 5
7-403-007 Latest 6
7-403-008 Latest 7
7-403-009 Latest 8
7-403-010 Latest 9
7404 [SC990/SC991 History]
Logs the SC990 or SC991 detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC990 or SC991 are not displayed on the
screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
M0AC/M257 4-218 SM
7-404-001 Latest *CTL -
Maintenance
Reference
7-404-002 Latest 1
System
7-404-003 Latest 2
7-404-004 Latest 3
7-404-005 Latest 4
7-404-006 Latest 5
7-404-007 Latest 6
7-404-008 Latest 7
7-404-009 Latest 8
7-404-010 Latest 9
7502 [Total Paper Jam]
Displays the total number of jams detected.
7-502-001 Jam Counter * CTL [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
7-502-002 Total Jam Counter * CTL
7504 [Paper Jam Location]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
Displays the number of jams according to the location where a paper jam
is detected.
7-504-001 At Power On *CTL For details, "page 5-66 "Jam

Detection""
7-504-003 Tray 1: ON *CTL
7-504-004 Tray 2: ON *CTL
7-504-005 Tray 3: ON *CTL
7-504-006 Tray 4: ON *CTL
7-504-008 Bypass: ON *CTL
7-504-009 Duplex: ON *CTL
SM 4-219 M0AC/M257
7-504-011 Vertical Transport 1: ON *CTL
7-504-017 Registration: ON *CTL
7-504-018 Fusing Entrance: ON *CTL
7-504-019 Fusing Exit: ON *CTL
7-504-020 Paper Exit: ON *CTL
7-504-025 Duplex Exit: ON *CTL
7-504-027 Duplex Entrance: ON *CTL
7-504-028 Inverter Sensor: ON *CTL For details, "page 5-66 "Jam

Detection""
7-504-047 Paper Feed Sensor 1 *CTL
7-504-048 Bank Paper Feed Sensor 1 *CTL
7-504-051 SEF Sensor 1 *CTL
7-504-052 Bank SEF Sensor 1 *CTL
7-504-057 Regist Sensor *CTL
7-504-060 Exit Sensor *CTL
7-504-065 Duplex Exit Sensor *CTL
7-504-067 Duplex Entrance Sensor *CTL
7-504-068 Inverter Sensor *CTL
7506 [Paper Jam/Size]
M0AC/M257 4-220 SM
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
Maintenance
Reference
7-506-006 A5 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
System
7-506-044 HLT LEF
7-506-133 A4 SEF
7-506-134 A5 SEF
7-506-142 B5 SEF
7-506-164 LG SEF
7-506-166 LT SEF
7-506-172 HLT SEF
7-506-255 Others
7507 [Dsply-P Jam Hist] Display Plotter Jam History
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
7-507-001 Latest *CTL -
7-507-002 Latest 1
7-507-003 Latest 2
7-507-004 Latest 3
7-507-005 Latest 4
7-507-006 Latest 5
7-507-007 Latest 6
7-507-008 Latest 7
7-507-009 Latest 8
7-507-010 Latest 9
7514 [Paper Jam Location]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
SM 4-221 M0AC/M257
Displays the total number of jams according to the location where a paper
jam is detected.
7-514-001 At Power On *CTL For details, "page 5-66 "Jam

Detection""
7-514-003 Tray 1: ON *CTL
7-514-004 Tray 2: ON *CTL
7-514-005 Tray 3: ON *CTL
7-514-006 Tray 4: ON *CTL
7-514-008 Bypass: ON *CTL
7-514-009 Duplex: ON *CTL
7-514-017 Registration: ON *CTL
7-514-018 Fusing Entrance: ON *CTL
7-514-019 Fusing Exit: ON *CTL
7-514-020 Paper Exit: ON *CTL
7-514-025 Duplex Exit: ON *CTL
7-514-027 Duplex Entrance: ON *CTL
7-514-028 Inverter Sensor: ON *CTL For details, "page 5-66 "Jam

Detection""
7-514-047 Paper Feed Sensor 1 *CTL
7-514-051 SEF Sensor 1 *CTL
M0AC/M257 4-222 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
7-514-057 Regist Sensor *CTL
7-514-060 Exit Sensor *CTL
7-514-065 Duplex Exit Sensor *CTL
7-514-067 Duplex Entrance Sensor *CTL
7-514-068 Inverter Sensor *CTL
7516 [Paper Size Jam Cnt]

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
7-516-006 A5 LEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-044 HLT LEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-133 A4 SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-134 A5 SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-142 B5 SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-164 LG SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-166 LT SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-172 HLT SEF *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7-516-255 Others *CTL [0000 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]
7520 [Update Log]

Displays error history of firmware update in the past 10 times. [-001] is the
latest error history, and [-010] is the most old error history.
7-520-001 Record1 *CTL [1 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
SM 4-223 M0AC/M257
7801 [ROM No./ Firmware Version]

Displays firmware information for main machine and all other connected
devices.
7-801-255 - CTL -
001 System -
002 Engine -
009 Bank -
018 NetworkSupport -
019 Bank2 -
023 HDD Format -

Option
040 Bank3 -
132: NetWare -
150: RPCS -
151: PS -
158: PCL -
159: PCLXL -
162: PDF -
164: PictBridge -
165: PJL -
M0AC/M257 4-224 SM
166: IPDS -
Maintenance
Reference
168: MediaPrint:TIFF -
System
169: XPS -
180: FONT -
181: FONT1 -
182: FONT2 -
183: FONT3 -
184: FONT4 -
185: FONT5 --
200: Factory -
204: Printer -
210: MIB -
211: Websupport -
213: SDK1 -
214: SDK2 -
215: SDK3 -
7803 [PM Counter]
(Page, Unit, [Color])
-001 to -020 Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets
printed. Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double
Count cannot be deactivated.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new
unit is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically
moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 21) and is reset to "0".
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be
checked with SP7-906-1 to 19.
7-803-001 Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
SM 4-225 M0AC/M257
7-803-002 Page: PCU: Bk *ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-003 Page: PCU: C *ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-004 Page: PCU: M ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-005 Page: PCU: Y ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-006 Page:Dev. Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-007 Page:Dev. Unit:C ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-008 Page:Dev. Unit:M ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-009 Page:Dev. Unit:Y ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-014 Page:ITB Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-015 Page:ITB Cln Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-016 Page: Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-017 Page:FusingRoller ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-018 Page: Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-019 Page PTR Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
7-803-020 Page:ITB TC Bottl ENG [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step]
-031 to -048 Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current
maintenance unit.
When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new
unit is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically
moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-31 to 49) and is reset to
"0". The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can
be checked with SP7-906-31 to 49.
7-803-031 Rotation: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-032 Rotation: PCU: C ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-033 Rotation: PCU: M ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-034 Rotation: PCU: Y ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-035 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-036 Rotat:Dev.Unit:C ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
M0AC/M257 4-226 SM
7-803-037 Rotat:Dev.Unit:M ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
Maintenance
Reference
7-803-038 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Y ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
System
7-803-043 Rotation:ITB Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-044 Rotat:ITBCln.Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-045 Rotat:Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-046 Rotat:Fus.Roller ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-047 Rotat:Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step]
7-803-048 Rotation PTR Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-803-049 Msr TC Bottle ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mg/step ]

Displays the total amount of each
waste toner bottle.
-061 to -078 Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current revolution / Target revolution) x 100. This shows how much of the
unit's expected lifetime has been used up.
The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that
unit. If the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the
end condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%.
7-803-061 Rotat.(%):PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-062 Rotat.(%):PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-063 Rotat.(%):PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-064 Rotat.(%):PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-065 Rotat(%):Dev.U:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-066 Rotat(%):Dev.U:C ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-067 Rotat(%):Dev.U:M ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-068 Rotat(%):Dev.U:Y ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-073 Rotat(%):ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-074 Rotat(%):ITB ClnU ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
SM 4-227 M0AC/M257
7-803-075 Rotat(%):Fus.Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-076 Rotat(%):Fus.Roll ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-077 Rotat(%):Fus.Belt ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-078 Rotat(%):PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-079 Amt(%):ITB TC Btl ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

Displays how much of the unit's
expected lifetime has been used up.
-091 to Displays the value given by the following formula:

-108 (Current printouts / Target printouts) x 100. This shows how much of the
unit's expected lifetime has been used up.
The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of
printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that
unit. If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters
the end condition, even though the Page% counter is still less than 100%.
7-803-091 Page (%): PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-092 Page (%): PCU: C ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-093 Page (%): PCU: M ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-094 Page (%): PCU: Y ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-095 Page (%):Dev.U:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-096 Page (%):Dev.U:C ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-097 Page (%):Dev.U:M ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-098 Page (%):Dev.U:Y ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-103 Page (%):ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-104 Page(%):ITB Cln U ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-105 Page(%):Fus.Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-106 Page(%):Fus.Roll ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-107 Page(%):Fus.Belt ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7-803-108 Page(%):PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
M0AC/M257 4-228 SM
7804 [PM Counter Reset]
Maintenance
Reference
(Unit, [Color])
System
Clears the PM counter.
Press the Enter key after the machine asks "Execute?", which will store
the PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the
value of the current PM counter (SP7-803) to "0".
7-804-001 Paper CTL -
7-804-002 PCU: Bk ENG -
7-804-003 PCU: C ENG -
7-804-004 PCU: M ENG -
7-804-005 PCU: Y ENG -
7-804-006 PCU: All ENG -
7-804-007 Dev. Unit:Bk ENG -
7-804-008 Dev. Unit:C ENG -
7-804-009 Dev. Unit:M ENG -
7-804-010 Dev. Unit:Y ENG -
7-804-011 Dev. Unit:All ENG -
7-804-017 ITB Unit ENG -
7-804-018 ITB Cleaning Unit ENG -
7-804-019 Fusing Unit ENG -
7-804-020 Fusing Roller ENG -
7-804-021 Fusing Belt ENG -
7-804-022 PTR Unit ENG -
7-804-023 TC Bottle ENG -
7-804-100 All ENG -
7807 [Reset SC/Jam]
SM 4-229 M0AC/M257
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
7-807-001 - *CTL -
7832 [Display Self-Diagnose]
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
7-832-001 - *CTL -
7836 [Resident Memory]
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
7-836-001 - *CTL -
7853 [Replace Counter]
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
7-853-001 PCU: BK ENG
7-853-002 PCU: C ENG
7-853-003 PCU: M ENG
7-853-004 PCU: Y ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-005 Dev.Unit: BK ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-006 Dev.Unit: C ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-007 Dev.Unit: M ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-008 Dev.Unit: Y ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-013 Image Transfer ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-014 ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-015 Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-016 Fusing Roller ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
7-853-017 Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
M0AC/M257 4-230 SM
7-853-018 PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Maintenance
Reference
7-853-019 TC Bottle ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
System
7855 [Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
 [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
 [B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
 The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].

The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each
coverage range are displayed with the following SPs.
 Color1 counter: SP8601-021
7-855-001 Coverage Range 1 *CTL [1 to 200 / 5 /1%/step]
7-855-002 Coverage Range 2 *CTL [1 to 200 / 20 /1%/step]
7901 [Assert Info]
Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The

data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis. DFU
7-901-001 File Name *CTL -
7-901-002 Number of Lines
7-901-003 Location
7904 [Near End Setting]
Selects the time between near end and end.

0: three days, 1: five days, 2: seven days
SM 4-231 M0AC/M257
7-904-001 PCU: K *ENG [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]
7-904-002 PCU: Col *ENG [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]
7-904-004 ITB *ENG [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]
7-904-006 Fusing Unit *ENG [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ]
7906 [Prev.U PM Counter]
(Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
-001 to -019 Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance
units.
7-906-001 Page: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-002 Page: PCU: C ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-003 Page: PCU: M ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-004 Page: PCU: Y ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-005 Page:Dev. Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-006 Page:Dev. Unit:C ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-007 Page:Dev. Unit:M ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-008 Page:Dev. Unit:Y ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-013 Page:ITB Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-014 Page:ITB Cln Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-015 Page: Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-016 Page:FusingRoller ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-017 Page: Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-018 Page: PTR Unit ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
7-906-019 Page:TC Bottle ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
-031 to -049 Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous
maintenance units.
7-906-031 Rotation: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
M0AC/M257 4-232 SM
7-906-032 Rotation: PCU: C ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Maintenance
Reference
7-906-033 Rotation: PCU: M ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
System
7-906-034 Rotation: PCU: Y ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-035 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-036 Rotat:Dev.Unit:C ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-037 Rotat:Dev.Unit:M ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-038 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Y ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-043 Rotation:ITB Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-044 Rotat:ITBCln.Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-045 Rotat:Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-046 Rotat:Fus.Roller ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-047 Rotat:Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mg/step]
7-906-048 Rotation:PTR Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-906-049 Amt:ITB TC Bottle ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mg/step]
-061 to Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit
-079 or toner cartridge.
7-906-061 Rotat.(%):PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-062 Rotat.(%):PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-063 Rotat.(%):PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-064 Rotat.(%):PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-065 Rotat(%):Dev.U:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-066 Rotat(%):Dev.U:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-067 Rotat(%):Dev.U:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-068 Rotat(%):Dev.U:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-073 Rotat(%):ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-074 Rotat(%):ITB ClnU ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
SM 4-233 M0AC/M257
7-906-075 Rotat(%):Fus.Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-076 Rotat(%):Fus.Roll ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-077 Rotat(%):Fus.Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-078 Rotat(%):PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-079 Amt(%):ITB TC Btl ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
-091 to Displays the value given by the following formula:

-108 (Current count / Yield count) x 100, where "Current count" is the current
values in the counter for the part, and "Yield count" is the recommended
yield.
7-906-091 Page %: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-092 Page %: PCU: C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-093 Page %: PCU: M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-094 Page %: PCU: Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-095 Page (%):Dev.U:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-096 Page (%):Dev.U:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-097 Page (%):Dev.U:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-098 Page (%):Dev.U:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-103 Page (%):ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-104 Page(%):ITB Cln U ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-105 Page(%):Fus.Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-106 Page(%):Fus.Roll ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-107 Page%:Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
7-906-108 Page%:PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1%/step]
M0AC/M257 4-234 SM
Maintenance
7931 [Toner Bottle Bk]
Reference
System
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
7-931-001 Machine Serial ID *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-002 Cartridge Ver *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-003 Brand ID *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-004 Area ID *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-005 Product ID *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-006 Color ID *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-007 Maintenance ID *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-008 New Product Info. *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-009 Recycle Counter *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-931-010 Date *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
7-931-011 Serial No. *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
7-931-012 Toner Remaining *ENG [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
7-931-013 EDP Code *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-014 End History *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step ]
7-931-015 Refill Info. *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
7-931-016 Attach:TtlCounter *ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-931-017 Attach:ClrCounter *ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-931-018 End: Total Counter *ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-931-019 End: Color Counter *ENG [ 0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step ]
7-931-020 Attachment Date *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
7-931-021 End Date *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
SM 4-235 M0AC/M257
7932 [Toner Bottle C]
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
7-932-010 Date *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
M0AC/M257 4-236 SM
Maintenance
7933 [Toner Bottle M]
Reference
System
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
7-933-010 Date *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
SM 4-237 M0AC/M257
7934 [Toner Bottle Y]
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
7-934-010 Date *ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
M0AC/M257 4-238 SM
Maintenance
7935 [TonerBttl Log1 to 5:Bk]
Reference
System
7-935-001 Serial No. *ENG Displays the toner bottle
information log 1 for Bk.
7-935-002 Attachment Date
7-935-003 Attach:TtlCounter
7-935-004 Refill Info.




SM 4-239 M0AC/M257
7936 [TonerBttl Log1 to 5:C]

information log 1 for M.




M0AC/M257 4-240 SM
Maintenance
7937 [TonerBttl Log1 to 5:M]
Reference
System
information log 1 for C.




SM 4-241 M0AC/M257
7938 [TonerBttl Log1 to 5:Y]

information log 1 for Y.




7950 [UnitReplace Date]
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
7-950-001 ITB Unit *ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1/step]
M0AC/M257 4-242 SM
7-950-003 PTR Unit *ENG
Maintenance
Reference
7-950-004 Fusing Unit *ENG
System
7-950-013 PCU:Bk *ENG
7-950-014 PCU:C *ENG
7-950-015 PCU:M *ENG
7-950-016 PCU:Y *ENG
7951 [Remain.DayCounter]
Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.
7-951-001 Page: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
7-951-002 Page: PCU: C ENG
7-951-003 Page: PCU: M ENG
7-951-004 Page: PCU: Y ENG
7-951-005 Page:Dev. Unit:Bk ENG
7-951-006 Page:Dev. Unit:C ENG
7-951-007 Page:Dev. Unit:M ENG
7-951-008 Page:Dev. Unit:Y ENG
7-951-013 Page:ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
7-951-014 Page:ITB ClnUnit ENG
7-951-015 Page: Fusing Unit ENG
7-951-016 Page:Fusing Roll ENG
7-951-017 Page: Fusing Belt ENG
7-951-018 Page: PTR Unit ENG
7-951-031 Rotation: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
7-951-032 Rotation: PCU: C ENG
7-951-033 Rotation: PCU: M ENG
SM 4-243 M0AC/M257
7-951-034 Rotation: PCU: Y ENG
7-951-035 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Bk ENG
7-951-036 Rotat:Dev.Unit:C ENG
7-951-037 Rotat:Dev.Unit:M ENG
7-951-038 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Y ENG
7-951-039 Rotat:Dvloper:Bk ENG
7-951-040 Rotat:Dvloper:C ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
7-951-041 Rotat:Dvloper:M ENG
7-951-042 Rotat:Dvloper:Y ENG
7-951-043 Rotat:ITB Unit ENG
7-951-044 Rotat:ITB ClnUnit ENG
7-951-045 Rotat:Fusing Unit ENG
7-951-046 Rotat:Fusing Roll ENG
7-951-047 Rotat:Fusing Belt ENG
7-951-048 Rotat:PTR Unit ENG
7-951-049 Rotat:ITB TC Bttl ENG
7952 [PM Yield Setting]
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
7-952-001 Rotat:ITB Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 96306000 / 1000

mm/step]
7-952-002 Rotat:ITB Cln Unit [0 to 999999999 / 149534000/ 1000

mm/step]
7-952-003 Rotat:Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 253408000 / 1000

mm/step]
7-952-004 Rotat:Fusing Roll ENG [0 to 999999999 / 188258000/ 1000

mm/step]
M0AC/M257 4-244 SM
7-952-005 Rotat:Fusing Belt ENG [0 to 999999999 / 188258000/ 1000
Maintenance
mm/step]
Reference
System
7-952-006 Rotat:PTR Unit ENG [0 to 999999999 / 149534000/ 1000
mm/step]
7-952-007 Amt:ITB TC Bottle ENG [0 to 999999999 / 300000 / 1000 mg/step]
7-952-011 Page:ITB Unit ENG [1 to 999999 / 100000 / 1 sheet/step]
7-952-012 Page:ITB Cln Unit ENG [1 to 999999 / 180000/ 1 sheet/step]
7-952-013 Page: Fusing Unit ENG [1 to 999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet/step]
7-952-014 Page: Fusing Roll ENG [1 to 999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet/step]
7-952-015 Page: Fusing Belt ENG [1 to 999999 / 120000 / 1 sheet/step]
7-952-016 Page: PTR Unit ENG [1 to 999999 / 180000/ 1 sheet/step]
7-952-021 Day Thresh:PCU:Bk ENG Adjusts the threshold day of the near end
for each PM unit.
7-952-022 Day Thresh:PCU:C ENG
[1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
7-952-023 Day Thresh:PCU:M ENG These threshold days are used for
@Remote alarms.
7-952-024 Day Thresh:PCU:Y ENG
7-952-025 DayThrsh:Dev.U:Bk ENG
7-952-026 DayThrsh:Dev.U:C ENG
7-952-027 DayThrsh:Dev.U:M ENG
7-952-028 DayThrsh:Dev.U:Y ENG
7-952-033 DayThresh:ITB U ENG
7-952-034 DayThresh:ITB Cln ENG

ENG
7-952-035 DayThresh:Fus.Unt
7-952-036 DayThresh:Fus.Rll ENG
7-952-037 DayThresh:Fus.Blt ENG
7-952-038 Rotation PCU Bk ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
7-952-039 Rotation PCU C ENG
SM 4-245 M0AC/M257
7-952-040 Rotation: PCU: M ENG
7-952-041 Rotation: PCU: Y ENG
7-952-042 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Bk ENG
7-952-043 Rotat:Dev.Unit:C ENG
7-952-044 Rotat:Dev.Unit:M ENG
7-952-045 Rotat:Dev.Unit:Y ENG
7-952-050 Page: PCU: Bk ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7-952-051 Page: PCU: C ENG
7-952-052 Page: PCU: M ENG
7-952-053 Page: PCU: Y ENG
7-952-054 Page:Dev.Unit:Bk ENG
7-952-055 Page:Dev.Unit:C ENG
7-952-056 Page:Dev.Unit:M ENG
7-952-057 Page:Dev.Unit:Y ENG
7953 [OP Env.Log:PCU:Bk]
Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation

environment.
T: Temperature (°C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
7-953-001 T<=0 ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-953-002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
7-953-003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
7-953-004 T<=5: 70<=H<=100
7-953-005 5<T<15:0<=H<30
7-953-006 5<T<15:30<=H<55
7-953-007 5<T<15:55<=H<80
7-953-008 5<T<15:80<=H<=100
M0AC/M257 4-246 SM
7-953-009 15<=T<25:0<=H<30
Maintenance
Reference
7-953-010 15<=T<25:30<=H<55
System
7-953-011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80 ENG [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
7-953-012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=F
7-953-013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30
7-953-014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55
7-953-015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80
7-953-016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=F
7-953-017 30<=T:0<=H<30
7-953-018 30<=T:30<=H<55
7-953-019 30<=T:55<=H<80
7-953-020 30<=T:80<=H<=100
7954 [OP Env. Log Clear]
Clears the operation environment log.
7-954-001 - ENG [0 or 1 / - / 1/step]
SM 4-247 M0AC/M257
4.10.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications
(C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
F: Fax application.
document server.
P: Print application.
S: Scan application.
M0AC/M257 4-248 SM
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.
Maintenance
(document server) The L: counters work differently case by case.
Reference
System
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
SM 4-249 M0AC/M257
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,

Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
M0AC/M257 4-250 SM
Maintenance
Reference
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows
System
print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters
are recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
SM 4-251 M0AC/M257
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
 All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
These SPs count the number of times each

T:Total Jobs *CTL
8001 application is used to do a job.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
8004 P:Total Jobs *CTL
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
 When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not
(the document server is not used).
 A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are
not counted separately).
 A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission
has been completed.
 A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
 The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
 When a print job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
 When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
 When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
 When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
 When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
M0AC/M257 4-252 SM
 When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
Maintenance
Reference
System
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8061 T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Not used
8064 P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Not used
8067 O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Not used
8-06x-001 Sort Not used
8-06x-002 Stack Not used
8-06x-003 Staple Not used
8-06x-004 Booklet Not used
8-06x-005 Z-Fold Not used
8-06x-006 Punch Not used
8-06x-007 Other Not used
8-06x-008 Inside-Fold Not used
8-06x-009 Three-IN-Fold Not used
8-06x-010 Three-OUT-Fold Not used
8-06x-011 Four-Fold Not used
8-06x-012 KANNON-Fold Not used
8-06x-013 Perfect-Bind Not used
8-06x-014 Ring-Bind Not used
8-06x-015 3rd Vendor Not used
SM 4-253 M0AC/M257
8071 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of
pages in the job, regardless of which application was used.
8074 P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
8077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
8-07x-001 1 Page 8-07x-008 21 to 50 Pages
8-07x-002 2 Pages 8-07x-009 51 to 100 Pages
8-07x-003 3 Pages 8-07x-010 101 to 300 Pages
8-07x-004 4 Pages 8-07x-011 301 to 500 Pages
8-07x-005 5 Pages 8-07x-012 501 to 700 Pages
8-07x-006 6 to 10 Pages 8-07x-013 701 to 1000 Pages
8-07x-007 11 to 20 Pages 8-07x-014 1001 to Pages
 For example: When a print job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
 Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
 For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the print job (SP 8072).
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
M0AC/M257 4-254 SM
8381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
Maintenance
by the customer. The counter for the
Reference
8384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
System
application used for storing the pages
8387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
8391 LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the machine.
8-391-001 A3/DLT, Larger
8-391-003 BannaerPaper
8411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/back

counted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.
Last pages printed only on one side are not
counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
8421 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
SM 4-255 M0AC/M257
8424 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
8427 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
8-42x-001 Simplex> Duplex
8-42x-004 Simplex Combine
8-42x-005 Duplex Combine
8-42x-006 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8-42x-012 Booklet
8-42x-013 Magazine
8-42x-014 2in1 + Booklet
8-42x-019 2in1 + Magazine
M0AC/M257 4-256 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
 Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
8431 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
8434 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
below with the print application.
8437 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
below with Other applications.
SM 4-257 M0AC/M257
8-43x-001 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
8-43x-002 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
8-43x-003 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps were
applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
8441 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
8444 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
printer application.
8447 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8-44x-001 A3
8-44x-002 A4
8-44x-003 A5
8-44x-004 B4
8-44x-005 B5
8-44x-006 DLT
8-44x-007 LG
8-44x-008 LT
8-44x-009 HLT
8-44x-010 Full Bleed
8-44x-254 Other (Standard)
M0AC/M257 4-258 SM
8-44x-255 Other (Custom)
Maintenance
Reference
System
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
8451 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8-451-001 Bypass Bypass Tray
8-451-002 Tray 1 Machine
8-451-003 Tray 2 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8-451-006 Tray 5 Not used
SM 4-259 M0AC/M257
8461 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
8464 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
8-46x-001 Normal
8-46x-002 Recycled
8-46x-003 Special
8-46x-004 Thick
8-46x-005 Normal (Back)
8-46x-006 Thick (Back)
8-46x-007 OHP
8-46x-008 Other
8471 PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8-471-001 < 49%
8-471-002 50% to 99%
8-471-003 100%
8-471-004 101% to 200%
8-471-005 201% <
M0AC/M257 4-260 SM
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
Maintenance
Reference
System
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge printing are
counted.
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
8484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL These SPs count the number of

pages printed in the Color Mode by
8504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
the print application.
8507 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL
8-50x-001 B/W
8-50x-002 Mono Color
8-50x-003 Full Color
8-50x-004 Single Color
8-50x-005 Two Color
8-50x-051 B/W(Banner)
8-50x-052 Full Color(Banner)
8-50x-053 Single Color(Banner)
SM 4-261 M0AC/M257
8-50x-054 Two Color(Banner)
8511 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8514 P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
8-51x-001 RPCS
8-51x-002 RPDL
8-51x-003 PS3
8-51x-004 R98
8-51x-005 R16
8-51x-006 GL/GL2
8-51x-007 R55
8-51x-008 RTIFF
8-51x-009 PDF
8-51x-010 PCL5e/5c
8-51x-011 PCL XL
8-51x-012 IPDL-C
8-51x-013 BM-Links Japan Only
8-51x-014 Other
8-51x-015 IPDS
8-51x-016 XPS
 SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
M0AC/M257 4-262 SM
8521 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
Reference
Not used
System
8524 P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Not used
8-52x-001 Sort
8-52x-002 Stack
8-52x-003 Staple
8-52x-004 Booklet
8-52x-005 Z-Fold
8-52x-006 Punch
8-52x-007 Other
8-52x-008 Inside-Fold
8-52x-009 Three-IN-Fold
8-52x-010 Three-OUT-Fold
8-52x-011 Four-Fold
8-52x-012 KANNON-Fold
8-52x-013 Perfect-Bind
8-52x-014 Ring-Bind
8-52x-015 3rd Vender
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
SM 4-263 M0AC/M257
8531 Staples *CTL Not used
8-531-001 Staples
8-531-002 Stapless
8551 T:FIN Books *CTL Not used
8-551-001 Perfect-Bind
8-551-002 Ring-Bind
8554 T:FIN Books *CTL Not used
8-554-001 Perfect-Bind
8-554-002 Ring-Bind
8561 T:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8564 P:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8567 O:A Sheet Of Paper *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
8-56x-001 Total: Over A3/DLT
8-56x-002 Total: Under A3/DLT
8-56x-003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT
8-56x-004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT
M0AC/M257 4-264 SM
Maintenance
8581 T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]
Reference
System
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the
machine.
8-581-001 Total
8-581-002 Total: Full Color
8-581-003 B&W/Single Color
8-581-004 Development: CMY
8-581-005 Development: K
8-581-008 Print: Color
8-581-009 Print: B/W
8-581-010 Total: Color
8-581-011 Total: B/W
8-581-012 Full Color: A3
8-581-013 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8-581-014 Full Color Print
8-581-015 Mono Color Print
8-581-016 Full Color GPC
8-581-017 Twin Color Mode Print
8-581-018 Full Color Print (Twin)
8-581-019 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8-581-020 Full Color Total (CV)
8-581-021 Mono Color Total (CV)
8-581-022 Full Color Print (CV)
8-581-023 Eco Color Print (FC)
SM 4-265 M0AC/M257
8-581-024 Eco Color Print (Bk)
8-581-025 Total: Color (Eco Bk)
8-581-026 Total: B/W (Eco Bk)
8-581-027 Total: Color (Eco FC)
8-581-028 Development: CMY(A3)
8-581-029 Development: K(A3)
8-581-030 Total: Color(A3)
8-581-031 Total: B/W(A3)
8584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8-584-001 B/W
8-584-002 Mono Color
8-584-003 Full Color
8-584-004 Single Color
8-584-005 Two Color
8591 O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8-591-001 A3/DLT -
8-591-002 Duplex
8-591-005 Banner
M0AC/M257 4-266 SM
Maintenance
8601 T:Cvg Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Reference
System
These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
pages for each printing mode.
8-601-001 Cvg: B/W% -
8-601-002 Cvg : FC%
8-601-011 Cvg: BW Pages
8-601-012 Cvg: FC Pages
8-601-021 Cvg Counter 1
8-601-031 CvgCounter 1 (YMC)
8604 P:Cvg Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
pages for each printing mode.
8-601-001 Cvg: B/W% -
8-601-002 Cvg: Single Color%
8-601-003 Cvg: Two Color%
8-601-004 Cvg: Full Color%
SM 4-267 M0AC/M257
8617 SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
8-617-001 SDK1 These SPs count the total printout pages for
each SDK applicaion.
8-617-002 SDK2
8-617-003 SDK3
8-617-004 SDK4
8-617-005 SDK5
8-617-006 SDK6
8-617-007 SDK7 These SPs count the total printout pages for
each SDK applicaion.
8-617-008 SDK8
8-617-009 SDK9
8-617-010 SDK10
8-617-011 SDK11
8-617-012 SDK12
8621 Func Use Counter *CTL -
8-621-001 to Function-001 to Function-064

8-621-064
8771 Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the

development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8-771-001 Total
8-771-002 K
8-771-003 Y
8-771-004 M
8-771-005 C
M0AC/M257 4-268 SM
8781 Toner Bottle Info. *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
Reference
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
System
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
8-781-001 BK The number of black-toner bottles
8-781-002 Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
8-781-003 M The number of magenta-toner bottles
8-781-004 C The number of cyan-toner bottles
8801 Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1%
steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure
in increments of 10 (10% steps).
8-801-001 K
8-801-002 Y
8-801-003 M
8-801-004 C
8811 Eco Counter
Displays the counter for each mode.
8-811-001 Eco Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8-811-002 Color *CTL
8-811-003 Full Color *CTL
8-811-004 Duplex *CTL
8-811-005 Combine *CTL
8-811-006 Color (%) *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
SM 4-269 M0AC/M257
8-811-007 Full Color (%) *CTL
8-811-008 Duplex (%) *CTL
8-811-009 Combine (%) *CTL
8-811-010 Paper Cut (%) *CTL
8-811-051 Sync Eco Total *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8-811-052 Sync Color *CTL
8-811-053 Sync Full Color *CTL
8-811-054 Sync Duplex *CTL
8-811-055 Sync Combine *CTL
8-811-056 Sync Color (%) *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
8-811-057 Sync Full Color (%) *CTL
8-811-058 Sync Duplex (%) *CTL
8-811-059 Sync Combine (%) *CTL
8-811-060 Sync Paper Cut (%) *CTL
8-811-101 Eco Totalr:Last *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8-811-102 Color:Last *CTL
8-811-103 Full Color:Last *CTL
8-811-104 Duplex:Last *CTL
8-811-105 Combine:Last *CTL
8-811-106 Color (%):Last *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
8-811-107 Full Color (%):Last *CTL
8-811-108 Duplex (%):Last *CTL
8-811-109 Combine (%):Last *CTL
8-811-110 Paper Cut (%):Last *CTL
8-811-151 Sync Eco Ttalr: *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8-811-152 Sync Color:Last *CTL
M0AC/M257 4-270 SM
8-811-153 Sync Full Color:Last: *CTL
Maintenance
Reference
8-811-154 Sync Duplex:Last *CTL
System
8-811-155 Sync Combine:Last *CTL
8-811-156 Sync Color (%):Last *CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
8-811-157 Sync Full Color (%):Last *CTL
8-811-158 Sync Duplex (%):Last *CTL
8-811-159 Sync Combine (%):Last *CTL
8-811-160 Sync Paper Cut (%):Last *CTL
8851 Cvr Cnt: 0-10% *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage
of each color is from 0% to 10%.
8-851-011 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK
8-851-012 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y
8-851-013 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M
8-851-014 0 to 2%: C 8 851 34 5 to 7%: C
8-851-021 3 to 4%: BK 8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK
8-851-022 3 to 4%: Y 8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y
8-851-023 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M
8-851-024 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C
8-861-001 BK
8-861-002 Y
8-861-003 M
SM 4-271 M0AC/M257
8-861-004 C
8-871-001 BK
8-871-002 Y
8-871-003 M
8-871-004 C
8881 Cvr Cnt: 31%- *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
of each color is 31% or higher.
8-881-001 BK
8-881-002 Y
8-881-003 M
8-881-004 C
8891 Page/Toner Bottle *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each
color.
8-891-001 BK
8-891-002 Y
8-891-003 M
8-891-004 C
8901 Page/Ink – Prev1 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
M0AC/M257 4-272 SM
These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each
Maintenance
color.
Reference
System
8-901-001 BK
8-901-002 Y
8-901-003 M
8-901-004 C
8911 Page/Ink – Prev2 *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for
each color.
8-911-001 BK
8-911-002 Y
8-911-003 M
8-911-004 C
8921 Cvr Cnt: Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
8-921-001 Coverage (%): BK -
8-921-002 Coverage (%): Y
8-921-003 Coverage (%): M
8-921-004 Coverage (%): C
8-921-011 Coverage/P: BK
8-921-012 Coverage/P: Y
8-921-013 Coverage/P: M
8-921-014 Coverage/P: C
8-921-031 Coverage(%):Eco BK -
8-921-032 Coverage(%):Eco Y
SM 4-273 M0AC/M257
8-921-033 Coverage(%):Eco M
8-921-034 Coverage(%):Eco C
8-921-041 Coverage/P:Eco BK
8-921-042 Coverage/P:Eco Y
8-921-043 Coverage/P:Eco M
8-921-044 Coverage/P:Eco C
8941 Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with
ISO Standards.
8-941-001 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time while
controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
8-941-002 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controller
saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
8-941-003 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing
background printing.
8-941-004 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
Includes time while machine is performing
background printing.
8-941-005 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performing

background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8-941-006 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
8-941-007 PrtJam Total time when paper jams have been staying
during printing.
8-941-008 OrgJam Total time when original jams have been staying
during printing.
M0AC/M257 4-274 SM
8-941-009 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
Maintenance
Reference
System
8961 Electricity Status
8-961-001 Ctrl Standby Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8-961-002 STR Time *CTL
8-961-003 Main Power Off Time *CTL
8-961-004 Reading and Printing *CTL

Time
8-961-005 Printing Time *CTL
8-961-006 Reading Time *CTL
8-961-007 Eng Waiting Time *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]
8-961-008 Low Power State Time *CTL
8-961-009 Silent State Time *CTL
8-961-010 Heater Off State Time *CTL
8-961-011 LCD on Time *CTL
8-961-101 Silent Print *CTL
8971 Unit Control
8-971-001 Engine Off Recovery *CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1/step]

Count
8-971-002 Power Off Count *CTL
8-971-003 Force Power Off Count *CTL
SM 4-275 M0AC/M257
8999 Adomin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1 /step]
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
8-999-001 Total
8-999-006 Printer: FC
8-999-007 Printer:BW
8-999-008 Printer:OneC
8-999-009 Printer:TwoC
8-999-013 Duplex
8-999-026 Printer:FC%
8-999-027 Printer:BW%
8-999-028 Printer:OneC%
8-999-029 Printer:TwoC%
M0AC/M257 4-276 SM
Input Check/ Output Check
4.11 INPUT CHECK/ OUTPUT CHECK
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.11.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE
When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Printer
5803 Reading
Description
0 1
5-803-001 1TRYSIZE (1 Tray Size Sensor) See table 1 following this table.
5-803-002 1TRYLIMSNS1 (1 Tray Paper

See table 2 following this table.
Height Sensor 1)
5-803-003 1TRYLIMSNS2 (1 Tray Paper

See table 2 following this table.
Height Sensor 2)
5-803-004 1TRYPESNS (1 Tray Paper

No paper Paper remaining
End Sensor)
5-803-005 1TRYUPSNS (1 Tray Upper

Not upper limit Upper limit
Limit Sensor)
5-803-006 HANDPESNS (Bypass Paper

No paper Paper remaining
End Sensor)
5-803-007 FEEDSNS (Paper Feed

Paper detected Paper not detected
Sensor)
5-803-008 EXTSNS (Paper Exit Sensor) Paper detected Paper not detected
5-803-009 EXTFULSNS (Paper Exit Full

Paper not full Paper full
Sensor)
SM 4-277 M0AC/M257
5-803-010 FUOUTSNS (Fusing Exit Paper not

Paper detected
Sensor) detected
5-803-011 FUINSNS (Fusing Entrance

Sensor)
5-803-013 DUPINSNS (Duplex Entrance

Sensor)
5-803-014 DUPOUTSNS (Duplex Exit

Sensor)
5-803-015 REGSNS (Registration Sensor) Paper detected Paper not detected
5-803-016 VFEEDSNS (Vertical Transport

Sensor)
5-803-018 TESNS_Y (Toner End Sensor:

Toner end Toner remaining
Y)
5-803-019 TESNS_C (Toner End Sensor:

C)
5-803-020 TESNS_M (Toner End Sensor:

M)
5-803-021 TESNS_K (Toner End Sensor:

K)
5-803-022 DRMSNS_K (Drum Phase Actuator not Actuator detected

Sensor: K) detected
5-803-023 DRMSNS_FC (Drum Phase Actuator not Actuator detected

Sensor: CMY) detected
5-803-024 INLOK1 (Interlock SW 1) Front door open Front door closed
5-803-025 INLOK2 (Interlock SW 2) Front door open Front door closed
5-803-026 FDOOR (Front Door Sensor) Closed Open
5-803-031 WRSHSNS (LDU Shutter

Closed Open
Sensor)
5-803-032 WTBSET (Waste Toner Bottle

Set Not set
Set Sensor)
M0AC/M257 4-278 SM
5-803-033 WTFULSNS (Waste Toner

Not full Full
Maintenance
Bottle Full Sensor)
Reference
System
5-803-034 TR1NEW (ITB Unit: New) Not new New
5-803-036 FUEXFAN1_LOK (Fusing Fan Normal Lock

1: Lock)
5-803-037 FUEXFAN2_LOK (Fusing Fan Normal Lock

2: Lock)
5-803-041 IMAGEFORMFAN_LOK (Drive Normal Lock

Unit Fan: Lock)
5-803-044 DEVFAN2_LOK (Development Normal Lock

Fan 2: Lock)
5-803-045 DEVFAN_LOK (Development Normal Lock

Fan 1: Lock)
5-803-046 IMAGINGFAN_LOK (Laser Unit Normal Lock

Fan: Lock)
5-803-047 FEEDFAN_LOK (Feed Fan: Normal Lock

Lock)
5-803-048 TR1SNS (Transfer Belt Contact

Not contact Contact
Sensor)
5-803-049 TR2SNS (Paper Transfer Roller

Not contact Contact
Contact Sensor)
5-803-050 DRMT_BK_LOK (Drum Motor: Normal Lock

K: Lock)
5-803-051 FUMT_LOK (Fusing Motor: Normal Lock

Lock)
5-803-052 DVMT_FC_LOK (Development Normal Lock

Motor:CMY: Lock)
5-803-053 DRMT_FC_LOK (Drum Normal Lock

Motor:CMY: Lock)
5-803-054 PP_D_SC (PP: D: SC) SC detected No SC
SM 4-279 M0AC/M257
5-803-055 PP_CB_SC (PP: CB: SC) SC detected No SC
5-803-056 PP_T1T2_SC (PP: T1T2: SC) SC detected No SC
5-803-057 FUGEN (Fusing: Generation) Not detected Detected
5-803-058 FUNEW (Fusing: New) New Not new
5-803-059 FU_VER (Fusing: Destination) [ 0 to 15 / 0 / 1 /step ]
5-803-060 FUSET (Fusing: Set) Set Not set
5-803-061 ZEROX1 (Zero-cross Signal) Not detected Detected
5-803-062 FUCOMP (Fusing:

Detected Not detected
Temperature)
5-803-067 UPPER (Upper Cover Sensor) Closed Open
5-803-072 BCU_VER (BCU Version) [ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step ]
5-803-073 PM24V (Polygon Motor 24V) Power supplied Power not supplied
5-803-074 REV_P_SNS (Inverter Sensor) Inverter gate open Inverter gate close
5-803-075 P_FUSNSFAN_LOK (Fusing Normal Lock

Cooling Fan: Lock)
5-803-076 P_TNFAN_LOK (Toner Supply Normal Lock

Fan: Lock)
5-803-077 BANK_FEEDSNS1 (Bank Feed

Sensor 1)

Sensor 2)

Sensor 3)
5-803-080 BANK_VFEEDSNS1 (Bank

Vertical Feed Sensor 1)


M0AC/M257 4-280 SM
5-803-094 GAVD Op/Cl Dtct (LD OFF

- -
Maintenance
Check)
Reference
System
Table 1: Paper Size Switch (Tray 1)
Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Paper size sensor
North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3
LG LG 1 1 0
A4 A4 1 1 1
0 1 1
LT LT 1 0 1
Exe Exe 0 1 0
HLT A5 0 0 1
A6 A6 0 0 0
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-131-001.
*2: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-131-001.
Table 2: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full ~ 350 0 0
350 ~ 150 1 0
150 ~ 50 1 1
50 ~ 0 0 1
SM 4-281 M0AC/M257
4.11.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
Printer
5804 Display Description
5-804-003 DRMT_BK:260mm/s (Drum Motor: K) -
5-804-010 FUMT:260mm/s (Fusing Motor) -
5-804-017 DVMT_FC:260mm/s (Development -

Motor: CMY)

Motor: CMY)

Motor: CMY)
5-804-024 DRMT_FC:260mm/s (Drum Motor: -

CMY)

CMY)

CMY)
5-804-031 FEEDMT:364mm/s (Feed Motor) -
5-804-039 REGMT:260mm/s (Registration Motor) -
M0AC/M257 4-282 SM
Maintenance
Reference
System
5-804-046 REVMT:CW:442mm/s (Inverter Motor) -
5-804-054 REVMT:CCW:442mm/s (Inverter -

Motor)

Motor)

Motor)

Motor)
5-804-062 HANDMT:CCW:260 (By-pass Motor) -
5-804-063 HANDMT:CCW:182 (By-pass Motor) -
5-804-064 HANDMT:CCW:85mm/s (By-pass -

Motor)
5-804-069 DUPMT:CCW:442mm/s (Duplex Motor) -
5-804-077 VFEEDMT:364mm/s (Vertical Feed -

Motor)

Motor)
5-804-079 VFEEDMT182mm/s (Vertical Feed -

Motor)
SM 4-283 M0AC/M257

Motor)
5-804-083 TR1SPMT:CW (Transfer Belt Contact -

Motor)
5-804-084 TR1SPMT:CCW (Transfer Belt Contact -

Motor)
5-804-085 TR2SPMT:CW (Paper Transfer Roller -

Contact Motor)
5-804-086 TR2SPMT:CCW (Paper Transfer Roller -

Contact Motor)
5-804-087 WTMT:CW (Toner Collection Motor) -
5-804-088 WTMT:CCW (Toner Collection Motor) -
5-804-089 1TRYUPMT:CW (1 Tray Lift Motor) -
5-804-090 1TRYUPMT:CCW (1 Tray Lift Motor) -
5-804-091 TNMT_K (Toner Supply Motor: K) -
5-804-092 TNMT_M (Toner Supply Motor: M) -
5-804-093 TNMT_C (Toner Supply Motor: C) -
5-804-094 TNMT_Y (Toner Supply Motor: Y) -
5-804-095 WRSHMT:CW (LDU Shutter Motor) -
5-804-096 WRSHMT:CCW (LDU Shutter Motor) -
5-804-102 FUEXFAN1_H (Fusing Fan 1) -
5-804-103 FUEXFAN1_L (Fusing Fan 1) -
5-804-104 PlgnMot: Std Spd (Polygon Motor) -
5-804-105 PlgnMot: Mid Spd (Polygon Motor) -
5-804-106 PlgnMot: Low Spd (Polygon Motor) -
5-804-107 FUEXFAN2_H (Fusing Fan 2) -
5-804-108 FUEXFAN2_L (Fusing Fan 2) -
M0AC/M257 4-284 SM
5-804-112 IMAGEFORMFAN (Drive Unit Fan) -
Maintenance
Reference
5-804-114 DEVFAN2 (Development Fan 2) -
System
5-804-115 DEVFAN (Development Fan 1) -
5-804-116 IMAGINGFAN (Laser Unit Fan) -
5-804-117 FEEDFAN (Feed Fan) -
5-804-118 PSUFAN (PSU Fan) -
5-804-120 DEVCL (Development Clutch) -
5-804-121 HANDSOL (By-pass Solenoid) -
5-804-123 1FEEDSOL (1 Tray Feed Solenoid) -
5-804-124 DIVSOL1 (Junction Gate Solenoid) -
5-804-126 P_FUSNSFAN_H (Fusing Cooling -

Fan)
5-804-127 P_TNFAN_H (Toner Supply Fan) -
5-804-130 PP_CDC_Y (PP: Charge DC: Y) -
5-804-131 PP_CDC_M (PP: Charge DC: M) -
5-804-132 PP_CDC_C (PP: Charge DC: C) -
5-804-133 PP_CDC_K (PP: Charge DC: K) -
5-804-134 PP_B_Y (PP: Development: Y) -
5-804-135 PP_B_M (PP: Development: M) -
5-804-136 PP_B_C (PP: Development: C) -
5-804-137 PP_B_K (PP: Development: K) -
5-804-138 PP_D (PP: D) -
5-804-139 PP_T1_Y (PP: T1: Y) -
5-804-140 PP_T1_M (PP: T1: M) -
5-804-141 PP_T1_C (PP: T1: C) -
5-804-142 PP_T1_K (PP: T1: K) -
SM 4-285 M0AC/M257
5-804-143 PP_T2+ (PP: T2: +) -
5-804-144 PP_T2- (PP: T2: -) -
5-804-147 PP_CAC_Y:260mm/s (PP: Charge AC: -

Y)

Y)

Y)
5-804-154 PP_CAC_M:260mm/s (PP: Charge -

AC: M)
5-804-155 PP_CAC_M:182mm/s (PP: Charge -

AC: M)
5-804-156 PP_CAC_M:85mm/s (PP: Charge AC: -

M)
5-804-161 PP_CAC_C:260mm/s (PP: Charge AC: -

C)

C)

C)
5-804-168 PP_CAC_K:260mm/s (PP: Charge AC: -

K)

K)

K)
5-804-181 HST_Y (HST Sensor: Y) -
5-804-182 HST_M (HST Sensor: M) -
5-804-183 HST_C (HST Sensor: C) -
5-804-184 HST_K (HST Sensor: K) -
M0AC/M257 4-286 SM
5-804-185 TM/P_F/Y (TM/P Sensor: Front/Y) -
Maintenance
Reference
5-804-186 P_M (P Sensor: M) -
System
5-804-187 TM/P_CE/C (TM/P Sensor: Center/C) -
5-804-188 TM/P_R/K (TM/P Sensor: Rear/K) -
5-804-189 PCL:FC (PCL: FC) -
5-804-190 PCL:BK (PCL: BK) -
5-804-191 TE_5V_CTL (Toner End Sensor 5V -

CTL)
5-804-216 LD1: K -
5-804-217 LD2: K -
5-804-218 LD1: C -
5-804-219 LD2: C -
5-804-220 LD1: M -
5-804-221 LD2: M -
5-804-222 LD1: Y -
5-804-223 LD2: Y -
5-804-224 BANK_MT1:364mm/s (Bank Motor 1) -
SM 4-287 M0AC/M257
5-804-239 BANK_FEEDCL1 (Bank Feed Clutch -

1)

2)

3)
5-804-242 BANK_PICKUPSOL1 (Bank Pick-up -

Solenoid 1)

Solenoid 2)

Solenoid 3)
M0AC/M257 4-288 SM
Test Pattern Printing
4.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.12.1 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.
 Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an
SC occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [OK].
3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern,
select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Cyan, 3: Magenta, 4: Yellow).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
 If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not
come up on a test pattern.
5. Exit SP mode.
7. Select the "List/ Test Print".
8. Select the "Color Demo Page".
9. Press the "OK" key to start the test print.
10. Check the test pattern.
11. Enter SP Mode, and then reset all settings to the default values.
 Turnning off the power can reset all settings to the default values.
12. Exit SP mode.
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
1 Vertical Line (1dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
2 Vertical Line (2dot) 14 Ttrimming Area
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
SM 4-289 M0AC/M257
Test Pattern Printing
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Horizontal)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checkered Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Patter Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Patter Large 22 Two Beam
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 23 Full Dot Pattern
M0AC/M257 4-290 SM
Firmware Update
4.13 FIRMWARE UPDATE
Maintenance
Reference
System
There are two methods for updating the firmware of this machine.
 SD Card Firmware Updating: The target firmware should be downloaded in an SD card
before visiting a customer site. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 (lower SD card
slot).
 RFU (Remote Firmware Updating): Firmware can be updated through the @remote
connection only if the machine is connected to @Remote.
4.13.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE
Type of firmware Function Location of firmware
Engine Printer engine control Flash ROM on the EGB
System Operating system
Network Support Network interface/ Security

control
Printer Feature application
RPCS Page description language

(RPCS for XPS driver data
process)
PCL Page description language (PCL) Flash ROM on the

controller board
PS3 Page description language
(PostScript3)
PDF Page description language
PowerSaving Sys Power saving system
Data Erase Onb HDD encryption/ Data overwrite
Web Support Document sever application
NetworkDocBox Feature application
SM 4-291 M0AC/M257
Firmware Update
4.13.2 SD CARD FIRMWARE UPDATING
Before You Begin

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD
cards:
 Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the
slot with the power on.
 Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
 Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
 Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
 Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get
exposed to shock or vibration.
 Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an
application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs
during a firmware upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
 "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send
data from the SD card to the machine.
 To select an item on the LCD, press the appropriate key on the operation panel.
 Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for
arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update
procedure.
File Arrangement
How the Program Works:
The firmware-update program for this machine searches the folder romdata for necessary
firmware. When you save the firmware in an SD card, make the folder "romdata". You must not
make the folder "romdata" in another folder.
 Do not make another firmware-update program folder in the folder "romdata".

 Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction for the firmware updating. You just keep only one
firmware update program folder in the folder "romdata".
The firmware program contains the file information. Before downloading the firmware from an SD
card, the firmware-update program reads the file information. The firmware is downloaded only
when the file information is correct.
 The file information can identify the firmware, but this information does not guarantee that
the data is not corrupted.
M0AC/M257 4-292 SM
Firmware Update
Maintenance
Reference
System
When you save the firmware, we recommend that you arrange folders and files as follows:
 In the folder romdata, make only one folder and use this folder for one model. Use the
machine code as the name of this folder.
 When you save some files other than firmware, make a new folder outside romdata. Save the
files in this folder. Do not save any file outside the folders. (The diagram shows an example.
Three folders, log, nvramdata, and prt, are outside romdata. These folders can store debug
logs, NVRAM data, and captured files respectively.)
Update Procedure
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Disconnect the printer from the network.
3. Remove the slot cover from slot 2 ( x 1).
 Do not use slot 1. Slot 1 is for customer use.

4. Turn the SD card face to the rear side of the printer, and insert it into slot 2.
5. Slowly push the SD card into the slot until it clicks.
6. Make sure that the SD card is locked in place.
 To remove the SD card, push it in until it clicks, and release it slowly. The slot pushes
out the SD card.
7. Turn on the main power switch.
8. Wait until a firmware name is shown on the display (about 1 minute).
 The firmware name is read from inside the firmware. The firmware name is not
changed even if you change the file name on your PC.
SM 4-293 M0AC/M257
Firmware Update
9. If the necessary firmware name is shown on the display, check the firmware version
with the left-arrow or right-arrow keys. Pressing the left or right-arrow key shows a
firmware name, firmware version and serial number in order.
10. To use a different firmware, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key to find the
necessary firmware.
11. To select the firmware, push the OK key. Make sure that the selected firmware is
high-lighted.
12. If you update more than one firmware program at the same time, find each of them and
select each of them. Make sure that the selected firmware is high-lighted.
 If the customer has used all of the slots, you have to keep an empty slot for this
procedure. Ask the customer to temporarily remove the SD card in slot 2.
13. To start firmware update, push the "UpDate" key. While each firmware is downloaded,
the underscores on the operation panel are replaced by stars.
14. Wait until the message "Update done" is shown.
16. Remove the SD card from the slot 2.
17. Attach the slot cover to the SD card slot 2 ( x 1).
18. Connect the printer to the network physically.
20. Print the Configuration Page to check that the every firmware is correctly updated:
Menu > List/Test Print > Config. Page
Error Handling
An error code is shown if an error occurs during the download. Error codes have the letter "E" and
a number. If an error occurs, the firmware is not correctly downloaded; see the error code table
(page 4-295 "Handling Firmware Update Errors") and do the necessary steps. After this,
download the firmware again.
Power Failure
If firmware update is interrupted by power failure, the firmware is not correctly downloaded. In this
condition, machine operation is not guaranteed. You have to download the firmware again.
M0AC/M257 4-294 SM
Firmware Update
4.13.3 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS
Maintenance
Reference
System
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code
consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard

21
disks.
Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card or data is

22
compressed data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second

23
update program started attempt fails, replace controller board.
SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use

24
another SD card.
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data
31 download required for the download, the re-start the
procedure.
Data incorrect after download Execute the recovery procedure for the
32 interrupted intended module download, then repeat the
installation procedure.
Incorrect SD card version Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the

34 module is not on the SD card) correct data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.)
then install again.
Module mismatch – Module on SD update data is incorrect. The data on the

35 SD card is not for this machine SD card is for another machine. Acquire
correct update data then install again.
SM 4-295 M0AC/M257
Firmware Update
Cannot write module – Cause SD update data is incorrect. The data on the
36 other than E34, E35 SD card is for another machine. Acquire
The version of the downloaded The version of the downloaded program has
program error not been authorized for the update.
38
Make sure that the program for updating is
the specified version.
Engine module download failed Replace the update data for the module on
40 the SD card and try again, or replace the
BCU.
Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on
44 failed the SD card and tray again, or replace
controller board.
Firmware updating is currently The setting of Update Firmware in the

prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to [Prohibit]
49
by an administrator. Change the setting to
[Do not Prohibit] and try again.
Electronic confirmation check SD update data is incorrect. The data on the

50 failed SD card is for another machine. Acquire
M0AC/M257 4-296 SM
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
4.14 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
Maintenance
Reference
System
 Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove an SD card. Make sure that
the controller and the BCU are correctly connected.
4.14.1 UPLOADING NVRAM DATA

Copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (referred to as "to upload NVRAM data" in this
section) before you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot upload NVRAM data, manually input the
necessary settings referring to the factory settings sheet stored inside the front door of the
mainframe after replacing the NVRAM.
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
4. Select SP5990-001 (ALL (Data List)).
5. Do the SP.
6. See if the SMC Report is correctly output.
 You may need the SMC Report when the machine did not complete an NVRAM data
upload or download (page 4-298 "Downloading NVRAM Data") correctly.
7. Go out of the SP mode.
9. Insert an SD card into SD card slot 2.
12. Select SP5-824-001(NVRAM Upload).
13. Push the "OK" key. The upload starts.
 When uploading ends correctly, the following file is made: NVRAM¥serial_number.NV
where "NVRAM" is the folder name in the SD card and "serial_number.NV" is the file
name with the extension ".NV". The serial number of the printer is used as the file name.
For example, if the serial number is M2570017, the file name is "M2570017.NV".
17. Install the SD slot cover to SD card slot 2.
18. Mark the SD card with, for example, the machine code. You need this SD card when
you download NVRAM data (page 4-298 "Downloading NVRAM Data").
SM 4-297 M0AC/M257
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
 One SD card can store the NVRAM data from two or more machines.
4.14.2 DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA

Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (referred to as "to download NVRAM data" in this
section) after you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot download NVRAM data, manually input the
necessary settings referring to the factory settings sheet stored inside the front door of the
mainframe.
1. Make sure that the main power switch is off. If it is on, turn it off.
2. Make sure that you have the correct SD card that contains the necessary NVRAM data.
3. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2.
6. Select SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Download).
7. Push the "OK" key. The download starts.
 The machine cannot do the download if the file name in the SD card is different from
the serial number of the printer (page 4-297 "Uploading NVRAM Data").
11. Install the SD slot cover on SD card slot 2.
13. Check that the NVRAM data is correctly downloaded.
 This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
 Total Count
 Serial Number
M0AC/M257 4-298 SM
Address Book Upload/Download
4.15 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.15.1 INFORMATION LIST
The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
 Registration No.
 User Code
 Local Authentication/ Authentication Lock-out
 Account ACL
 New Document Initial ACL
 LDAP Authentication
 Group Entry Number
 Group Name
 Account ACL
4.15.2 DOWNLOAD
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
3. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
4. Remove the SD slot cover from SD card slot 2 at the left rear side of the machine ( x
1).
5. Install the SD card into SD card slot 2 (for service use).
8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
 If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error
message is displayed.
 Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to
your location.
SM 4-299 M0AC/M257
Address Book Upload/Download
4.15.3 UPLOAD
1. Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
2. Remove the SD slot cover from SD card slot 2 at the left rear side of the machine ( x
1).
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2.
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
 The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

 The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor
uploaded.
 If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
M0AC/M257 4-300 SM
Capturing the Debug Logs
4.16 CAPTURING THE DEBUG LOGS
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.16.1 OVERVIEW
With this feature, you can save debug logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation panel
or 8GB SD Card) on an SD card. This function allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve
error information for analysis. The Capturing Log feature saves debug logs for:
 Controller
 Engine
 Operation panel
 In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After that,
when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the debug
log.
 However, this new feature saves the debug logs whenever a problem occurs, and then
this log can be saved to an SD card.
 You can retrieve the debug logs with an SD card without a network.
 Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of the
debug log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
 For everyday storage of the debug log, make sure to use the 8GB SD card provided as a
service part. Note that this SD card cannot be used to retrieve selected portions of the log
for problem analysis. It can only be used for long-term storage of the entire debug log.
Types of debug logs that can be saved
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage

capacity)
Controller  Saved at all times HDD (4 GB). Compressed when

debug log written to an SD card from the
(GW debug HDD (from 4 GB to about 300
log) MB),
8GB SD card
SM 4-301 M0AC/M257
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum storage

capacity)
Engine  When an engine SC occurs HDD (Up to 300 times),

debug log  When paper feeding/output stop 8GB SD card
by jams
 When the machine doors are
opened during normal operation
Operation  When a controller SC occurs Operation panel (400 MB /Up to

panel debug  When saving by manual operation 30 times)
log with the Number keys and the When updating the firmware for
Reset key (Press “Reset”, “0”, "1” the operation panel, the debug
and “C”(hold for 3 seconds)) logs are erased.
 When the operation unit detects 8GB SD card
an error
 When the operation panel detects
an error
Debug logs are not saved when:

 Memory is being erased
 Data encryption equipment is being installed
 Firmware configuration is being changed
 There is a power outage (power cord disconnected accidentally).
 The machine is shut down normally but data write to the HDD cannot be completed. For
example, when shutdown starts immediately after a paper jam, or when the front door is
opened and closed, the machine needs about 5 sec. to save the debug log after the machine
stops completely.
 Power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF mode /STR mode)
M0AC/M257 4-302 SM
Operation Log Security
Maintenance
Reference
System
The following operation logs related to security are never saved.
 User ID
 Password
 IP address
 Telephone number
 Encryption key
 Transition to SP mode
The following operation logs are never saved.
 Number keys (0 to 9) on the operation panel
 Soft keyboard on the touch panel display
 External keyboard
4.16.2 STORING THE DEBUG LOGS WITH SD CARD

If there is no hard disk installed on the machine, the debug log data can be stored to an SD card.
Required parts: 8GB SD Card (B6455040)
1. Insert the initialized SD Card into SD slot 2 on the side of the controller box.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Set the setting of SP 5-857-002 to “3(SD)”.
4. Execute “SP 5-857-120”.
 The folder “LogTraceServiceSlotSd” is generated inside the SD card

5. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch of the machine.
4.16.3 RETRIEVING DEBUG LOGS

Retrieve debug logs to identify the date of occurrence and details about problems.
 Analysis of the debug log is effective for problems caused by the software.
 Analysis of the debug log cannot identify defects in parts or problems caused by hardware.
SM 4-303 M0AC/M257
Procedure for Retrieving the Debug Log

1. Insert the SD card into the SD slot 2 on the side of the controller box.
 It is recommended to use the SD card provided as a service part. This is because

the log data can be acquired much faster than when using commercially available SD
cards.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Set the start date of the log with SP5857-101.
 Enter the date in the format yyyymmdd where yyyy is the year, mm the month, and dd the
day.
 For example, for March 28, 2013 you would enter "20130328"
 Enter a date 72 hours before the problem occurred.
4. Set the end date of the log with SP5857-102.
 Use the same format (yyyymmdd) that you used to enter the start date.
 For example, for March 31, 2013 you would enter "20130331".
5. Next, do SP5-857-103 to retrieve the debug log data and store it onto the SD card.
6. When the transfer is finished, the machine will display "Completed" on the operation panel.
 The length of time needed to transfer the debug log data can be affected by the type
and format of the SD card. Formatting the SD card with Panasonic SD Formatter
(freeware) is recommended.
The approximate time required for the transfer of the following debug logs are:
 Controller (GW): 2 to 20 min.
 Engine debut log: 2 min.
 Operation: 2 to 20 minutes
7. Make sure that the SD card access LED is off, then remove the SD card.
If you see the "Failed" message, remove the SD card, cycle the machine off/on, and then
repeat this procedure from Step 2.
Debug logs are saved with the following file names.
Debug Log Filename Format
Controller(GW) /LogTrace/machine no./watching/yyyymmdd_hhmmss_unique ID.gz
Engine /LogTrace/machine number/engine/yyyymmddhhmmss.gz
Operation Panel /LogTrace/machine no./opepanel/yyyymmdd_hhmmss.tar.gz
M0AC/M257 4-304 SM
SP Text Mode (Saving SMC List to SD Card)
4.17 SP TEXT MODE (SAVING SMC LIST TO SD CARD)
Maintenance
Reference
System
4.17.1 OVERVIEW
SP Text Mode
This function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD card inserted into service slot 2
or the operation panel card slot.
4.17.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2 or the operation panel SD card slot. Then turn the power
ON.
3. Enter the “Engine” in the SP mode(Service).
4. Select SP5-992 (SP Text Mode).
5. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
SM 4-305 M0AC/M257
6. Press [EXECUTE].
7. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
8. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
 The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

 Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
9. Press [End] to exit from SP mode.
4.17.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS

The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
follows.
Example:
A: Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)

B: The first four digits indicate the SP number. The last three digits indicate the branch number.
C: File creation date (YYYY/MM/DD)
D: File creation time (HH/MM/SS)
 A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
M0AC/M257 4-306 SM
4.17.4 ERROR MESSAGES
Maintenance
Reference
System
 Failed:
Read-only file system, No space left on device. If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause
the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
SM 4-307 M0AC/M257
DIP Switches
4.18 DIP SWITCHES
4.18.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch settings.
DIP SW No. Default
1 ON
3 OFF
M0AC/M257 4-308 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
None
SC Tables
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
5.1 SC TABLES
5.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
Summary
The "SC Table" section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not
controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The
table shows the classification of the SC codes.
Key Definition Reset Procedure
Controller The error has occurred in the See "Troubleshooting Procedure"

CTL
errors controller. in the table.
The error involves the fusing

Turn the main switch off and on.
unit. The machine operation is
A Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1).
disabled. The user cannot reset
Turn the main switch off and on.
the error.
The error involves one or some

specific units. The machine Turn the operation switch off and
B
operates as usual, excluding on.
the related units.
The error is logged. The

Other errors SC-code history is updated. The SC will not show. Only the
C
The machine operates as SC history is updated.
usual.
The machine operation is

disabled. You can reset the
machine by turning the
Turn the operation switch or main
D operation switch or main switch
power switch off and on.
off and on. If the error occurs
again, the same SC code is
displayed.
After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the main
SM 5-1 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
power switch on (SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can
check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected.
 If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the
connectors before you replace the PCBs.
 If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace
motors or sensors.
5.1.2 SC1XX: SCANNING
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
195 D Serial Number Mismatch
Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
 NVRAM defective
 BCU replaced without original NVRAM
1. Reinstall the original NVRAM in the replaced BCU.

2. Turn off and on the main power switch of the copier if a new
NVRAM is installed in the BCU.
5.1.3 SC 2XX: EXPOSURE
202 D Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed
within the specified time after turning on or changing speed
 Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board

 Defective polygon motor driver board
 Defective polygon motor.
1. Replace the laser unit.

2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the controller.
4. Replace the BCU.
M0AC/M257 5-2 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
203 D Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3
seconds after the polygon motor switches off.
 Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board

 Defective polygon motor
1. Check or replace the harness.

4. Replace the BCU.
204 D Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The polygon ready (SCRDY_N) signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the
laser diode is firing.
 Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board

 Defective polygon motor

4. Replace the BCU.
220 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD1

-001
222 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD1

-004
- - The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the
LDB [K], [Y], is not output for two seconds after laser unit turns on while
the polygon motor is rotating normally.
SM 5-3 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
 Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or

defective connection
 Defective laser synchronizing detector
 Defective LDB
 Defective BCU
1. Check the connectors.

4. Replace the BCU.
230 D FGATE ON error: K

-001
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K].
 Defective ASIC
 Poor connection between controller and BCU.
 Defective BCU
1. Check the connection between the controller board and the BCU.
2. Replace the BCU.
3. Replace the controller board.
230 D FGATE ON error: Y

-002
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position adjustment)
for start position [Y].
See SC230-001 for troubleshooting details.
M0AC/M257 5-4 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
230 D FGATE ON error: M

-003
for start position [M].
See SC230-001for troubleshooting details.
230 D FGATE ON error: C

-004
for start position [C].
231 D FGATE OFF error: K

-001
 The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after
processing the image in normal job or MUSIC (line position
adjustment) for end position [K].
 The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
231 D FGATE OFF error: Y

-002
adjustment) for end position [Y].
SM 5-5 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
231 D FGATE OFF error: M

-003
adjustment) for end position [M].
231 D FGATE OFF error: C

-004
adjustment) for end position [C].
240 C LD error: K
-001
241 C LD error: Y
-004
- - The bridge board detects LDB error a few times consecutively when
LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization.
 Worn-out LD
 Disconnected or broken harness of the LD
1. Replace the harness of the LD.

3. Replace the bridge board.
M0AC/M257 5-6 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting)
270 D Write ASIC communication error
 Write/read values were checked twice but failed to match.

 Parity error resulted after three attempts.
 Cycle the machine off/on.

 Harness between OPU and BCU loose, broken, defective
 Bridge board defective
 BCU defective
1. Replace the harness between the BCU and bridge board.

2. Replace the bridge board.
3. Replace the BCU.
285 D Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times.
 Pattern sampling error ( insufficient image density )

 Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment
 Defective image transfer belt unit
 Defective PCDU(s)
 Defective laser unit
1. Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDU(s).
2. Check if each toner bottle has enough toner.
3. Replace the ID sensor.
4. Replace the image transfer belt unit.
5. Replace the PCDU(s).
SM 5-7 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
290 D LDU shutter: Home position error
The machine does not detect the home position of the LDU shutter.
 Defective LDU shutter motor

 LDU shutter broken
 Overload on the LDU shutter motor
 Defective LDU shutter sensor
 Loose or disconnected harnesses between LDU shutter motor and
BCU
 Defective BCU
1. Replace the LDU shutter.

2. Replace the LDU shutter motor.
3. Replace the harnesses between LDU shutter motor and BCU.
4. Replace the BCU.
291 D LDU shutter: Open position error
The machine does not detect the correct open position of the LDU
shutter.

BCU
 Defective BCU

4. Replace the BCU.
M0AC/M257 5-8 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
292 D LDU shutter: Close position error
The machine does not detect the correct closed position of the LDU
shutter.

BCU
 Defective BCU

4. Replace the BCU.
293 D LDU shutter: Time-out error
The machine does not detect the output signal from the LDU shutter
sensor for 1 second after turning on or off the LDU shutter motor.


4. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-9 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
5.1.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING – 1
312 D AC charge output error [K]
313 D AC charge output error [M]
314 D AC charge output error [C]
315 D AC charge output error [Y]
- - The machine detects the AC charge output for each color 0.3 V or less
for 0.2 seconds after the machine has started to detect the AC charge
output.
 Loosen or broken harnesses to the HVPS: C/B

 Not set or broken PCDU
 Defective HVPS: C/B
1. Close the drum securing plate firmly.

2. Make sure that the PCDU terminal plate contacts the machine
terminal plate closely at the front side.
3. Set correctly or replace the PCDU.
4. Replace the harnesses to the HVPS: C/B.
5. Replace the HVPS: C/B.
M0AC/M257 5-10 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
325 D Color development motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds
while the motor START signal is on.
 Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque

caused by connected components.
 Defective motor.
1. Adjust the torque properly by replacing or cleaning the PCDU.

2. Replace the PCDU.
3. Replace the development motor: CMY if load torque is normal.
360 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K
361 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M
362 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C
363 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y
- -  The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor

exceeds the specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3020-002
twenty counts.
 The [Vt - Vtref] value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD
sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 5.0V) with
SP3020-001.
 Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected

 Harness between TD sensor and development unit defective
 Defective TD sensor.
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector

and harness between the TD sensor and PCDU for damage.
2. Check the drawer connector of the PCDU.
SM 5-11 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
364 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K
365 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M
366 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C
367 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y
- - The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below

the specified value with SP3020-004 (default: 0.5V) ten counts.
 TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective

 A drawer connector disconnected, loose, defective
 TD sensor defective
1. Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector

and harness between the TD sensor and development unit for
damage.
2. Check the drawer connector of the PCDU.
372 D TD sensor adjustment error: K
373 D TD sensor adjustment error: M
374 D TD sensor adjustment error: C
375 D TD sensor adjustment error: Y
- - SC is issued only if one of followings is satisfied.

 During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black,
magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the
specified value with SP3238-001 to -004 (default: 2.5V) ± 0.2V.
 The TD sensor output is 0.7 V or more when the Vcnt is 4.3 v.
 The adjusted Vcnt is 4.7 V or less.
M0AC/M257 5-12 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
 Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack
 TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
 TD sensor defective
 Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
 Different developer density from initial developer density
1. Remove the heat seal from each PCDU.

380 C Drum gear position sensor error: K
381 C Drum gear position sensor error: M, C, Y
- - The machine does not detect a change signal (H L or L H) for

2.4 seconds at the drum phase adjustment.
 Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor
1. Check the harnesses.

2. Clean or replace the drum gear position sensor.
396 D Drum/Development motor error: K
- - The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor:

K for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor: K turned on.
 Overload on the drum/development motor: K

 Defective drum/development motor: K
 Defective harness
 Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU
 Defective interlock system
SM 5-13 M0AC/M257
SC Tables

2. Check if torque output value for drum/development motor is proper
if not replace the unit.
3. Replace the drum/development motor: K.
4. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.
397 D Drum motor error: CMY
- - The machine detects a High signal from the drum motor: CMY for 2
seconds after the drum motor: CMY turned on.
 Overload on the drum motor: CMY

 Defective drum motor: CMY
 Defective harness
 Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU
 Defective interlock system

2. Check if torque output value for drum motor is proper if not replace
the unit.
3. Replace the drum motor: CMY.
4. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.
M0AC/M257 5-14 SM
SC Tables
5.1.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING - 2
Troubleshooting
400 D ID sensor adjustment error
When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC400".
The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is
more than the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3324-005 or less than
the value (default: 3.5V) specified with SP3324-006.
 Dirty or defective ID sensor

 ID sensor detection surface dirty
1. Check the harness of the ID sensor.

2. Clean with a damp cloth.
 Do not clean with a dry cloth or a cloth containing alcohol.

 After replacing the ID sensor, input the ID sensor correction

coefficient with SP3362-013 and -018. For details, refer to "ID
sensor board" in the Replacement and Adjustment section.
4. Check the spring at the PTR unit contact lever.
5. Replace the BCU.
6. Replace the ITB unit.
SM 5-15 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
442 D ITB contact motor error
The ITB contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at
the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
 Dirty ITB contact sensor

 ITB contact motor overload.
 Defective ITB contact motor
 Disconnected connector of ITB contact sensor or motor
 Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU.
 Disconnected cable
Check the operation of the ITB unit motor with SP5804-083 or 084.
No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB contact motor.
2. Replace the ITB contact motor.
Operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB contact sensor.
2. Replace the ITB contact sensor.
M0AC/M257 5-16 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
443 C ITB unit error
The machine detects the encoder sensor error.
 Disconnect or defective harness

 Defective ITB rotation sensor
 ITB unit installation error
 Defective ITB unit motor
 ITB unit motor overload
1. Check the harness connection of the ITB rotation sensor.

2. Check the trash or scratch on the encoder disc surface of the ITB
rotation sensor.
3. Check if the ITB unit is correctly set.
4. Replace the ITB unit motor.
5. Replace the ITB unit.
452 D PTR (Paper Transfer Roller) contact error
The PTR contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at
the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
 Defective PTR contact sensor

 Defective PTR contact motor
 PTR contact motor overload
 Broken +24V fuse on PSU
 Defective or disconnected harness.
 Defective BCU
Check the operation of the PTR contact motor with SP5804-085 or

086.
No operation:
1. Check the harness connection of the PTR contact motor.
2. Replace the PTR contact motor.
Operation:
1. Replace the PTR contact sensor.
SM 5-17 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
460 D Separation power pack output error
An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms. This SC
is issued if the BCU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D
(ac).
 Damaged insulation on the high-voltage supply cable

 Damaged insulation around the high-voltage power supply.
1. Replace the high-voltage supply cable.

2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit.
3. Replace the BCU.
491 D High voltage power: Drum/ development bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum
unit.
 High voltage leak

 Broken harness
 Defective drum unit
 Defective HVPS-CB board

3. Replace the HVPS-CB board.
M0AC/M257 5-18 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
492 C High voltage power: Image transfer/ paper transfer bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the

separation, image transfer belt or paper transfer roller.
 High voltage leak

 Broken harness
 Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit
 Defective HVPS: T1T2 board
1. Input "0V" in the following SP settings:

 SP2-326-001
 SP2-326-003
 SP2-407-001
2. Execute the "Process Control" with SP3011-001.
3. Replace the ITB unit if an SC occurs after the Process Control.
4. Replace the PTR unit if an SC does not occur after the Process
Control.
5. Replace the HVPS: T1T2 board.
495 D Toner collection motor error
The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is not set for one
second when the toner collection motor is turned off.
 Toner collection motor damaged

 Disconnect or defective harness
 Defective BCU

2. Replace the toner collection motor.
3. Replace the BCU
4. Check and retry the connecting procedure.
SM 5-19 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
498 C Temperature and humidity sensor error
 The thermistor output of the temperature sensor was not within the
prescribed range (0.2V to 3.5V).
 The thermistor output of the humidity sensor was not within the
prescribed range (0.01V to 2.4V).
 Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected, loose,

defective
 Temperature and humidity sensor defective
1. Check the connector and harness.

2. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
M0AC/M257 5-20 SM
SC Tables
5.1.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING
Troubleshooting
501 B 1st paper tray lift motor malfunction
502 B 2nd paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional paper feed unit)
503 B 3rd paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional paper feed unit)
504 B 4th paper tray lift motor malfunction (optional paper feed unit)
- - The paper lift sensor did not activate within 18 sec. after the tray lift
motor switched on.
 An obstruction (jammed paper, paper scraps, etc.) has blocked the

motor drive and caused an overload.
 Paper lift sensor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
 Paper lift sensor defective
 Tray lift motor connection loose, disconnected, or damaged
 Tray lift motor defective

2. Replace the tray lift motor.
3. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-21 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
520 B 2nd paper tray cooling fan error (optional paper feed unit)
521 B 3rd paper tray cooling fan error (optional paper feed unit)
522 B 4th paper tray cooling fan error (optional paper feed unit)
- - The motor lock signal error from the cooling fan is detected for 10
seconds after turning on the cooling fan.
 Disconnected harness of the cooling fan

 Defective cooling fan
 Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness of the cooling fan.

2. Replace the cooling fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
530 D Development fan 1 error
531 D Development fan 2 error
The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor
lock signal was first detected.
 Defective development fan 1 or development fan 2

 Disconnected or defective harness
 Defective BCU

2. Replace the development fan 1 (SC530) or development fan 2
(SC531).
3. Replace the BCU.
M0AC/M257 5-22 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
532 D Laser unit fan error
 Defective laser unit fan

 Defective BCU

2. Replace the laser unit fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
533 D Fusing fan 2 error
 Defective fusing fan 2

 Defective BCU

2. Replace the fusing fan 2.
3. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-23 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
534 D Fusing fan 1 error
 Defective fusing fan 1

 Defective BCU

2. Replace the fusing fan 1.
3. Replace the BCU.
535 D Toner supply fan error
 Defective toner supply fan

 Defective BCU

2. Replace the toner supply fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
M0AC/M257 5-24 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
536 D Drive unit fan error
 Defective drive unit fan

 Defective BCU

2. Replace the drive unit fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
537 D Fusing cooling fan error
The motor lock signal error from the fusing cooling fan is detected for
10 seconds after turning on the fusing cooling fan.
 Disconnected harness of the fusing cooling fan

 Defective fusing cooling fan
 Defective BCU
1. Check or replace the harness of the fusing cooling fan.

2. Replace the fusing cooling fan.
3. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-25 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
540 D Fusing/Paper exit motor error
The BCU receives the lock signal 2.0 seconds after turning on the
fusing/paper exit motor.
 Motor overload
 Defective fusing/paper exit motor
 Defective or disconnected connection for the fusing/paper exit
motor
1. Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.

2. Check or replace connector and harness for the fusing/paper exit
motor.
541 A Heating roller thermopile error
The temperature measured by the heating roller thermopile does not

reach 0°C for 6 seconds.
 Loose connection of the heating roller thermopile

 Defective heating roller thermopile
 Defective thermopile
1. Check if the heating roller thermopile is firmly connected.

2. Replace the heating roller thermopile.
M0AC/M257 5-26 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
542 A Heating roller warm-up error 1
 After the main switch is turned on or the cover is closed, the

increment of the heating roller temperature per 10 seconds is 30°C
or less. If this condition is detected five times consecutively, SC
542 is defined.
 The heating roller temperature does not reach 100°C for 15
seconds after the heating lamp on.
 The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready
temperature while 60 seconds after the heating lamp on.
 The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the
ready temperature for 30 seconds after the edge temperature of
the heating roller has reached the ready temperature.
 Dirty or defective thermopile

 Defective thermopile.
 Trash on the surface of the thermopile lens.
 Defected thermistor.
 Input voltage is over guaranteed value
 Defective heating roller lamp
1. Check if the thermopile is firmly connected.

2. Clean the surface of the thermopile lens.
3. Test the conductance for the thermopile and the heating roller
4. Replace the thermopile.
5. Replace the heating roller lamp.
SM 5-27 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
543 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (software error)
The detected fusing temperature stays at 245°C for 1 second.
 Defective PSU
 Defective BCU
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
544 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 (hardware error)
During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller

temperature reaches 250 °C.
 Defective PSU
 Defective BCU
 Defective heating roller thermistor (end)
 Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
3. Replace the heating roller thermistor (end).
M0AC/M257 5-28 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
545 A Heating roller fusing lamp consecutive full power 1
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the heating
roller fusing lamp keeps on full power for 30 seconds.
 Broken heating roller thermostat

 Broken heating roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the heating roller thermostat.

2. Replace the heating roller fusing lamp.
547 D Zero cross error (Fusing relay short)

-01
 The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the
heater relay is off when turning on the main power.
 The zero cross signal is not detected for 3 seconds even though
the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the
front door.
 The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross
signal is less than 45.
 Defective fusing lamp relay

 Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
1. Replace the PSU.

2. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-29 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
547 D Zero cross error (Fusing relay open)

-02
front door.
 Defective fusing lamp relay

 Defective fusing lamp relay circuit
 Short 24VS fuse
1. Replace the 24VS fuse (FU3/FU4).

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
547 D Zero cross error

-03
front door.
 Unstable power supply
 Check the power supply source.
M0AC/M257 5-30 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
551 A Heating roller thermistor (end) error 2
The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor (end) does

not reach 0°C for 6 seconds.
 Loose connection of heating roller thermistor (end)

1. Check that the heating roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.

552 A Heating roller warm-up error 2
The heating roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature
while 70 seconds after the heating lamp on.
 Dirty or defective thermistor (end)

 Heating roller fusing lamp broken
 Defected thermostat
 Defective heating roller fusing lamp
1. Check if the heating roller thermistor (end) is firmly connected.

553 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230°C or more for 1

second.
 Defective PSU
 Defective BCU

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-31 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
554 A Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 2 (hardware error)
The heating roller thermistor (end) detects 250°C or more.

 Defective PSU
 Defective BCU

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
555 A Heating roller lamp consecutive full power 2
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure
roller-fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 8 seconds or more.
 Broken heating roller thermostat

 Broken heating roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the heating roller thermostat.

557 C Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or

more in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and
SC557 occurs.
Noise (High frequency)
Check the power supply source.
M0AC/M257 5-32 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
559 A Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times. The paper
jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly.
This SC is activated only when SP1159-001 is set to "1" (default "0").
Paper jam in the fusing unit.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit. Then make sure
that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
561 A Pressure roller thermister error 3
The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor (center)

does not reach 0°C for 20 seconds.
 Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor (center)

 Defective pressure roller thermistor (center)
1. Check that the pressure roller thermistor (center)is firmly

connected.
2. Replace the pressure roller thermistor (center).
563 A Pressure roller overheat 3 (software error)
The detected fusing roller temperature stays at 230°C or more for 1

second.
 Defective PSU
 Defective BCU

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-33 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
564 A Pressure roller overheat 3 (hardware error)
The pressure roller thermistor (center) detects 250°C or more.
 Defective PSU
 Defective BCU
 Defective pressure roller thermistor (center)

2. Replace the PSU.
3. Replace the BCU.
565 A Pressure roller fusing lamp consecutive full power 3
When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition, the pressure
roller fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 30 seconds or more.
 Broken pressure roller thermostat

 Broken pressure roller fusing lamp
1. Replace the pressure roller fusing lamp.

2. Replace the pressure roller thermostat.
3. Replace the PSU.
M0AC/M257 5-34 SM
SC Tables
5.1.7 SC6XX: DEVICE COMMUNICATION
Troubleshooting
622 D 2nd paper bank (option) communication error
 While the bridge board communicates with an optional unit, an SC

code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs.
 The bridge board receives the break signal which is generated by
the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
 When the bridge board does not receive an OK signal from a
peripheral 100ms after sending a command to it. The bridge board
resends the command. The bridge board does not receive an OK
signal after sending the command 3 times.
 Cable problems
 Bridge board problems
 BCU problems
 PSU problems in the machine
 Main board problems in the peripherals
1. Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected.

2. Replace the bridge board or main board of peripherals.
3. Replace the BCU if no power is supplied to peripherals.
623 D 3rd Paper Bank (option) communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

When a communication error signal between the 2nd paper bank and
3rd paper bank is received.
 Loose or disconnected connector

Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed unit.
SM 5-35 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
624 D 4th Paper Bank (option) communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

When a communication error signal between the 3rd paper bank and
4th paper bank is received.
 Loose or disconnected connector

Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed unit.
669 D NVRAM error
Retry of NVRAM communication fails three times after the machine has
detected the NVRAM error.
Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting
SC681 D RFID: Communication error

 Communication error occurs at communication with the RFID
receptor.
 Retry of RFID communication failed
 Defective RFID reader and writer

 Disconnected ASAP I/F
 No memory chip on the toner cartridge
 Noise
M0AC/M257 5-36 SM
SC Tables
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
1. Remove and then re-insert each toner bottle.
2. Replace the toner bottle.
3. Confirm that RFID connectors and harnesses are connected
correctly.
4. If the connectors and harnesses are damaged, replace the
RFID_CPU board and Harness: ANTENNA: Toner Supply.
5. Replace the affected RFID_AFE board (KMCY). (See table
below.)
6. Replace the BCU.
Use the table below to determine which color is affected.

Examples:
 SC681-06 > K
 SC681-27 > C
 SC681-24 > Y
RFID_AFE Board (KMCY)
K C M Y
-06 -07 -08 -09
-11 -12 -13 -14
-16 -17 -18 -19
-21 -22 -23 -24
-26 -27 -28 -29
-31 -32 -33 -34
-36 -37 -38 -39
-41 -42 -43 -44
-46 -47 -48 -49
-51 -52 -53 -54
-56 -57 -58 -59
SM 5-37 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
682 D Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error
Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the

machine has detected the memory chip communication error.
 Damaged memory chip data

 Disconnected inter face
 No memory chip on the development unit
 Noise
Replace the PCDU.
683 C RFID: Unit check error
The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges
have not been installed in the machine.
 Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.
687 D Memory address command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the
controller for the prescribed time after the paper has reached the
registration sensor.
 Harness disconnection at BCU

 Controller board loose or broken
 Defective HDD
 Defective BCU
 Defective controller
M0AC/M257 5-38 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
1. Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BCU.
2. Update the firmware of the controller.
3. Replace the HDD.
4. Update the firmware of the BCU.
5. Replace the BCU.
690 D GAVD communication error
 The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.

 A device-status error occurs during I2C bus communication.
 The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other
than a buffer shortage.
 Loose connection
 Defective BCU
 Defective LD controller board

2. Check the cable connection.
4. Replace the BCU.
SM 5-39 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
5.1.8 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM
816 CTL Energy saving I/O sub-system error

D
The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error.
 Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.
840-00 B EEPROM error 1: EEPROM access CTL
 During the I/O processing, a read error occurred. The 3rd

reading failure causes this SC code.
 During the I/O processing, a write error occurred.
 Defective EEPROM
841-00 B EEPROM error 2: EEPROM read/write error CTL
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in

EEPROM.
 Data in EEPROM was overwritten for some reason.
M0AC/M257 5-40 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
842-00 C NAND-Flash Update Verify Error Detected. CTL
SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module

when remote ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash failed
 Cycle the machine off/on.

 Replace controller board
842-01 B Insufficient Nand-Flash blocks (threshold exceeded) CTL
At startup, or when machine returned from low power mode, the

Nand-Flash status was read and judged that the number of
unusable blocks had exceeded threshold, and then SCS
generated the SC code.
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
842-02 B Number of Nand-Flash block deletions exceeded CTL
At startup, or when the machined returned from low power mode,

the Nand-Flash was read and judged that the number of deleted
blocks had exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated this SC
code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash
855-01 B Wireless LAN card error 1 CTL
A problem occurred when the installed Wireless LAN device was

installed because is not supported by this machine, or the Wireless
LAN device is defective.
Wireless LAN device is not connected correctly, or the device is

defective.
SM 5-41 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
 Make sure that the wireless LAN is supported by this machine

(IEEE 802.11 Interface Unit Type O M417).
 Make sure that the device is installed correctly.
855-02 Wireless LAN card error 2 CTL
A problem occurred when the Wireless LAN device was not

initialized at power on.
The device is not installed correctly.
 Switch the machine off.

 Make sure that the device is installed correctly.
857 CTL USB interface error

B
The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error.
 Defective USB driver

 Loose connection
1. Check the connection.

2. Replace the USB board.
858 CTL HDD Encryption unit error 1

C
A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption
key with the HDD encryption unit.
[0] Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
 Defective controller board

[1] Encryption key setting for HDD error:

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
M0AC/M257 5-42 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
 Defective SATA chip on the controller board
[2] NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
 Defective NVRAM on the controller board

1. Replace the NVRAM.
[30] NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
 Defective controller board

[31] Other error:

A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
 Same as SC991
859 CTL HDD Encryption unit error 2

C
A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an
encryption key with the HDD encryption unit.
[8] HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
 No HDD installed
 Unformatted HDD
 The encryption key on the controller is different from the
one on the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.
2. Initialize the HDD.
[9] Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been
completed.
SM 5-43 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
 Power failure during the data encryption

[10] Data read/write error:

The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
 Same as SC863
860 CTL HDD: Initialization error

B
The controller detects that the hard disk fails.
 HDD not initialized

 Defective HDD
1. Reformat the HDD.

2. Replace the HDD.
863 CTL HDD: Read error

D
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.
 Defective HDD
1. Replace the HDD.

864 CTL HDD: CRC error

D
While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data
transmission fails.
 Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
M0AC/M257 5-44 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
865 CTL HDD: Access error

D
An error is detected while operating the HDD.
 Defective HDD
Replace the HDD.
866 CTL SD card authentication error

B
A correct license is not found in the SD card.
 SD-card data is corrupted.
Store correct data in the SD card.
867 CTL SD card error

D
The SD card is ejected from the slot.
1. Install the SD card.

868 CTL SD card access error

D  -13 to -3: File system error
 Other number: Device error
An error report is sent from the SD card reader.

 An error is detected in the SD card.
1. For a file system error, format the SD card on your PC.

2. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and on.
3. Replace the SD card.
SM 5-45 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
870 CTL Address book error

B
An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a
network.
 Defective software program

 Defective HDD
 Incorrect path to the server
1. Back up the address book data and Initialize the address book data
and the user information.
(Restore the address book data if possible.)
2. Replace the HDD.
872 CTL HDD mail data error

B
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
 Defective HDD
 Power failure during an access to the HDD

2. Initialize the HDD partition.
3. Replace the HDD.
873 CTL HDD mail transfer error

B
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
 Defective HDD
 Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Initialize the HDD partition.

2. Replace the HDD.
M0AC/M257 5-46 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
874 CTL Delete All error 1: HDD
D
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted
physically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit.
 DataOverwriteSecurity Unit (SD card) not installed

 Defective HDD
1. Install the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit.

2. Replace the HDD.
875 CTL Delete All error 2: Data area

D
An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted
logically by the DataOverwriteSecurity Unit.
 The logical format for the HDD fails.
Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
876 CTL Log Data Error

D
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or
during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the
machine off while it is operating.
-001 Log Data Error 1
 Damaged log data file in the HDD
Initialize the HDD.
 An encryption module not installed
1. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)

2. Install the DESS module.
SM 5-47 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730-004 ("0" is off.)
 Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Initialize the HDD.
 Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine
1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.

 Other than the above causes
Ask your supervisor.
877 CTL HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error

D
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the
DataOverwriteSecurity Unit is installed and activated.
 Defective SD card
 SD card not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card.

2. Check and reinstall the SD card.
M0AC/M257 5-48 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
878 CTL TPM system authentication error

D
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).
 Incorrect updating for the system firmware

 Defective flash ROM on the controller board
Replace the controller board.
5.1.9 SC9XX: MISCELLANEOUS
900 CTL Electric counter error

D
Abnormal data in the counters.
 Defective NVRAM
1. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.

2. Replace the NVRAM.
990 CTL Software performance error

D
The software makes an unexpected operation.
 Defective software
 Software error

2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware.
 See Note 1 at the end of the SC table.
SM 5-49 M0AC/M257
SC Tables
991 CTL Software continuity error

C
The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation.
However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the
software.
 Software program error

 Internal parameter incorrect, insufficient working memory.
This SC is not displayed on the operation panel (logging only).
992 CTL Undefined error

D
Defective software program
 An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Print the "Logging Data" with SP5990-004 and then check the SP7990.
If 498-Engine is found in the SP7990;
1. Check the harness connection of the temperature/humidity sensor.
2. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
997 CTL Application function selection error

B  The application selected by the operation panel key does not start
or ends abnormally.
 Software (including the software configuration) defective

 An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not
installed
 Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated
1. Check the devices necessary for the application program. If

necessary devices have not been installed, install them.
2. Check that application programs are correctly configured.
3. Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application
program. If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see
the logs.
M0AC/M257 5-50 SM
SC Tables
Troubleshooting
998 CTL Application start error

D
No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on.
 Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

 Software problem
1. Check if the DIMM memory is correctly connected.

2. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file),
the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information
needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to
get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must
analyze the data.
 Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
 Summary sheet (SP mode "Printer SP", SP1-004 [Print Summary])
 SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
 SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
 Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
 All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the
problem is logged.)
 Image file which causes the problem, if possible
SM 5-51 M0AC/M257
Process Control Results
5.2 PROCESS CONTROL RESULTS
5.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT

SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action
Successfully Developer -
completed initialization is
1
successfully
completed.
Forced Developer  A cover was opened or the main

termination initialization was switch was turned off during the
forcibly terminated. initialization.
1. Do the developer initialization again
2 when done in SP mode. Reinstall the
engine main firmware if the result is
the same.
2. Turn the main switch off and on when
done at unit replacement.
Vt error Vt is more than 0.7V 1. Make sure that the heat seal on the
6 when Vcnt is 4.3V. development unit is not removed.
2. Defective TD sensor
Vcnt error 1 Vcnt is less than 4.7V 1. Defective TD sensor

7 when Vcnt is Vt target 2. Vt target settings are not correct.
±0.2V. 3. Toner density error
Vcnt error 2 Vt is more than 0.7V 1. Make sure that the heat seal on the
when Vcnt is 4.3V and development unit is not removed.
8 Vcnt is less than 4.7V 2. Defective TD sensor
when Vcnt is Vt target
±0.2V.
M0AC/M257 5-52 SM
Troubleshooting
Vcnt error 3 Vcnt is less than 4.7V. 1. Make sure that the heat seal on the
development unit is not removed
9 2. Defective TD sensor
3. Vt target settings are not correct.
4. Toner density error
 The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP3-902-005, 006,
007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the
front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
5.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.
00000000 = YYCCMMKK
SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result)
Successfully Process control Check the Vsg adjustment. See the "Vsg
completed self-check Adjustment Result" following this table.
11
successfully
completed.
Vt error Vt maximum or  Defective development unit

minimum error is Vt maximum error and an image is faint:
detected. 1. Replace the toner supply pump unit.
Vt maximum error and an image is O.K:
41 1. Replace the development unit.
2. Replace the IOB board.
Vt minimum error:
1. Replace the development unit.
SM 5-53 M0AC/M257
ID sensor Not enough data can  Solid image is not sufficient density:
coefficient be sampled. 1. Retry the process control.
(K5) detection 2. Replace the ID sensors.
error 3. Replace the IOB board.
 Solid image is O.K.
53
1. Replace the ID sensors.
 ID sensor is dirty:
1. Clean the ID sensors.
2. Retry the process control.
ID sensor When the K5 is more  ID sensor pattern density is too high

coefficient than the value of or low.
(K5) SP3-362-003 or less  ID sensor or shutter is defective.
54
maximum/ than the value of Same as 53
minimum error SP3-362-004, the
error 54 is displayed.
Gamma error: Gamma is out of  ID sensor pattern density is too high.

55 Maximum range. 5.0 < Gamma  Hardware defective.
Same as 53
Gamma error: Gamma is out of  ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Minimum range.  Hardware defective.
56
Gamma < 0.15 1. Same as 53
2. Replace the toner supply pump unit.
Vk error: Vk is out of range.  ID sensor pattern density is too low.

57 Maximum 150 < Vk  Hardware defective.
Same as 53
Vk error: Vk is out of range.  ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Minimum Vk < –150  Background dirty
58
 Hardware defective
Same as 53
Sampling data Not enough data can  ID sensor pattern density is too high
error during be sampled during the or low.
59
gamma gamma correction.  Hardware defective
correction Same as 53
M0AC/M257 5-54 SM
Troubleshooting
Unexpected Process control fails.  Power Failure
99
error Check the power source.
Vsg Adjustment Result

SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result)
O.K Vsg adjustment -

1
is correctly done.
ID sensor Vsg cannot be  Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign

adjustment adjusted within material)
error 4.0 ±0.5V.  Dirty transfer belt
 Scratched image transfer belt
 Defective ID sensor
 Poor connection
 Defective IOB
2
1. Clean the ID sensor.
2. Check the belt cleaning. Clean or replace the
transfer belt.
3. Replace the image transfer belt.
5. Check the connection.
ID sensor ID sensor output  Defective ID sensor

output error is more than  Poor connection
"Voffset  Defective IOB
3
Threshold" 1. Replace the ID sensor.
(SP3-324-004) 2. Check the connection.
Vsg Vsg adjustment  Other cases

9 Adjustment has not been Retry SP3-321-010.
error completed.
SM 5-55 M0AC/M257
5.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y)
This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color
has an error (M, Y or C).
No. Result Description Note
0 Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. -
Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been -

1
successfully done,
Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for See Note
2
patterns line position adjustment.
Fewer lines on The patterns, which ID sensors have detected, See Note
3 the pattern than are not enough for line position adjustment.
the target
More lines on Not used in this machine. -

4 the pattern than
the target
Out of the ID sensors have correctly detected the patterns See Note
5 adjustment for line position adjustment, but a shift of
range patterns is out of adjustable range.
6-9 Not used - -
M0AC/M257 5-56 SM
Troubleshooting Guide
5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Troubleshooting
 Remove the NVRAM from the original engine control board and install it on the new one
when you replace the engine control board.
5.3.1 BLANK PRINT
Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions
No image is printed. Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit.
Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
Defective image transfer Replace the image transfer

belt unit belt unit.
Incorrect action of paper Check the guide and the

transfer roller paper transfer roller.
Defective HVPS Replace HVPS.
Defective BCU Replace the BCU.
5.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT
All the paper is black. Incorrectly installed PCDU Install the PCDU correctly.
Defective HVPS Replace HVPS.
Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit.
Defective main board Replace the main board.
SM 5-57 M0AC/M257
5.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR
C, M, or Y is missing. Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
Loose connection between Replace the drum

printer cartridge and BCU positioning cover.
Image transfer belt not Check the belt tension unit.

contacting PCDU
Defective the drum motor: Replace the drum motor:

CMY CMY.
5.3.4 LIGHT PRINT
Printed images are too Loose connection between Check the connection
weak. paper transfer roller and between the paper transfer
HVPS roller and the HVPS.
Dust in the laser beam path Clean the laser beam path.
Image transfer belt not Check the image transfer

contacting PCDU belt unit.
Defective paper transfer Repair the paper transfer

roller roller.
Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.
M0AC/M257 5-58 SM
5.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS
Troubleshooting
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain
components.
The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
[A]: Problems at regular intervals

[B]: Paper feed
The same spots or lines appear at regular intervals.
Interval Possible cause Necessary actions
At intervals of 35 mm (1.38 Defective charge roller Replace the PCDU.

inches)
At intervals of 33 mm (1.3 Defective development roller Replace the PCDU.

inches)
At intervals of 83 mm (3.27 Defective paper transfer roller Replace the paper

inches) transfer roller unit.
At intervals of 94 mm (3.7 Defective OPC drum Replace the PCDU.

inches)
At intervals of 126 mm (4.96 Defective fusing roller Replace the fusing roller
inches) or fusing unit.
At intervals of 141 mm (5.55 Defective pressure roller Replace the pressure

inches) roller or fusing unit.
At intervals of 204 mm (8.03 Defective fusing belt Replace the fusing unit.
inches)
SM 5-59 M0AC/M257
Interval Possible cause Necessary actions
At intervals of 795 mm (31.3 Defective image transfer belt Replace the image
inches) transfer belt or image
transfer belt unit.
At intervals of 41 mm (1.61 Defective image transfer roller Replace the image

inches) transfer roller.
At intervals of 82 mm (3.23 Defective image transfer belt Replace the image

inches) drive roller or image transfer transfer belt drive roller or
belt idling roller image transfer belt idling
roller.
5.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS
A dark line appears. The line Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
is parallel to the paper feed
direction of one CMY color.
A dark line appears. The line Dust in the laser beam path Clean the laser beam path.
is parallel to the paper feed
direction of any color (not C,
M, or Y).
M0AC/M257 5-60 SM
5.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS
Troubleshooting
White lines or bands appear Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

in images of all toner colors.
Defective paper transfer Replace the paper transfer

roller roller.
5.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES
Some parts of images are Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

missing.
Defective paper transfer Replace the paper transfer

roller roller.
5.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND
Backgrounds of one CMYK Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

color are too dense.
Backgrounds of more than Defective HVPS Replace the HVPS.

one CMYK are too
dense.color
SM 5-61 M0AC/M257
5.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS
Unexpected dots of the Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

same color appear at
irregular intervals.
5.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS
Unexpected streaks appear Defective image transfer Replace the image transfer
at irregular intervals. belt belt unit.
5.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS
Unexpected streaks of the Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

same color appear at
irregular intervals.
5.3.13 GHOSTING
The same or similar image Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

appears two or more times.
Defective transfer unit Replace the transfer unit.
They get weaker and
weaker.
M0AC/M257 5-62 SM
5.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS
Troubleshooting
Some parts of images are Non-standard paper in use Use recommended paper.
not fused very well.
Incorrect media type mode Select an appropriate media
mode.
5.3.15 IMAGE SKEW
Images are skewed Incorrect installation of Install the paper correctly.

paper
Incorrect paper guide Adjust the paper guide

position correctly.
 When adjusting the

paper width, use
the right side guide
only, with the green
clip. Do not hold
 the left side guide
at this time, or skew
will occur.
Defective registration roller Repair the paper feed unit.
Incorrect action of paper Check the paper transfer

transfer roller roller.
Incorrect installation of Uninstall the paper tray units

paper tray and re-install them.
SM 5-63 M0AC/M257
5.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN
The reverse side of the Unclean paper transfer Clean the paper transfer
paper is not clean. roller roller.
Unclean paper path Clean the paper path.
Unclean registration roller Clean the registration roller.
5.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE
Images are not printed in Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

the areas around the paper
Defective toner cartridge Replace the toner cartridge.
edges.
Image transfer belt not Check the image transfer

contacting PCDU belt unit.
M0AC/M257 5-64 SM
5.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE
Troubleshooting
Images do not come to the Incorrect installation of Install the paper correctly.
center. paper
Incorrect paper guide Adjust the paper guide

position correctly.
Incorrect margin setting Adjust the margin setting.
Incorrect installation of Uninstall the paper tray units

paper tray and re-install them.
SM 5-65 M0AC/M257
Jam Detection
5.4 JAM DETECTION
5.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY

SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
CODE: indicates the jam code.

SIZE: indicates the paper size code.
Total: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
5.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

SP 7504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 1 At Power On Paper has already stayed in the paper

-
path at power on.
7504 3 Tray 1: ON Paper is not fed from tray 1. A
7504 4 Tray 2: ON Paper is not fed from tray 2. Y
7504 5 Tray 3: ON Paper is not fed from tray 3 (LCT). Y
7504 6 Tray 4: ON Paper is not fed from tray 4. Y
7504 8 Bypass: ON Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray. A
7504 9 Duplex: ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit. Z
7504 11 V-Transport 1: ON Vertical transport sensor 1 does not

A
detect paper from tray 1.

Y
M0AC/M257 5-66 SM
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
Troubleshooting
SP Display

Y

Y
7504 17 Regist Sensor: ON Registration sensor does not detect

A
paper.
7504 18 Fusing Ent: ON Fusing entrance sensor does not detect

B
paper.
7504 19 Fusing Exit: ON Fusing exit sensor does not detect

C
paper.
7504 20 Paper Exit: ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper. C
7504 25 Duplex Exit: ON Duplex exit sensor does not detect

Z
paper.
7504 27 Duplex Ent: ON Duplex entrance sensor does not detect

Z
paper.
7504 28 Inverter Sn: ON Inverter sensor does not detect paper. C
7504 47 P-Feed 1: OFF Paper feed sensor 1 does not turn off. A
7504 48 P-Feed 2: OFF Paper feed sensor 2 does not turn off. Y
7504 51 V-Transport 1: OFF Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn

A
off.

Y
off.

Y
off.

Y
off.
SM 5-67 M0AC/M257
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 57 Regist Sensor: OFF Registration sensor does not turn off. B
7504 60 Paper Exit: OFF Paper exit sensor does not turn off. C
7504 65 Duplex Exit: OFF Duplex exit sensor does not turn off. Z
7504 67 Duplex Ent: OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not turn
Z
off.
7504 68 Inverter Sn: OFF Inverter sensor does not turn off. C
Paper Size Code
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05 (05H) A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF (8DH)
06 (06H) A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF (8EH)
14 (0EH) B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF (A0H)
38 (26H) LT LEF 164 LG SEF (A4H)
44 (2CH) HLT LEF 166 LT SEF (A6H)
133 (85H) A4 SEF 172 HLT SEF (ACH)
134 (86H) A5 SEF 255 Others (FFH)
M0AC/M257 5-68 SM
Electrical Component Defects
5.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
Troubleshooting
5.5.1 SENSORS
Sensor Name/ CN No./

No. Active Condition Symptom
Sensor Board Name Pin No.
Drum Phase Sensor Open

1 H CN108/2 SC381
(CMY) Shorted
Drum Phase Sensor Open

2 H CN107/2 SC380
(K) Shorted
Toner End Sensor (K) CN115/18 Open Toner end cannot be
Toner End Sensor (M) CN115/21 detected.

3 L
Toner End Sensor (C) CN115/24 Shorted Toner end is
Toner End Sensor (Y) CN115/27 detected.
Transfer Belt Contact Open

4 L CN128/21 SC442
Sensor Shorted
Paper Transfer Roller Open

5 L CN128/8 SC452
Contact Sensor Shorted
TD Sensor (K) CN108/19 Open SC372 (K)

TD Sensor (M) CN109/17 SC373 (M)
6 A Shorted
TD Sensor (C) CN108/8 SC374 (C)
TD Sensor (Y) CN109/25 SC375 (Y)
Open  Automatic line

position
Shorted
adjustment error:
Transfer belt unit
7 ITB Rotation Sensor A CN128/18
speed cannot be
detected, causing
image skew.
 SC285
SM 5-69 M0AC/M257

Open "Cover Open" is

displayed.
8 Front Door Sensor L CN104/1
Shorted Front cover open
cannot be detected.
Open Waste Toner near full
Waste Toner Bottle is indicated.

9 H CN118/19
Full Sensor Shorted Waste toner full
cannot be detected.
Open "Check the Left Cover

is closed and the
Waste Toner Bottle is
set correctly" is
displayed.
Waste Toner Bottle
10 L CN118/16 Shorted  Left cover open
Set Sensor
cannot be
detected.
 Waste toner
bottle set cannot
be detected.
Open  Printed image is

wrong, such as
Shorted
Temperature/Humidity rough image,
11 A CN127/1, 3
Sensor dirty background
or weak image.
 SC498
CN116/A11, Open
12 Paper Size Sensor A Paper size error
A12, A13 Shorted
Open Tray 1 is not
13 Tray1 Set Sensor L CN116/A15 detected.
Shorted Tray 1 is detected.
M0AC/M257 5-70 SM

Troubleshooting
Open Paper overflow is
Paper Overflow detected.

14 H CN104/9
Sensor Shorted Paper overflow is not
detected.
Open  Paper is not

detected.
 Jam C
15 Paper Exit Sensor L CN104/6
Shorted  Paper is
detected.
 Jam C
CN110/2, 5, Open
16 ID Sensor A SC400
8, 11 Shorted
Open
17 Thermistor A CN125/5, 7 SC554, SC544
Shorted
Pressure Roller Open

18 A CN125/9 SC564
Thermistor Shorted
Open "Cover Open" is

displayed.
19 Upper Cover Sensor L CN104/3
Shorted Top cover open
cannot be detected.
Open SC290, SC291,

20 LSU Shutter Sensor L CN128/11
Shorted SC292, SC293

detected.
 Jam A
21 Registration Sensor L CN129/16
detected.
 Jam B
SM 5-71 M0AC/M257

Paper Height Sensor CN116/A6, Open Remaining paper

22 A
1/2 A9 Shorted volume is wrong.
Open Paper is not detected.
23 Paper Feed Sensor L CN129/4 Shorted  Paper is

detected.
 Jam A

detected.
Vertical Transport  Jam A

24 L CN129/7
Sensor Shorted  Paper is
detected.
 Jam A
Open SC501
25 Paper Lift Sensor H CN129/13
Shorted SC501
Open  Paper end is not

detected.
26 Paper End Sensor L CN129/10  Jam A
Shorted  Paper end is

detected.
Open Paper jam is not

detected.
Fusing Entrance
27 L CN126/A14 Shorted  Paper jam is
Sensor
detected.
 Jam B

Duplex Entrance
28 L CN126/A8 detected.
Sensor
 Jam Z
M0AC/M257 5-72 SM

Troubleshooting
detected.
 Jam Z

detected.
 Jam Z
29 Duplex Exit Sensor L CN126/A11
Short  Paper is
detected.
 Jam Z
Open  Paper end is not

detected.
By-pass Paper End  Jam A
30 L CN126/B8
Sensor
Shorted  Paper end is
detected.

detected.
 Jam Z
31 Inverter Sensor L CN126/A2
detected.
 Jam Z
Open
32 Fusing Exit Sensor H CN104/12 Jam C
Shorted
SM 5-73 M0AC/M257
Optional Paper Feed Unit
Sensor Name/
CN No./
No. Sensor Board Active Condition Symptom
Pin No.
Name
CN103/1, 2, Open
1 Paper Size Sensor A Paper size error
3 Shorted
Open Tray is not detected.

2 Tray Set Sensor L CN103/7
Shorted Tray is detected.
Paper Height CN101/10, Open Remaining paper

3 A
Sensor 1/2 13 Shorted volume is wrong.
4 Paper Feed Sensor L CN101/16 Shorted  Paper is

detected.
 Jam Y1, Y2, Y3
Vertical Transport Shorted  Paper is

5 L CN101/19
Sensor detected.
 Jam Y1, Y2, Y3
6 Paper Lift Sensor H CN101/7 Shorted  Paper is

detected.
 Jam Y1, Y2, Y3
Open Paper end is

detected.
7 Paper End Sensor H CN101/4 Shorted  Paper end is not

detected.
 Jam Y1, Y2, Y3
M0AC/M257 5-74 SM
5.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Troubleshooting
Power Supply Unit
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
120V-127V 220V-240V
 24V power to the BCU and bridge

board not supplied.
FU1 8A/125V 8A/125V
 24VS2 power to the BCU not
supplied.
 24VS1 power to the BCU not

supplied.
FU2 8A/125V 8A/125V
 5VS power to the bridge board not
supplied.
 5V power to the BCU and bridge

board not supplied.
FU3 5A/250V 5A/250V
 5VS power to the bridge board not
supplied.
FU101 15A/250V 8A/250V Fusing SC occurs.
FU102 10A/250V 6.3A/250V No response
Power to all the anti-condensation heaters

FU103 2A/250V 2A/250V
not supplied.
5.5.3 LEDS
No LEDs are used for this model (except for the Network Interface).
SM 5-75 M0AC/M257
M0AC/M257
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
M0AC/M257 APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS .................................................... 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................ 1-1
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ........................................................................................ 1-4
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS............................................................................................ 1-6
1.3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE .......................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT............................................................................................... 1-7
1.4.1 PAPER FEED UNIT (M384) ................................................................................ 1-7
2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ................ 2-1

2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS .............................................................. 2-1
User Maintenance ................................................................................................... 2-1
Service Maintenance ............................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 OPTIONAL UNITS ............................................................................................... 2-3
Paper Feed Unit ...................................................................................................... 2-3
SM Appendix i M0AC/M257
APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
None
Specifications
1. APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Appendix:
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Desktop
Print Process: Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing

4 drums tandem method
Printer Languages: Standard: PCL5c, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF

Option: IPDS, XPS, PictBridge
Resolution: PCL5c:
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (2 bit)
PCL6:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (2 bit)
Adobe PS 3/ PDF:
1200 x 1200 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (2 bit)
IPDS:
600 x 600dpi (1bit)
XPS:
600 x 600 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (2 bit)
PictBridge:
600 x 600 dpi (2bit), 1200 x 1200 dpi
Gradation: 256 gradations
Printing Speed 42 ppm LT, 40 ppm A4
Resident Fonts: PCL5c/ 6:

45 fonts
13 International fonts
PS3/PDF:
136 fonts
IPDS (Option):
108 fonts
SM Appendix 1-1 M0AC/M257

Specifications
Host Interfaces: Gigabit Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-Tx/1000BASE-T):

Standard
USB2.0 (Type A/ B): Standard
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n (Wireless LAN): Optional
Parallel (IEEE1284): Optional
NIC2 Port: Optional
Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk
Color:
15 seconds or less (A4/ LT SEF)
First Print Speed:
Black and White:
10 seconds or less (A4/ LT SEF)
Warm-up Time 50 seconds or less
Standard tray: 550 sheets

Print Paper Capacity:
By-pass tray: 100 sheets
(80 g/m 2, 20lb)
Optional paper feed tray: 550 sheets
Refer to page 1-4 "".
- Minimum Maximum
Standard Tray 98 x 148 mm 216 x 355.6 mm

(3.9" x 5.9") (8.5" x 14.0")
Print Paper Size:
By-pass 70 x 127 mm 216 x 1260 mm
(2.8" x 5.0") (8.5" x 49.6 ")
Optional Tray 98 x 148 mm 216 x 355.6 mm

(3.9" x 5.9") (8.5" x 14.0")
Printing Paper Weight: Standard tray: 52-220 g/m 2 (14-59 lb)

By-pass tray: 52-256 g/m 2 (14-69 lb)
Optional paper feed tray: 52-220 g/m 2 (14-59 lb)
Duplex: 60-163 g/m 2 (16-44 lb)
Output Paper Capacity: Up to 500 sheets (A4/ LT/ 80 g/m 2 / 20 lb)

Up to 250 sheets (LG)
Memory: Standard: 1 GB
Power Source: 120V -127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A (for North America)
220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8 A (for Europe/Asia)
M0AC/M257 1-2 SM Appendix

Specifications
Power Consumption: 120 V: 1,552 W or less
Specifications
220-240 V: 1,565 W or less
Appendix:
Energy Saver: 1 W or less
Noise Emission: Color: 70.0 dB (A)

(Sound Power Level) Black and White: 70.0 dB (A)
Dimensions (W x D x 444 x 658 x 490 mm (17.48" x 25.91" x 19.29")

H):
Weight: 57 kg (126 lb)

Includes standard paper tray and PCDU.

Supported Paper Sizes
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
Main Tray PFU By-pass Tray

Paper Size (W x L) Duplex
NA E/A NA E/A NA E/A
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y Y# Y# Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y# Y Y# Y Y# Y# Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y# Y Y# Y Y# Y# Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y Y# Y# Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y Y# Y# Y
Half Letter Y Y# Y Y#
5.5" x 8.5" Y# Y# Y
SEF
Executive 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y Y Y# Y# Y

SEF
F/GL SEF 8" x 13" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y
Foolscap 8.5" x 13" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y

SEF
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y
16K SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y
mm 102 x
98 x 216 70 x 216
Custom 216
(Width) inch 4.02" x

3.94" x 8.5" 2.76" x 8.5"
8.5"
Custom mm 148 x
148 x 355.6 127 x 1260
(Length) 355.6

Supported Paper Sizes
Main Tray PFU By-pass Tray
Specifications
Paper Size (W x L) Duplex
Appendix:
NA E/A NA E/A NA E/A
inch 5.83" x
5.83" x 14" 5.00" x 49.61"
14"
Com10 Env. 4.13" x 9.5" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N
Monarch 3.88" x 7.5" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N

Env.
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N
Oficio SEF 8.5" x 13.4" Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y#
Y: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Y#: Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
N: Not supported

Software Accessories
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows
you to select which components to install.
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS
Windows Windows Windows

Printer Windows Windows Server server server Mac OS X:
Language Vista 7/ 8/ 8.1 2003/ 2008/ 2012/ v.10.7 - 10.10
2003R2 2008 R2 2012 R2
PCL 5c/6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
XPS Yes Yes No Yes Yes No
 The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file
for each operating system is provided with the driver.
 The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS X: v.10.7 to 10.10.
1.3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE
Software Description
Smart Device Monitor for A printer management utility for administrator.

Admin
Remote Communication Used to control devices connected to the same network.

Gate S Pro

Optional Equipment
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Specifications
Appendix:
1.4.1 PAPER FEED UNIT (M384)
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity: 550 sheets (3 units installable)
Paper Weight: 52 to 220 g/m 2 (14 to 59 lb.)
Paper Size: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Legal, Foolscap, Letter, Folio, F/GL,
Executive, Half Letter, Com10, Monarch, C5, C6, DL Env,
16K, Custom
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: Less than 52 W (Printing)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 444 mm x 590 mm x 140 mm (17.5" x 23.2" x 5.6")
Weight: 12 kg (26.5 lb.)

APPENDIX:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
None
Maintenance Tables
2. APPENDIX: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Tables
TABLES
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS
User Maintenance
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Item 50K 100K 120K - EM Remarks
PCDU
PCDU – KCMY R
ITB and PTR unit
Image Transfer Belt

R
Unit
Paper Transfer Roller

R
Unit
Fusing
Fusing Unit R
Miscellaneous
Waste Toner Bottle R
Dust Filter R
Chart: A4 (LT) / 5%
Mode: 2 prints / job
Color Ratio 50%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

Maintenance Tables
Service Maintenance
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Item 50K 60K 120K 180K EM Remarks
PCDU
PCDU – KCMY R
ITB and PTR unit
Image Transfer Belt

R
Unit
Paper Transfer Roller

R
Unit
Fusing
Fusing Unit R
Paper Path
Sensors (except ID
C Dry cloth
sensors)
ID Sensors C Damp cloth
Rollers C Damp cloth
Paper Dust Container C Clean with vacuum

cleaner
Miscellaneous
Waste Toner Bottle R
Dust Filter R
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 2 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 25%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

Maintenance Tables
2.1.2 OPTIONAL UNITS
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
C: Clean
Tables
Paper Feed Unit
This table shows the service maintenance items for the following options.
 Paper Feed Unit PB1020 (M384)
Item EM Remarks
Feed Roller C Dry cloth
Separation Roller C Dry cloth
Pick-up Roller C Dry cloth
Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth
Vertical Transport Sensor C Dry cloth
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth

M384
PAPER FEED UNIT
PB1020/PB1020T*
None
*HC (HEALTHCARE MODEL)

M384 (PAPER FEED UNIT PB1020)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................. 1

1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS ................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 LEFT COVER ...................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 RIGHT COVER .................................................................................... 1
1.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ............................. 2
1.2.1 SEPARATION ROLLER....................................................................... 2
1.2.2 PICK-UP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS............................................. 3
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..................................................................... 4
1.3.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR ........................................................................ 4
1.3.2 DRIVE BOARD .................................................................................... 5
1.3.3 COOLING FAN .................................................................................... 6
When installing the cooling fan ................................................................ 6
1.3.4 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ....................................................................... 7
1.3.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR............................................................................. 8
1.3.6 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD .......................................................... 9
1.3.7 TRAY SET SENSOR ........................................................................... 9
1.3.8 PAPER FEED SENSOR .................................................................... 10
1.3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR .................................................. 11
1.3.10 PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................... 12
1.3.11 PAPER HEIGHT SENSOR 1 ...................................................... 13
1.3.12 PAPER LIFT SENSOR................................................................ 14
1.3.13 PAPER HEIGHT SENSOR 2 ...................................................... 15
SM i M384
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

Replacement Procedure Safety
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the replacement procedures in this manual.
Symbols Used in this Manual
This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clamp
: Clip ring
: E-ring
External Covers
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS
Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any
procedure in this section.
1.1.1 LEFT COVER
1. Left cover [A] ( x2).
1.1.2 RIGHT COVER
1. Right cover [A] ( x2).
SM 1 M384
Pick-up, Paper Feed and Separation Rollers
1.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
ROLLERS
1.2.1 SEPARATION ROLLER

2. Cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Separation roller [A] ( x 1)
M384 2 SM
Pick-up, Paper Feed and Separation Rollers
1.2.2 PICK-UP AND PAPER FEED ROLLERS

Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
3. Pick-up roller [A]

4. Paper feed roller [B]
SM 3 M384
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.3.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR

1. Right cover ( p.1)
2. Paper feed motor bracket [A] ( x3, x1, x1)
3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x2)
M384 4 SM
1.3.2 DRIVE BOARD

Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
2. Drive board [A] ( x4, x6)
SM 5 M384
1.3.3 COOLING FAN

2. Cooling fan base [A] ( x2, x1, x1)
3. Cooling fan [A] ( x2)
When installing the cooling fan

Make sure that the cooling fan is installed with its decal facing to the front of the paper feed
unit.
M384 6 SM
1.3.4 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
2. Paper feed clutch bracket [A] ( x3)
3. Paper feed clutch holder [A] ( x2, x1, x1, bushing x1)
4. Paper feed clutch [B]
SM 7 M384
1.3.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

1. Left cover ( p.1)
2. Tray lift motor bracket [A] ( x3, x2, x1)
3. Two gears [A] ( x1 each)
4. Tray lift motor [A] ( x2)
M384 8 SM
1.3.6 PAPER SIZE SENSOR BOARD

Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
2. Paper size sensor board [A] ( x2, x1)
1.3.7 TRAY SET SENSOR

2. Tray set sensor holder [A] ( x3, x2, x1)
3. Tray set sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
SM 9 M384
1.3.8 PAPER FEED SENSOR
1. Paper feed sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
2. Paper feed sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
M384 10 SM
1.3.9 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR
Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
1. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x1, x1)
2. Vertical transport sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
SM 11 M384
1.3.10 PAPER END SENSOR
1. Upper rear cover [A] ( x2)
2. Upper front cover [A] ( x2, x3)
3. Remove the actuator [A].
M384 12 SM
Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
4. Paper end sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)

1. Upper rear cover ( p.12 "Paper End Sensor")
2. Upper front cover ( p.12 "Paper End Sensor")
3. Remove the actuator [A].
4. Paper height sensor 1 [A] ( x1, x1, hooks)
SM 13 M384
1.3.12 PAPER LIFT SENSOR

3. Paper lift sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
4. Paper lift sensor [A] ( x1, hooks)
M384 14 SM

Unit PB1020
Paper Feed
(M384)
3. Paper height sensor 2 bracket [A] ( x1)
4. Paper height sensor 2 [A] ( x1, hooks)
SM 15 M384

Manual de Serviço

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Serviço

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Serviço

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M0AC/M257

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2016 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh Americas Corporation

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ........................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 2-1

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 3-1

4. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE REFERENCE ..................................... 4-1

Important Safety Notices

Reference Material for Maintenance

Before Installation, Maintenance

Installation, Disassembly, and Adjustments

 Use only standard tools approved for machine maintenance.

 Before you begin a maintenance procedure:

Power Plug and Power Cord

 Never incinerate used toner or toner cartridges.

Points to Confirm with Operators

Handling and Storing Toner

 Toner, used toner, and developer are extremely flammable.

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

 The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.

 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

1.1.1 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Item Machine Code Remarks

Up to three tray units can be

Caster Table Type C M393 Common with M065/ M066

Hard Disk Drive Option

IEEE802.11 Interface unit

IEEE1284 Interface Board Common with M065/ M066

USB Device Server Option

Camera Direct Print Card

VM CARD Type P7 M479-08

IPDS Unit Type P7 M479-01, -02, -03

Direct Print Option Type P7 M479-05, -06, -07

SD CARD SET FOR FONT

1.2 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE FAMILIAR WITH

The M0AC/M257 is similar to the M065 and M066 models.

1.2.1 DIFFERENT POINTS FROM PREVIOUS PRODUCTS

New Predecessor Models

M0AC/M257 M065 M066

LT: 42 ppm, LT: 37 ppm, LT: 42 ppm,

Controller Type GW+ GW

Power Switch DC Switch AC Switch

HDD Option Option Standard

ELP-NX Option Option Standard

Log-storing function Available Not available

1. Toner Bottle [Y] 10. By-pass Tray

1.3.2 PAPER PATH

[A]: Duplex Unit

1.3.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS

A: Over 500 mm (19.7")

2.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS